B-63177en 01 100922

Power Mate i - Model D/H
Operation and
Maintenance Handbook
B-63177EN/01
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by ® or ™ in the main body.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC
units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to 3
ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all
descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some
precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be
applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine,
as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool 4
builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program
to control the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully
familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder.
5
CONTENTS
1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . s–2

6
2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–3
3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED 7

TO PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–5
4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED

TO HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–7
8
5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . s–9
6. RENAMING OF PMC MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–12
10
s–1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
1
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning,
Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
2
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or 3

when there is a damage of both the user being injured and the
equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not
observed.
4
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being

damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed. 5
NOTE
6
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other
than Warning and Caution.
7
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
10
s–2
2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
1
WARNING
1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first

checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a 2
production run, ensure that the machine is operating
correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the
single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function
or by operating the machine with neither a tool nor
workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct 3
operation of the machine may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the

entered data.
4
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
5
3. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the
intended operation. Generally, for each machine, there is
a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate
varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual
provided with the machine to determine the maximum 6
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the
correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself,
or injury to the user.
4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly 7

check the direction and amount of compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user. 8
5. The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory–set.
Usually, there is not need to change them. When,
however, there is not alternative other than to change a
parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function
of the parameter before making any change.
9
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the
machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing
damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury
to the user.
10
6. Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch
any of the keys on the MDI panel until the position display
or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to
maintenance or other special operations. Pressing any
of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its
normal state. Starting the machine in this state may
cause it to behave unexpectedly.
s–3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
1
7. The operator’s manual and programming manual
supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall description of
the machine’s functions, including any optional functions.
Note that the optional functions will vary from one
machine model to another. Therefore, some functions 2
described in the manuals may not actually be available for
a particular model. Check the specification of the
machine if in doubt.
8. Some functions may have been implemented at the 3

request of the machine–tool builder. When using such
functions, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine–tool builder for details of their use and any
related cautions.
4
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in

nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained
even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted
5
inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to delete all
data from nonvolatile memory as part of error recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure
quick restoration of deleted data, backup all vital data, and
keep the backup copy in a safe place. 6
10
s–4
3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
PROGRAMMING
1
This section covers the major safety precautions related to
programming. Before attempting to perform programming, read the
supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully such
that you are fully familiar with their contents.
2
WARNING
3
1. Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the

machine may behave unexpectedly as a result of the
program issuing an otherwise valid move command.
Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the 4
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
2. Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation 5

(positioning by nonlinear movement between the start
and end points), the tool path must be carefully confirmed
before performing programming.
Positioning involves rapid traverse. If the tool collides
with the workpiece, it may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
6
3. Function involving a rotation axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation, pay

careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis. 7
Incorrect programming may result in the rotation axis
speed becoming excessively high, such that centrifugal
force causes the chuck to lose its grip on the workpiece
if the latter is not mounted securely.
Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine 8
4. Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not

convert the measurement units of data such as the 9
parameter and current position. Before starting the
machine, therefore, determine which measurement units
are being used. Attempting to perform an operation with
invalid data specified may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user. 10
s–5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
1
5. Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed control

approaches the origin of the workpiece coordinate
system, the spindle speed may become excessively 2
high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum
allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable
speed incorrectly may damage the tool, the machine
3
6. Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference

position return as required. Stroke check is not possible
before manual reference position return is performed.
Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not
4
issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly
damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
causing injury to the user.
7. Absolute/incremental mode 5
If a program created with absolute values is run in
incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine may
behave unexpectedly.
6
8. Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation

or a canned cycle, the machine may behave
unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the respective
functions for details. 7
9. Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably

when a programmable mirror image is enabled. 8
10. Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system

or a reference position return command is issued in
compensation function mode, compensation is
9
temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected
behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore,
always cancel compensation function mode.
10
s–6
4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
HANDLING
1
This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of
machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the
supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully, such
that you are fully familiar with their contents.
2
WARNING
3
1. Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the

current position of the tool and workpiece, and ensure
that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have
been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the 4
machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
2. Manual reference position return

5
After switching on the power, perform manual reference
position return as required. If the machine is operated
without first performing manual reference position return,
it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible
before manual reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage
6
the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury
to the user.
3. Manual handle feed

7
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large
scale factor, such as 100, applied causes the tool and
table to move rapidly. Careless handling may damage the
tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.
8
4. Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a

macro variable) during rigid tapping or other tapping, the
speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool,
the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the 9
operator.
5. Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when 10

the machine is operating under the control of a program.
Otherwise, the machine may behave unexpectedly,
possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the tool, or
causing injury to the user.
s–7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
1
6. Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may

shift the workpiece coordinate system. Before attempting
to operate the machine under the control of a program, 2
confirm the coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program
without making allowances for any shift in the workpiece
coordinate system, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine 3
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
7. Software operator’s panel and menu switches
Using the software operator’s panel and menu switches,

in combination with the MDI panel, it is possible to specify
4
operations not supported by the machine operator’s
panel, such as mode change, override value change, and
jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated
inadvertently, the machine may behave unexpectedly, 5
possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
8. Manual intervention
6
If manual intervention is performed during programmed
operation of the machine, the tool path may vary when the
machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after
manual intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the
manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental command mode. 7
9. Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block

functions can be disabled using custom macro system 8
variable #3004. Be careful when operating the machine
in this case.
10. Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the

9
machine. During a dry run, the machine operates at dry
run speed, which differs from the corresponding
programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may
sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
10
11. Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining

program is edited (modification, insertion, or deletion), the
machine may behave unexpectedly if machining is
resumed under the control of that program. Basically, do
not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining
program while it is in use.
s–8
5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE
1
WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement

2
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the
power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an
emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is
performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only
those personnel who have received approved safety and 3
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an
insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents 4
an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
NOTE
5
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its
memory, because it must retain data such as programs,
offsets, and parameters even while external power is not
applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is 6
displayed on the machine operator’s panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the
batteries within a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC’s
memory will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operator’s manual or
programming manual for details of the battery replacement
7
procedure.
10
s–9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
1
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the

power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an
emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is 2
performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only
those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an 3
insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents
an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
4
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its

absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is 5
displayed on the machine operator’s panel or Zscreen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the
batteries within a week. Otherwise, the absolute position data
held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the SERVO MOTOR α series Maintenance Manual or 6
SERVO MOTOR β series Maintenance Manual.
10
s–10
WARNING
1
3. Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary

to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received 2
approved safety and maintenance training may perform
this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful
not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
3
Touching an uncovered high–voltage circuit presents an
extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
10
s–11
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6. RENAMING OF PMC MODELS
This manual presents programming descriptions for the PMC models

1
listed in the following table. Note that some models have been renamed;
in the product name column, the old names are enclosed in
parentheses, while the new names appear above the old names.
However, the previous specifications are still applied to the renamed
models. Thus, when using the renamed models, users should: 2
D Read the old names shown in this manual as the new names.
D Read the old names appearing on the units as the new names.
3
Table. PMC Model Name
Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC PMC–MODEL SB5 PMC–SB5
(Old name: FANUC PMC–MODEL RB5) (PMC–RB5)
FANUC PMC–MODEL SB6 PMC–SB5 4
(Old name: FANUC PMC–MODEL RB6) (PMC–RB5)
10
s–12
GENERAL
The Operation and Maintenance Handbook is for persons who are familiar
with NC programs and operations. It is used to refer to necessary informa-
tion quickly in operating or maintaining NC machine tools at a work site.
The Handbook only contains reference information. It does not contain other
types of information, such as essential information or notes. Read the follow-
ing manuals first.
The Handbook assumes that the reader is familiar with the information in the
following manuals.
Specification
Name of Manual
Number
FANUC DESCRIPTIONS B–63172EN
Power Mate i–MODEL D/H
FANCU CONNECTION MANUAL B–63173EN
Power Mate i–MODEL D/H (Hardware)
FANUC CONNECTION MANUAL B–63173EN–1
Power Mate i–MODEL D/H (Function)
FANUC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63174EN
FANUC MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–63175EN
FANUC PARAMETER MANUAL B–63180EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E

a series
FANUC AC SPINDLE DESCRIPTIONS B–65152E
MOTOR a series
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER DESCRIPTIONS B–65162E
a series
FANUC SERVO MOTOR MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–65165E
a series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR PARAMETER MANUAL B–65150E
a series
FANUC AC SPINDLE PARAMETER MANUAL B–65160E
MOTOR a series
FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL B–62714EN
FANUC Ethernet Board/ OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63354EN
DATA SERVER Board
FANUC DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63404EN
FANUC FL–net Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63434EN
FANUC PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61863E
Ladder Language
The Operation and Maintenance Handbook provides information about the

following CNC units. The following symbols and system names are used in
the Handbook.
Product Name Abbreviations

FANUC Power Mate i–MODEL D Power Mate i–D PM i–D
Power Mate i
FANUC Power Mate i–MODEL H Power Mate i–H PM i–H
CONTENTS
1. SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1
2. OPERATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2
3. G CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3
4. PROGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4
5. CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

5
6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC

DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 6
7. HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
7
8. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8
9. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

9
10. PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

10
11. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY

AND SYMBOLIC KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 11
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
1. SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Display Unit and Key Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Operation of MDI Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.1 Screen transition chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.2 Displaying the current position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.3 Display for handle interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.2.4 Displaying the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2.5 Editing the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2.6 Displaying the program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2.7 Transferring data to and from the floppy disk . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.8 Displaying and setting the tool compensation values . . . . . 24
1.2.9 Displaying and setting the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.10 Displaying and setting the custom macro variables . . . . . . 28
1.2.11 Displaying and setting the data for the software operator’s
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.2.12 Displaying and setting the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.2.13 Displaying the internal state of the CNC
(diagnostic screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.2.14 Displaying the system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.2.15 Displaying and setting the pitch error
compensation values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.2.16 Displaying the alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.2.17 Displaying the operator messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.2.18 Displaying the alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.3 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.3.1 Alarm detail screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.3.2 Operation method screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.3.3 Parameter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.4 BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.4.1 BOOT and INIT operations performed if the
DPL/MDI operation package is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2. OPERATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.1 CRT/MDI (FANUC Touch Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.2 DPL/MDI OPERATION PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3. G CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4. PROGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5. CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.1 Types of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.2 System Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.3 Argument Assignment I/II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.4 Arithmetic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.5 Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.6 Macro Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.7 Command Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.1 Displaying CNC Internal State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.1.1 Procedure for displaying diagnostic screen . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.1.2 Display of status in which command is not apparently
executed (No. 000 – 015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.1.3 Information indicating automatic operation stop, automatic
idle statuses (No. 020 – 025) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.1.4 TH alarm statuses (No. 030, 031) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.1.5 Display of the cause of alarm 5800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.1.6 Digital servo system, serial pulse coder alarm
(No. 200, 280) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.1.7 Positional error display (No. 300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.1.8 Machine position display (No. 301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.1.9 Cause of the APZ bit (bit 4 of parameter 1815)
brought to 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.1.10 Spindle data (No. 400–420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.1.11 Rigid tapping display (No. 450–457) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.1.12 Simplified synchronous control display (No. 540) . . . . . . . 117
6.1.13 Display related to the dual position feedback function
(No. 550–553) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.2 Screen Display at Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.3 System Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.4 Interface between CNC and PMC/MT and
Displaying I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.4.1 Signal summary (in order of functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.4.2 Address list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7. HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
7.1 Total Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
7.2 Total Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
7.3 Connector Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7.4 Configuration of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7.5 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board and LED Display . . . . . 176
7.5.1 Base printed circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
7.5.2 Card PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
7.5.3 Memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
7.5.4 DIMM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
7.5.5 FANUC I/O link–II board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
7.5.6 High–speed serial bus (HSSB) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
7.5.7 Profibus–DP slave board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.5.8 Ethernet board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.5.9 DeviceNet board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
7.6 Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
7.7 Methods for Dismounting and Mounting Printed–Circuit
Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
7.7.1 Methods for dismounting and mounting the base
printed–circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
7.7.2 Mounting and demounting card PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
7.7.3 Mounting and demounting DIMM modules . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
7.7.4 Methods for dismounting and mounting the option board 195
7.8 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.8.1 Battery for memory backup (3 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.8.2 Replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder
(servo amplifier α series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.8.3 Replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder
(β series servo amplifier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
7.8.4 Replacing batteries in the separate battery case . . . . . . . 199
7.9 Setting/Display/Maintenance using the Main Unit of
The Power Mate i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7.9.1 Status indication with no alarm generated . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7.9.2 Indication in alarm condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
7.9.3 Number displayed when a system alarm is issued . . . . . 202
7.9.4 7–segment LED indication status change at power–up . . 203
7.9.5 Operation at power–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.9.6 Setting in normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
8. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.1 How to Enter the Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.2 Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
9. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
9.1 Alarms Displayed on NC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
9.1.1 Program errors (P/S alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
9.1.2 Background edit alarm (BP/S alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
9.1.3 Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
9.1.4 Serial pulse coder (APC) alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
9.1.5 Servo alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
9.1.6 Overtravel alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
9.1.7 Overheat alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
9.1.8 Rigid tapping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
9.1.9 Serial spindle alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
9.1.10 System alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
9.1.11 List of alarms (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
9.1.12 Error messages (for I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
9.1.13 Alarms displayed on spindle servo unit and CNC . . . . . . 333
9.1.14 Error codes that may be displayed during
high–speed response function compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
10. PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
10.1 Dynamic Display of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
10.2 Display of PMC Diagnosis Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
10.2.1 Title screen (TITLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
10.2.2 Status screen (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
10.2.3 Alarm screen (ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
10.2.4 Trace screen (TRACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
10.2.5 Displaying memory data (M.SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
10.2.6 Signal waveform display function screen (ANALYS)
(Memory card for ladder diagram editing is necessary) . 349
10.3 PMC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10.3.1 Input of PMC parameter from MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10.3.2 Timer screen (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10.3.3 Counter screen (COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
10.3.4 Keep relay screen (KEEPRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
10.3.5 Data table screen (DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
10.3.6 Setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
10.4 Input/Output of PMC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
10.4.1 Start of the built-in type PMC programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
10.4.2 Input/output method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
10.4.3 Copy function (COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
10.5 Functional Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
10.5.1 Functional instruction list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
10.5.2 Detail of function command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
AND SYMBOLIC KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
1. SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.1 Display Unit and Key Layout
Fig.1.1 (a) CRT/MDI (9” monochrome)
Address/numeric keys
Function keys
Shift key
Cancel (CAN) key
Input key
Edit keys
Help key
Reset key
Cursor keys
Page change keys
Fig.1.1 (b) MDI keyboard
1
Functions of MDI keyboard
No. Name Functions 1

(1) <RESET> key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an
alarm, etc.
RESET
(2) <HELP> key Press this button to use the help function when
uncertain about the operation of an MDI key. 2
HELP
(3) Soft key The soft key has various functions, according to
the Applications. The soft key functions are
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
(4) Address/numerical Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, 3
key and other characters.
...
(5) <SHIFT> key Some keys have two characters on their key-
SHIFT
4
SHIFT top. Pressing the key switches the char-
acters. Special character £ is displayed on the
screen when a character indicated at the bot-
tom right corner on the keytop can be entered.
(6) <INPUT> key When an address or a numerical key is
pressed, the data is input to the buffer, and it is 5
INPUT
displayed on the CRT screen. To copy the data
in the key input buffer to the offset register, etc.,
INPUT
press the key.
This key is equivalent to the [INPUT] key of the
soft keys, and either can be pressed to produce 6
the same result.
(7) Cancel <CAN> key Press this key to delete the last character or
symbol input to the key input buffer. The con-
CAN
tents of the key input buffer are displayed on
the CRT screen. 7
Example: When the key input buffer displays
N001X100Z and the cancel CAN
key is pressed, Z is canceled and

N001X100 is displayed.
8
(8) Program edit key Press this key when editing the program.
ALTER INSERT DELETE ALTER : Alter
INSERT : Insert
9
DELETE : Delete
(9) Function key Press this key to switch display screens for
each function.
POS PROG
10
2
No. Name Functions

(10) Cursor move keys There are four different cursor move keys.
: This key is used to move the cursor to

the right or in the forward direction.
The cursor is moved in short units in
the forward direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor to
the left or in the reverse direction.
The cursor is moved in short units in
the reverse direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in
a downward or forward direction.
The cursor is moved in large units in
the forward direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in
an upward or reverse direction.
The cursor is moved in large units in
the reverse direction.
(11) Page change keys Two kinds of page change keys are described
below.
PAGE
PAGE PAGE : This key is used to changeover the

page on the screen in the forward
direction.
: This key is used to changeover the
PAGE page on the screen in the reverse
direction.
3
1.2 Operation of MDI Panel
1.2.1 Screen transition chart 1
SCREENS INCLUDED IN POS
POS
2
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ (OPRT) ]
3
ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL HANDLE
POSITION POSITION POSITION INTERRU-
(ABSOLUTE) (RELATIVE) (ALL) PTION
4
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
5
SCREENS INCLUDED IN PROG (MEM mode)
PROG
6
PROGRAM
AUTO
[ PRGRM ] [ CHECK ] [ CURRNT] [ NEXT ] [ (OPRT) ]

7
CONTENTS PROGRAM PROGRAM

OF (CURRENT (NEXT
PROGRAM BLOCK) BLOCK)
8
[ ABS ] [ REL ]
PROGRAM PROGRAM
CHECK
(ABSOLUTE)
CHECK
(RELATIVE)
9
PROGRAM
AUTO
10
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
4
SCREENS INCLUDED IN PROG (EDIT mode)
PROG
PROGRAM
EDIT
[ PRGRM ] [ LIB ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
PROGRAM PROGRAM
EDITING DIRECTORY
SCREEN SCREEN
PROGRAM
EDIT
[ ] [ ] [ FLOPPY] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
FILE
DIRECTORY
OF FLOPPY
SCREENS INCLUDED IN OFFSET

SETTING
OFFSET
SETTING
OFFSET
[ OFFSET] [ SETING] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
TOOL SETTING
OFFSET SCREEN
SCREEN
VARIABLE
[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ OPR ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
MACRO MENU OPERATOR’S

VARIABLE PROGRAM PANEL
DISPLAY MING
5
SCREENS INCLUDED IN SYSTEM
SYSTEM
PARAMETER
[ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [ SYSTEM] [ (OPRT) ] 2
PARAMETER DIAGNOSIS PMC SYSTEM

SETTING SCREEN SCREEN STRUCTUAL
SCREEN SCREEN
3
PARAMETER
[ ] [ PITCH ] [ SV.PRM ] [ SP.PRM ] [ (OPRT) ]

4
PITCH SERVO SPINDLE
ERROR COM- PARAMETER PARAMETER
PENSATION SCREEN SCREEN
PARAMETER
5
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
6
SCREENS INCLUDED IN MESSAGE
MESSAGE
ALARM MESSAGE 7
MDI
[ ALARM ] [ MSG ] [ HISTRY ] [ ] [ ]
8
ALARM OPERATOR ALARM
MESSAGE MESSAGE HISTORY
SCREEN SCREEN SCREEN
SCREENS INCLUDED IN HELP

9
HELP
HELP (INITIAL MENU)

10
[ 1 ALAM ] [ 2 OPR ] [ 3 PARA ] [ ] [ ]
HELP HELP HELP

(ALARM (OPERATION (PARAME -
DETAIL) METHOD) TER TABLE)
6
1.2.2 Displaying the current position

(1) Displaying the position using absolute coordinates
(a) Press soft key [ABS].
Program number
Sequence
number
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) O1000 N00010
X 123.456
Y 363.233
Z 0.000
PART COUNT 5 Parameter
(No.6711)
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T0000 Time from
when the OP
signal is
turned off
(One machin-
AUTO STRT MTN*** 09:06:35 ing cycle)
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
Parameter DPF Inches/min is used when Parameter DPS

(bit 0 of No.3105)=1 values are input in inches. (bit 2 of No.3105)=1
Displaying the number of parts and the operation time
(b) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
(c) Related parameters

Parameter NDP (bit 0 of No.3115) : 0: The current position is
displayed for each axis.
1: The current position is not
displayed for each axis.
Parameter PCM (bit 0 of No.6700) : The total number of machined
parts and the number of
machined parts are
incremented when the
following M codes are
specified.
0: M02, M03, and the M codes
specified with parameter No.
6710
1: The M codes specified with
parameter No. 6710
Parameter NCT (bit 7 of No. 6700) : The operation time and the
number of parts are:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
Parameter No. 6710: M code that counts the total number of
machined parts and the number of machined
parts in the current operation
Parameter No. 6711: Number of machined parts
Parameter No. 6751: Operation time (integrated time value during
automatic operation) [ms]
Parameter No. 6752: Operation time (integrated time value during
automatic operation) [min]
NOTE Hours and minutes are displayed on
the screen.
Parameter No. 6757: Operation time (integrated value in one
automatic operation) [ms]
7
Parameter No. 6758: Operation time (integrated value in one
automatic operation) [min]
NOTE Hours, minutes, and seconds are dis- 1
played on the screen.
(2) Displaying the position using relative coordinates
(a) Press soft key [REL].
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) O1000 N00010 2
X 123.456
Y 363.233
Z 0.000 3
PART COUNT 5
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
4
AUTO STRT MTN*** 09:06:35
(b) Operation 5
Soft key [(OPRT)] Axis Coordinate [PRESET]
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
Axis [EXEC]
[PTSPRE] [EXEC] 6
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
(3) Overall display

(a) Press soft key [ALL].
Distance from an arbitrary position
7
ACTUAL POSITION O1000 N00010

(RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE)
Coordinate
X 246.912
Y 913.780
X 123.456
Y 456.890
system used 8
for absolute
Z 1578.246 Z 789.123 commands
(MACHINE) (DISTANCE TO GO)

X 0.000 X 0.000 Remaining
distance to
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 move in
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 automatic
operation
9
PART COUNT 5
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
AUTO **** *** *** 09:06:35
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ] 10
Distance from the reference position
(b) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] Axis Coordinate [PRESET]
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
Axis [EXEC]
[PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
8
(4) Current position screen (for the DPL/MDI operation package)
D Operation
F1
Workpiece coordinates
POS
Machine coordinates
9
1.2.3 Display for handle interrupt
(1) Press soft key [HNDL].
1
The distance traveled due to a handle interrupt is displayed.
The displayed unit is switched between inch and
metric (by setting in G20 and G21)
HANDLE INTERRUPTION O0000 N02000

(INPUT UNIT) (OUTPUT UNIT)
2
X 69.594 X 69.594 Displayed in
the unit
Y 137.783 Y 137.783 specified by
Z –61.439 Z –61.439 parameter INM
(bit 0 of
(RELATIVE) (DISTANCE TO GO) No.100)
X 0.000 X 0.000 (mm/inch)
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
3
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
PART COUNT 5
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 10:29:51 4
(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC] 5
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]
(3) Related signals
DGN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6
G041 HS2ID HS2IC HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID HS1IC HS1IB HS1IA
DGN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7
G042 HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA
NOTE HS3In is effective only in the PM i–H.
10
10
1.2.4 Displaying the program

(1) Program contents screen
(a) Press soft key [PRGRM].
PROGRAM O2000 N00130

O2000 ;
N100 G92 X0 Y0 Z70. ;
N110 G91 G00 Y–70. ;
N120 Z–70. ;
N130 G03 X–17.5 Y17.5 R17.5 ;
N140 G01 X–25. ;
N150 G02 X27.5 Y27.5 R27.5 ;
N160 G01 X20. ;
N170 G02 X45. Y45. R45. ;
>_ S 0 T0000
MEM STRT *** 16:05:59
[ PRGRM ] [ CHECK ] [CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ (OPRT) ]
(b) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] ³ See the EDIT mode screen.
O Program number [O SRH]
N Sequence number [NO.SRH]
[REWIND]
N Sequence number [P TYPE]
N Sequence number [O TYPE]
11
(2) Program checking screen
(a) Press soft key [CHECK].
1
PROGRAM CHECK O2000 N00130
O0010 ;
G92 G90 X100. Y200. Z50. ; Contents of the program.
G00 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
G01 Z250. F1000 ;
(ABSOLUTE) (DIST TO GO) G00 G94 G80 2
X 0.000 X 0.000 G17 G21
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 G90 Modal
information
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 G22 G49 G67
H M
T
F S
3
>_
MDI *** *** 16:05:59
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
Absolute or relative coordinates can be switched by software 4

(b) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] ³ See the EDIT mode screen.
O Program number [O SRH] 5

N Sequence number [NO.SRH]
[REWIND]
N Sequence number [P TYPE] 6
N Sequence number [O TYPE]
(3) Screen displaying the contents of the program currently running

(a) Press soft key [CURRNT]. 7
(CURRNT) (MODAL)
G01 X 17.500 G01 F 2000
G17 F 2000 G17 8
H 2 G91
G80 G22
G94 Modal
Block data being processed G21 H 2 information
Data with a decimal point
corresponds to the absolute
command.
G49 T
Data without a decimal point G80 9
corresponds to the incre- S
mental command.
>_ S 0 T0000
AUTO STRT *** 16:05:59
10
(b) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG-EDT] → See the EDIT mode screen.
12
(4) Screen displaying the current and next blocks

(a) Press soft key [NEXT].

(CURRNT) (NEXT)
G01 X 17.500 –17.500
G17 F 2000
H 2
G80
Note) Contents of the program

Data with a decimal point corresponds read into the buffer.
to the absolute command. Data without Nothing is displayed for
a decimal point corresponds to the in- single block operation.
cremental command.
>_ S 0 T0000
AUTO STRT *** 16:05:59
(b) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG-EDT] → See the EDIT mode screen.
13
1.2.5 Editing the program
(1) Program editing screen (Press soft key [PRGRM].)
1
O2000 ; Sequence
N100 G92 X0 Y0 Z70. ; number
N110 G91 G00 Y–70. ;
N120 Z–70. ; Program
number
2
N130 G03 X–17.5 Y17.5 R17.5 ;
N140 G01 X–25. ;
N150 G02 X27.5 Y27.5 R27.5 ;
N160 G01 X20. ;
N170 G02 X45. Y45. R45. ;
3
>_ S 0 T0000
MEM STRT *** 16:05:59
(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT]
5
Address or word
[SRH±]
Address or word
[SRH°] 6
[REWIND]
7
[F SRH] [CAN]
N File number [EXEC]
[READ] [MERGE]
8
(The cursor moves to the end of the
program.)
[EXEC]
[STOP]
[CAN] 9
O Program number [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
10
Note) To specify all the programs, enter

O–9999.
[DELETE] [CAN]
N File number [EXEC]
14
[EX–EDT] [COPY]
[CRSRX]
[XCRSR]
[XBTTM]
[ALL]
Program INPUT [EXEC]
number
[MOVE]
[CRSRX]
[XCRSR]
[XBTTM]
[ALL]
number
[MERGE]
[X’GCRSR]
[XBTTM’]

number
[CHANGE]
ADDRESS/WORD [BEFORE]
ADDRESS/WORD [AFTER]
[SKIP]
[EX–SGL]
[EXEC]
(3) Operation of expanded editing function

(a) When copying or moving the program
[EX–EDT]
[COPY] NOTE
[MOVE] when moving
Move the cursor to the start of the section to be copied
[CRSRX]
Move the cursor to the end of the section to be copied

[XBTTM] [ALL]
[XCRSR]
Type the program number and press INPUT
[EXEC]
15
(b) When inserting another program in the program being edited
[EX–EDT]
1
When inserting after
[MERGE] the end of the program
Move the cursor to the position to which the other

program is to be inserted
[X’CRSR] [XBTTM’] 2
Type the program number and press INPUT
[EXEC]
3
(c) When replacing an address or word
[EX–EDT]
[CHANGE]
4
Word or address to be replaced
[BEFORE]
New word or address

5
[AFTER]
[SKIP] [EX–SGL] [EXEC]
Program (for the DPL/MDI operation package) 6
10
(1) Program input/output
(a) Program display operation F2

PRG
16
(b) Searching for the beginning of a file

EDIT or AUTO ³ Program screen ³ Address N ³ File number ³
F7
RD
(c) Deleting a file

EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Protect off ³ Address N ³ File number ³
Delete
(d) Inputting a program
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ F7

RD
(e) Inputting a program in the background
F2 Back F7
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ and ³
PRG space RD
(f) Outputting a program

EDIT ³ Program screen ³ ISO or EIA ³ Address O ³ Program
number or –9999 ³
F8
WRT
(2) Editing a program
(a) Search
D Method using scanning
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ or

± °
D Word search method
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Address ³ Numeric value ³

±
or
°
D Address search method
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Address ³ or

± °
(b) Inserting a word
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Search for the word before which a word
is to be inserted ³ Address, numeric value ³

Insert
(c) Changing a word

EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Search for the word to be changed ³
Address, numeric value ³

Home
17
(d) Deleting a word
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Search for the word to be deleted ³
1
Address, numeric value ³
Delete
(e) Deleting a block

EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Search for the block to be deleted ³ 2
and
; Delete
(f) Deleting several blocks at a time

EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Perform an N search to search for the first
3
block to be deleted ³ Sequence number of the last block to be deleted
³
Delete
4
(g) Program number search
EDIT or AUTO ³ Program screen ³ Address O ³ Program number
³
± 5
(h) Sequence number search
EDIT or AUTO ³ Program screen ³ Address N ³ Sequence number
³
±
6
(i) Deleting a program
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Address O ³ Program number or O–9999
³ 7
Delete
(j) Operation in MDI mode
To erase all created programs, press + 8

O Delete
(k) Background editing

To start and end background editing:
9
F2 Back
Press and at the same time.
PRG space
(l) Creating a program

To create a program using the keyboard: 10
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Program number ³

Insert
18
(m) Automatically inserting a sequence number
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ Initial value of address N ³ ³

Insert
³
; Insert
(n) Creating a program in TEACH IN mode

TEACH IN JOG, STEP ³ Positioning ³ Program screen ³ Axis
address ³
Insert
(o) Macro statement editing
EDIT ³ Program screen ³ ³ Program input ³

Enter Home
³ Back ³ End
space
19
1.2.6 Displaying the program list
(1) Press soft key [LIB].
1
(a) When parameter NAM (bit 0 of No. 3107) = 0
PROGRAM DIRECTORY O0001 N00010

PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)
USED: 60 3321
FREE: 3 429 Memory
utilization
2
O0240 (SHAFT XSF301 ) : ( ) condition.
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999 One–meter
O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666 paper tape
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040 contains
about 400
characters.
Program numbers
3
>_ S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 16:05:59
[ PRGRM ] [ LIB ] [ ] [ C.A.P. ] [ (OPRT) ]
4
(b) When parameter NAM (bit 0 of No. 3107) = 1
PROGRAM DIRECTORY O0001 N00010
PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.) 5

USED: 60 3321
FREE: 3 429
O0240 (SHAFT XSF301 ) : ( )
O0001 (MACRO–GCODE.MAIN)
O0002 (MACRO–GCODE.SUB1)
O0010 (TEST–PROGRAM.ARTHMETIC NO.1)
O0020 (TEST–PROGRAM.F10–MACRO) 6
O0040 (TEST–PROGRAM.OFFSET)
O0050
O0100 (INCH/MM CONVERT CHECK NO.1)
O0200 (MACRO–MCODE.MAIN)
>_
EDIT **** *** *** 16:05:59
7
[ PRGRM ] [ LIB ] [ ] [ C.A.P. ] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] ³ Same as PRGRM
8
[READ] [MERGE]
[STOP] 9
[CAN]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN] 10
(3) Related parameters

Parameter NAM (No. 3107#0): Only program numbers are listed/
Program numbers and program
names are listed.
Parameter SOR (No. 3107#4): Programs are listed in the order of
registration/in the order of program
number.
20
1.2.7 Transferring data to and from the floppy disk

(1) Press soft key [FLOPPY].
DIRECTORY (FLOPPY) O0001 N00000

NO.FILE NAME (METER) VOL
0001 PARAMETER 58.5
0002 O0001 1.9
0003 O0002 1.9
0004 O0010 1.3
0005 O0040 1.3
0006 O0050 1.9
0007 O0100 1.9
0008 O1000 1.9
0009 O9500 1.6
EDIT **** *** *** 11:53:04

[ ] [ ] [ FLOPPY ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Operation
(a) Soft key configuration
Soft key [(OPRT)] [F SRH] File number [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[READ] File number [F SET]
Program number [O SET]

[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] File number [F SET]
Program number [O SET]

[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[DELETE] File number [F SET]
File name [F NAME]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[RENAME] File number [F SET]
File name [F NAME]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
(b) To list the files

[F SRH] File number [F SET] [CAN]
[EXEC]
PAGE
(c) To read the program

[READ] File number [F SET] Program number [O SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
21
(d) To output the program
[PUNCH] File number [F SET] Program number [O SET]
1
Can be omitted when the To specify all the [CAN]
program is added to the programs, enter [EXEC]
same file. “–9999”
(e) To delete the program

[DELETE] File number [F SET] [CAN] 2
[EXEC]
File name [F NAME] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(f) To rename the program

File number
3
[RENAME] [F SET] New file name [F NAME]
[CAN]
[EXEC]

4
Channel I/O=0 I/O=1 I/O=2 I/O=4 (Memory card
interface)
Common Parameter (No. 0100)
Output Parameter Parameter Parameter
format (No. 0101) (No. 0111) (No. 0121) 5
Specifica - Parameter Parameter Parameter
tion number (No. 0102) (No. 0112) (No. 0122)
Transfer Parameter Parameter Parameter
rate (No. 0103) (No. 0113) (No. 0123)
6
Transfer Not defined
method
Connector JD42
0020 I/O channel selection 7

0: Channel 1
1: Channel 1
2: Channel 2
8
4: Memory card interface (NC main unit)
6: DNC1/Ethernet (must be set up only if DNC operation is to be
performed)
7: Memory card interface (FANUC touch panel side)
20: Group 0 9
21: Group 1 Data is input and output via the FANUC I/O Link
to and from the Power Mate in group n (where n
to to
= 0 to 15)
35: Group 15
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 10
0101 NFD ASI SB2
#7(NFD) 0: The feed code is output when data is punched out.

1: The feed code is not output when data is punched out.
#3(ASI) 0: EIA or ISO code is used when data is input.
1: ASCII code is used when data is input.
#0(SB2) 0: The number of stop bits is one.
1: The number of stop bits is two.
22
0102 Specification number of the input/output device
0 RS-232-C (Control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.)

1 FANUC Bubble Cassette B1/B2
2 FANUC Floppy Cassette F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate
FANUC FA Card adapter
FANUC Floppy Cassette adapter, FSP-H
4 RS–232C
(Control codes DC1 to DC4 are not used.)
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR, FSP-G, FSP-H
0103 Baud rate (set transfer rate)
7: 600 9: 2400 11: 9600

8: 1200 10: 4800 12: 19200 [BPS]
NOTE This screen is displayed when the floppy disk drive is specified as
the input/output device for the unit.
23
1.2.8 Displaying and setting the tool compensation values
(1) Press soft key [OFFSET].
1
OFFSET O0001 N00000
NO . DATA NO. DATA
001 1.000 009 0.000
002 –2.000 010 –7.500
003 0.000 011 12.000 2
004 5.000 012 –20.000
005 0.000 013 0.000
006 0.000 014 0.000
007 0.000 015 0.000
008 0.000 016 0.000
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) 3

X 0.000 Y 0.000
>_
MDI **** *** *** 16:05:59
[ OFFSET ] [ SETING ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Operation
(a) Tool length compensation (H code)
[(OPRT)] Offset number [NO.SRH] 5
Axis [INP.C.]
Offset value [+INPUT]
Offset value [INPUT]

6
(3) Related signal
KEY1<G046#3>: Tool compensation values and offset values from the
workpiece reference point can be input.
10
24
Displaying and setting the tool compensation value (for the DPL/MDI
operation package)
D Operation
F3
MEN Data Enter
VAR ° ±
F6
&@ Offset No. Enter
No.
25
1.2.9 Displaying and setting the data
(1) Press soft key [SETING]. 1
SETTING (HANDY) O0000 N00000
PARAMETER WRITE = 1 (0 : DISABLE 1 : ENABLE) ALM 100

TV CHECK = 0 (0 : OFF 1 : ON) ALM 002
PUNCH CODE = 1 (0 : EIA 1 : ISO) 2
INPUT UNIT = 0 (0 : MM 1 : INCH) G20/G21
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (0–3 : CHANNEL NO.)
SEQUENCE NC. = 0 (0 : OFF 1 : ON) Parameter
(No.3216)
3
>_
MDI **** *** *** 15:06:56
[ OFFSET] [ SETING ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
4
SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) O1234 N00000
MIRROR IMAGE X = 1 (0 : OFF 1 : ON) Signal

(MMIx) indi-
5
MIRROR IMAGE Y = 0 (0 : OFF 1 : ON) cating that
MIRROR IMAGE Z = 0 (0 : OFF 1 : OM) mirror image
processing is
in progress
>_
MDI **** *** *** 14:47:57
7
SETTING (TIMER) O0000 N00000 8

Parameter
PARTS TOTAL = 0 (No.6712)(*1)
PARTS REQUIRED = 25 (No.6713)
PARTS COUNT = 10 (No.6711)
POWER ON = 0H 0M (No.6750)(*1)
OPERATING TIME = 0H 0M 0S (No.6751,6752)
9
CUTTING TIME = 0H 0M 0S (No.6753,6754)
FREE PURPOSE = 0H 0M 0S (No.6755,6756)
CYCLE TIME = 0H 0M 0S (No.6758,6759)
DATE = 2000
95/10/04
TIME = 16:18:01
>_ 10
MEM **** *** *** 14:47:57
Not incremented if the parameter for disabling the display of the

operation time and the number of parts (bit 7 of No. 6700) is set.
NOTE *1 Cannot be changed on this screen (but can be changed on the

parameter screen).)
26
PARAMETER (SETTING) O0000 N00000
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001 FCV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL 0
0022 0
>_
MDI **** *** *** 15:43:11
[ W.DGNS] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] Setting number [NO.SRH]
[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
Numerical value [+INPUT]
Numerical value [INPUT]
Displaying and setting setting data (for the DPL/MDI operation package)
D Operation
F3
MEN ° or ± Data Enter
VAR
27
1.2.10 Displaying and setting the custom macro variables
(1) Press soft key [MACRO].
1
VARIABLE O0000 N00000
NO. DATA NO. DATA

100 01000.000 108
101 10000.000 109
102 23000.000 110 –22000.00 2
103 111
104 00120.000 112
105 113
106 500000.00 114
107 115
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE)
U 0.000 W 0.000 3
>_ S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 16:05:59
[ MACRO ] [ ] [ OPR ] [ TOOLLF ] [ (OPRT) ]
4
VAR. : O1234 N00000 (*1)
NO. NAME DATA COMMENT

500 123.456
501 0.000
502 3.210 5
503
504
505
506
507
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE)
X 0.000 Y 0.000
6
Z 0.000
>_
MDI **** *** *** 15:50:13
[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] Variable number [NO.SRH]
8
Axis [INP.C.]
Variable value [INPUT]
[INPUT] : Delete the input value

9
(3) Related parameter
Parameter MCV (bit 2 of No. 3290): Entering macro variables from
the MDI panel is allowed/inhib-
ited. 10
(4) Related signal
KEY2<G046#4>: Data and macro variables can be input.
28
Displaying and setting the custom macro variables (for the DPL/MDI
operation package)
D Operation
F3
MEN ° ±
VAR
F6 Variable
&@ number Enter
No.
Data Enter Set data
X Enter Set workpiece coordinates
Enter Enter a blank
29
1.2.11 Displaying and setting the data for the software operator’s
panel
1
(1) Press soft key [OPR].
OPERATOR’S PANEL O0000 N00000
MODE : MDI AUTO EDIT STEP JOG ZRN

2
STEP MULTI. : ***(HNDL:*1 STEP:*1)
RAPID OVRD.: 100% 50% 25% F0
JOG FEED : 1.0%
**************
FEED OVRD. : 140%
***
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) 3
X 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000
>_ S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 16:05:59
[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ OPR ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
4
OPERATOR’S PANEL O0000 N00000
BLOCK SKIP : J OFF ON 5

SINGLE BLOCK : OFF J ON
MACHINE LOCK : J OFF ON
PROTECT KEY : J PROTECT RELEASE
FEED HOLD : J OFF

X 0.000 Y 0.000 6
Z 0.000
S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 16:05:59
[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ OPR ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ] 7
OPERATOR’S PANEL 01234 N12345
: J OFF ON 8
: J OFF ON
: J OFF ON
: J OFF ON
: J OFF ON
: J OFF ON
: J OFF ON
: J OFF ON 9
X 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 B 0.000
>_
MDI **** *** ***
[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ OPR ] [ ] [ ]
10
30
(2) Related signals

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO
F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O
F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO
F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O
F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O
F081 –J4O +J4O –J3O +J3O –J2O +J2O –J1O +J1O

Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1
Selects the operations performed on the software operator’s panel.

#6(OP7) Feed hold
#5(OP6) Program protection
#4(OP5) Optional block skip, single block operation, machine lock,
and dry run
#3(OP4) Manual feedrate override and rapid traverse override
#2(OP3) Selecting the axis and magnification for the manual pulse
generator
#1(OP2) Manual feed axis selection and manual rapid traverse
#0(OP1) Mode selection
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7202 NS0 NS2
#6(NS2) The general–purpose switches on the software

operator’s panel are used (0)/not used (1).
#5(NS0) The software operator’s panel is used (0)/not used (1).
31
7220 Names of general–purpose software switches
7283 Names of general–purpose software switches
Decimals converted from ASCII codes are set as character codes. 2
Parameters No. 7220 to No. 7227: Name of general-purpose switch 1

3
Parameters No. 7260 to No. 7267: Name of general-purpose switch 6 4

5
To set “FANUC” as the name of general-purpose switch 1, set the
parameters as follows: No. 7220 = 70, No. 7221 = 65, No. 7212 = 78, No.
7213 = 85, and No. 7214 = 67.
6
10
32
1.2.12 Displaying and setting the parameters

See Chapter 8 for details of the parameters.
(1) Press soft key [PARAM].

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001 FCV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL 0
0022 0
>_
MDI **** *** *** 15:43:11
[ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [SYSTEM ] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Entering values from the MDI panel

1 Set PARAMETER WRITE to 1 in the setting screen.
2 Alarm 100 occurs. Press the CAN and RESET keys simultaneously
to temporarily stop the alarm.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display the operation menu including
the following:
a) Enter a parameter number and press [NO.SRH]:
Searches for the specified number.
b) Soft key [ON:1]: Sets the value at which the cursor is
positioned to 1. (Only for bit parameters)
c) Soft key [OFF:0]: Sets the value at which the cursor is
positioned to 0. (Only for bit parameters)
d) Soft key [+INPUT]: Adds the entered value to the value at
which the cursor is positioned.
(Only for word parameters)
e) Soft key [INPUT]: Sets the value at which the cursor is
positioned to theentered value.
(Only for word parameters)
f) Soft key [READ]: Inputs parameters from the reader/punch
interface.
g) Soft key [PUNCH]: Outputs parameters to the reader/punch
interface.
(3) Convenient methods for entering data

(a) To change data in units of bits
Pressing or changes the cursor to 1-bit size, which enables

setting in units of bits (only for bit parameters).
33
(b) Use EOB to continuously set data starting from the cursor position.
(Example1) 1
When 1 2 3 4 EOB
4 5 6 7 EOB
9 9 9 9 INPUT
is entered,
0 1234 2
0 → 4567
0 9999
0 0
(Example2)
When
1 2 3 4 EOB EOB
9 9 9 9 INPUT 3
is entered,
0 1234
0 → 0
0 9999
0 0 4
(c) Use = to enter the same data.
(Example)
When 1 2 3 4 EOB = EOB = INPUT is entered, 5
0 1234
0 → 1234
0 1234
0 0
6
(d) For bit parameters
(Example)
When 1 1 EOB = EOB = INPUT

is entered,
00000000 00011000 7
00000000 00011000
00000000 00011000
00000000 00000000
10
34
Displaying and setting the parameters (for the DPL/MDI operation package)
D Operation
PWE=1
F4
DGN Data Enter
PRM ° ±
F6
Parameter
&@ number Enter
No.
PWE=0 Back Cancel alarm 100

&@
space
35
1.2.13 Displaying the internal state of the CNC (diagnostic screen)
See Chapter 6 for details of self-diagnosis.
1
(1) Press soft key[DGNOS].
DIAGNOSTIC (GENERAL) O1234 N00000
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0

2
001 MOTION :0
002 DWELL :0
003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
005 INTERLOCK/START–LOCK :0
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0 3
>_
MDI **** *** *** 15:50:47
4
10
36
1.2.14 Displaying the system configuration

(1) Press soft key [SYSTEM].
SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT) O1234 N00000

Software
series
SLOT MODULE ID SERIES VERSION

Software
00 10DD : 40 88E0 0002 version
Software ID
Module ID
Slot number
>_ (80 to 8F are
on the second-
MDI **** *** *** 15:51:25 ary side.)
(2) Software configuration screen

Kind of software
Software series
SYSTEM CONFIG (SOFTWARE) 01234 N12345

PAGE:02
Software version
SYSTEM 88E0 0001
BASIC Software configuration
SERVO 9090 0001
PMC(SYS) 407B 0001
PMC(LAD) PMI 0001
Character written on
MACRO LIB BZG1 0001 PMC title screen
BOOT 881I 0001
AUTO **** *** *** 12:14:59

[ PARMA ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [ SYSTEM ] [ (OPRT) ]
(3) Module configuration screen

Displays the configuration of a module mounted on a printed circuit
board.
(a)
SYSTEM CONFIG (MODULE) 01234 N12345

PAGE:03
SLOT 00 MOTHER BOARD (b)
AXIS CTRL CARD : FF

CPU CARD : 09
FROM DIMM : 41
SRAM DIMM : 01 (c)
DRAM DIMM : 85
PMC CPU : 01
(d)
AUTO **** *** *** 12:14:59

37
Contents of display
(a) Slot number (The number is corresponding to PCB configuration
screen) 1
(b) Type of PCB mounted
(c) Name of card PCB or DIMM module
(d) Hardware ID of mounted card PCB or DIMM module
PAGE
2
Pressing the PAGE key PAGE displays the system configuration
screen of other PCBs.
NOTE See the section on the configuration of the printed circuit boards in
the control unit for the correspondence between each module and
displayed item. 3
Displaying the internal state of the CNC (diagnostic screen) (for the
DPL/MDI operation package)
D Operation
F4
DGN Data display
PRM ° ± 9
F6
Diagnostic
&@ number Enter
No.
10
38
1.2.15 Displaying and setting the pitch error compensation values

(1) Press soft key [PITCH].
PIT–ERROR SETTING O1234 N00000
NO. DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA

0000 1 0010 0 0020 0
0001 0 0011 1 0021 1
0002 0 0012 0 0022 0
0003 1 0013 –1 0023 1
0004 –1 0014 2 0024 3
0005 0 0015 0 0025 0
0006 1 0016 0 0026 –1
0007 0 0017 1 0027 0
0008 0 0018 0 0028 0
0009 1 0019 0 0029 0
>_
MDI **** *** *** 15:55:24
[ ] [ PITCH ] [ ] [SYSTEM ] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] Compensation number [NO.SRH]
[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
Compensation value [+INPUT]
Compensation value [INPUT]
[READ] N File number
[EXEC]
Note) EDIT mode
[CAN]
[READ] [EXEC]
Note) EDIT mode
[CAN]
39
Displaying and setting the pitch error compensation values (for the DPL/MDI
operation package)
1
D Operation
F4 6
DGN Data Enter
PRM ° ±
F6 Pitch error
&@ com- Enter
No. pensation 7
number
10
40
1.2.16 Displaying the alarm messages

(1) Press soft key [ALARM]
ALARM MESSAGE O0000 N0000
100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE

510 OVER TRAVEL :+1
521 OVER TRAVEL :–2
S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** ALM 13:28:26
[ ALARM ] [ MSGHIS ] [ HISTRY ] [SYSTEM ] [ ]
(2) Related parameter

Parameter NPA (No. 3117#7): Switches/does not switch to the
alarm screen when an alarm occurs.
Displaying the alarm messages (for the DPL/MDI operation package)
D Operation
F5 Alarm display
OPR
ALM
Message display
41
1.2.17 Displaying the operator messages
(1) Press soft key [MSG].
1
MESSAGE HISTORY O1234 N12345 Date, time,
No. 2000 PAGE : 1 and page
INTERLOCK (*IT1) ON Message
No.
Display
range
(Up to 255
characters)
3
MDI **** *** *** 15:55:24

[ ALARM ] [ MSGHIS ] [ HISTRY ] [ ] [ ]
1.2.18 Displaying the alarm history

(1) Press soft key [HISTRY].
5
ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345
97/04/18 20:56:26
506 OVERTRAVEL : +X
97/04/18 19:58:11 6
000 TURN OFF POWER
97/04/18 19:52:45
000 TURN OFF POWER
97/04/18 19:48:43
300 APC ALARM : X–AXIS ZERO RETURN REQUEST
97/04/18 18:10:10
507 OVERTRAVEL : +B 7
MDI **** *** *** 15:55:24

[ ALARM ] [ MSG ] [ HISTRY ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
(2) Deleting the alarm history

Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then [CLEAR].
9
(3) About alarms
D When the parameter (No. 3112#3)=0
1 Alarms generated by a custom macro
The alarms have numbers in the range of 3000 to 3999 and are
referred to as macro alarms in the message.
10
(Example) #3000=1(ERROR1)
→Found as 3001 macro alarm in the history
2 Alarms generated by a DISP or DISPB instruction in the PMC
The alarms have numbers in the range of 1000 to 1999 and are
referred to as external alarms in the message.
(Example) DISP instruction A000.0 1000 ERROR1
→Found as 1000 external alarm in the history
42
1.3 Help Function
1 Pressing HELP in any screen displays the help screen (except in the
PMC screen).
HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N00001
***** HELP*****
1. ALARM DETAIL
2. OPERATION METHOD
3. PARAMETER TABLE
S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 00:00:00
[ ALARM ] [ OPERAT ] [ PARAM ] [ ] [ ]
1.3.1 Alarm detail screen

1 Pressing soft key [ALARM] while an alarm is generated displays the
help message for the alarm.
HELP (ALARM DETAIL) O1234 N00001
NUMBER:094
M’SAGE:P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD CHG)
FUNCTION:RESTART PROGRAM
ALARM:
WHEN COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING IS
CONDUCTED AFTER HOLDING
AUTOMATIC OPERATION, P–TYPE (WHEN TOOL
IS DAMAGED) PROGRAM
RESTART CANNOT BE EXECUTED.
S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 00:00:00
[ ALARM ] [ OPERAT ] [ PARAM ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], enter the alarm number, and then press soft
key [SELECT] to display the help message for the alarm corresponding
to the entered number.
43
1.3.2 Operation method screen
1 Pressing soft key [OPERAT] displays the operation help message.
1
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N00001
1. PROGRAM EDIT
2. SEARCH
3. RESET 2
4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI
5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE
6. OUTPUT
7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
8. OUTPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
9. MEMORY CLEAR
3
MEM **** *** *** 00:00:00
[ ALARM ] [OPERAT ] [ PARAM ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
4
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], enter the number of the item to be displayed,
and then press soft key [SELECT] to display the operation method.
PAGE
Use and PAGE to select another page.
HELP (ALARM METHOD) O1234 N00001

5
Current
<< 1. PROGRAM EDIT >> 1/4 page/total
*DELETE ALL PROGRAMS number of
MODE : EDIT pages
SCREEN : PROGRAM
OPR : (O9999) – <DELETE>
6
*DELETE ONE PROGRAM
MODE : EDIT
SCREEN : PROGRAM
OPR : (O+PROGRAM NUMBER) – <DELETE>
>_ 7
MEM **** *** *** 00:00:00
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ SELECT ]
8
1.3.3 Parameter contents
Pressing soft key [PARAM] displays the parameter contents.
HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N00001

1/4
Current
page/total
9
number of
* SETTEING (No.0000–) pages
* READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (No.0100–)
* AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (No.1000–)
* COORDINATE SYSTEM (No.1200–)
* STROKE LIMIT (No.1300–)
* FEED RATE (No.1400–) 10
* ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (No.1600–)
* SERVO RELATED (No.1800–)
* DI/DO (No.3000–)
MEM **** *** *** 00:00:00

[ ALARM ] [ OPERAT ] [ PARAM ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
PAGE
Use and PAGE to select another page.
44
1.4 BOOT SYSTEM

J The BOOT system of the Power Mate i–D/H loads NC control software
and P-CODE programs from the FROM (flash ROM) into the DRAM
when the power is turned on, subsequently operating according to that
data.
J In addition to the above, the BOOT system supports the following
functions:
D Writing files from a memory card to the FROM
D Displaying a directory of files in the FROM
D Deleting files from the FROM
D Writing user files, stored in the FROM, to a memory card
D Inputting/outputting data to and from the SRAM as a batch
D Deleting files stored on a memory card
D Formatting a memory card
F Displaying the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen

1 Turn on the power while holding down both the rightmost soft key
(continuation key) and the soft key to its left.
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Turn on the power while holding

down these two soft keys.
D If FANUC touch panel is used, press the upper left corner of the
touch panel screen until the BOOTSYSTEM screen appears. To
manipulate the screen, touch labels on the softkey menu.
2 The SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen appears.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 881I–01
1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING

2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5. SRAM DATA BACKUP
6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT
10.END
***MESSAGE***
SELECT MODE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]
3 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to the
desired item.
45
D The functions of the items are as follows.
1 SYSTEM DATA LOADING Reads ROM data from a memory card and 1
writes it into the FROM.
2 SYSTEM DATA CHECK Displays the file directory for the FROM.
3 SYSTEM DATA DELETE Deletes user files, such as ladder programs,
stored in the FROM.
4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Writes user files, such as ladder programs, 2
stored in the FROM to a memory card.
5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Writes or reads parameters, machining pro-
grams, and macro variables to or from a
memory card.
6 MEMORY CARD FILE Deletes files stored on a memory card. 3
DELETE
7 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Formats a memory card.
10 END Terminates the system monitor.
4
4 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
The selected item is executed.
When the basic NC software has not been written into the FROM, the
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen automatically appears at power 5
on.
F Reading files from a memory card

(SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen)
(1) Display the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen by following the 6
procedure below.
1 On the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, use the [UP] or
[DOWN] soft key to position the cursor to 1. SYSTEM DATA
LOADING.
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key. 7
The file directory is displayed.
SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1

FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO1. MEM
MACRO2. MEM
8
LADDER. ROM
END
9
***MESSAGE***
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ] 10
46
(2) From the file directory, select the file to be read by following the
procedure below.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to the file to
be read.
SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1

FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO1. MEM
MACRO2. MEM
LADDER. ROM
END
***MESSAGE***
To display the To display the

preceding screen next screen
D When the file directory is too large to fit on the screen, the screen
can be scrolled by pressing the or soft key.
D To return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, position
the cursor to END, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
Any file name can be assigned to the files stored on a memory card.
The system automatically determines the type of a file from its contents
when reading that file.
(3) A confirmation sign appears at the bottom of the screen. To continue

the operation, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the operation,
press the [NO] soft key.
(4) While a file is being read, the following message is displayed on the
screen.
“READ DATA FROM MEMORY CARD”
±
“F-ROM ERASING”
± Displaying the
FROM file list
“F-ROM PROGRAM” (SYSTEM
DATA CHECK
± screen)
“LOADING COMPLETE”
³ When reading is terminated, the message, “HIT SELECT

KEY,” appears at the bottom of the screen.
(5) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SYSTEM DATA LOADING
screen.
47
F Displaying the FROM file list (SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen)
(1) Select the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 2. 1
SYSTEM DATA CHECK on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
screen.
³ FROM files are listed on the screen as follows: 2
SYSTEM DATA CHECK
FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)
1. NC BASIC(10)
2. DG SERVO(1)
The file size appears
3. PMC0BSC(2)
4. PMC–RB(2)
in parentheses 3
(unit : 128KB)
5. PDIM256K(2)
6. END
***MESSAGE*** 4
5
D The names and applications of the FROM files are as follows:
File name Application Attribute

NC BASIC NC system software System file
6
DG SERVO Digital servo software D The file can be typed
NCn OPTN Optional function over, but cannot be
PMCnxxxx PMC control software deleted or output.
PMM Power mate CNC manager

control software 7
PDIMxxxx P–CODE macro file User file
CEX xxxx C executor D The file can be typed

over, deleted, and
PMC-xxxx Ladder program output.
8
n: Numeric character x: Alphabetic character
D The object files of the macro P-CODE program and the C executor can
be saved to the memory card, but cannot be decompiled into their
corresponding source code. 9
10
48
(2) To obtain detailed information about a particular system file, such as its
software series and edition, perform the following:
desired file name.
Note that this function is valid for system files only.
Example screen (when NC BASIC has been selected)
ROM FILE CHECK

NC BASIC
0 88E0 801F 000
1 88E0 802F 001
2 88E0 841F 002
3 88E0 842F 003
4 88E0 881F 004
5 88E0 882F 005
6 88E0 8C1F 006
7 88E0 8C2F 007
***MESSAGE***
CONTINUE. HIT SELECT KEY.
D Any non-ASCII code, or the symbol @, appearing in the

displayed file name indicates that the contents of FROM or the
data in the read file has been destroyed. In this case, attempt
to read the file again.
3 Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SYSTEM DATA
CHECK screen.
(3) Return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen.

1 Position the cursor to END.
49
F Deleting a FROM file (SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen)
NOTE Only user files, such as the ladder and macro P-code programs,
can be deleted. System files, such as NC BASIC, cannot be de- 1
leted.
(1) Select the SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 3.
SYSTEM DATA DELETE. 2
FROM files are listed on the screen as follows:
SYSTEM DATA CHECK

FILE DIRECTORY 3
1. NC BASIC(10)
2. DG SERVO(1)
3. PMC0BSC(2)
4. PMC–RB(1)
5. PDIM256K(2)
6. END
4
***MESSAGE***
5
(2) Select the file to be deleted. 6

desired file name.
D To quit and return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
screen, position the cursor to END, then press the [SELECT]
7
soft key.
3 A confirmation message appears at the bottom of the screen. To
delete the file, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the deletion,
Upon pressing the [YES] soft key, the specified file is deleted. 8
³ Once the file has been deleted, “HIT SELECT KEY” appears
at the bottom of the screen.
(3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SYSTEM DATA CHECK
screen.
9
10
50
F Saving a FROM file to a memory card

(SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen)
NOTE Only user files, such as the ladder and macro P-code programs,
can be saved to a memory card. System files, such as NC BASIC,
cannot be saved.
(1) Select the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen.
SYSTEM DATA SAVE.
FROM files are listed on the screen as follows:
SYSTEM DATA SAVE

FILE DIRECTORY
1. NC BASIC(10)
2. DG SERVO(1)
3. PMC0BSC(2)
4. PMC–RB(1)
5. PDIM256K(2)
6. END
***MESSAGE***
(2) Select the file to be saved.

desired file name.
soft key.
save the file, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the saving,
Upon pressing the [YES] soft key, the specified file is saved to the
memory card.
³ Once the file has been saved, “HIT SELECT KEY”
appears at the bottom of the screen, together with the
name assigned to that saved file.
FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. Name assigned to

SAVE FILE NAME:PMC–RB.000 the saved file
51
D Saved files are named as follows:
File FROM file name Memory card file name
Ladder program PMC-RB PMC-RB. xxx
1
Macro P–CODE program PDIM256K PDIM256K.xxx
PDIM05M PDIM05M.xxx
C language executor CEX 1.0M CEX_10M.xxx
program CEX 2.0M CEX_20M.xxx 2
D A three-digit number (000 to 031) is automatically assigned to a
saved file as the file extension. The file extension will be 000 when
no other files having the same file name have been saved to the
memory card. When a file having the same file name has already 3
been saved to the memory card, the lowest number currently
available will be assigned.
D The most recently saved file need not necessarily have the highest
extension number because it may be assigned a number that was
previously skipped. Carefully check the file name, displayed at the
bottom of the screen, once saving has been completed.
4
(3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SYSTEM DATA SAVE
screen.
5
10
52
F Dumping SRAM data to a memory card

(SRAM DATA BACKUP screen)
(1) Select the SRAM DATA BACKUP screen.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 5. SRAM
DATA BACKUP.
The SRAM DATA BACKUP screen is displayed.
SYSTEM DATA BACKUP
1. SRAM BACKUP (CNC ³ MEMORY CARD)

2. RESTORE SRAM (MEMORY CARD ³ CNC)
END The size of the SRAM allocated to the
NC is displayed here.
SRAM SIZE : 256KB (BASIC) The amount of free memory space de-
FILE NAME : SRAM256A. FDB creases after formatting, because part
of the memory is taken up by directo-
ries and other data.
Therefore, the use of a large–capacity
memory card is recommended.
***MESSAGE***
SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(2) Select whether to dump data to the memory card (BACKUP), or to load
data from the memory card (RESTORE).
desired function.
soft key.
perform the selected operation, press the [YES] soft key. To
abandon the operation, press the [NO] soft key.
Upon pressing the [YES] soft key, data transfer between the SRAM
and memory card starts.
³ During data transfer, the name of the file being transferred blinks
as follows:
When dumping data to the memory card
FILE NAME : SRAM256A. FDB → MEMORY CARD
When loading data from the memory card

FILE NAME : SRAM256A. FDB → CNC
D Backup file data is dumped to the memory card in blocks of 520KB.

D A backup file is named as follows:
SRAMxxx V. FDB
An alphabetic character, representing the file

size in units of 512KB, is assigned sequentially,
starting from A.
SRAM size allocated to NC 256KB:256
1.0MB:1_0
(3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SRAM DATA BACKUP
screen.
53
F Deleting a file from a memory card
(MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen)
(1) Select the MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen. 1
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN
MENU screen.
³ Files stored on the memory card are listed on the 2
screen as follows:
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE 1/1
FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO1. MEM
MACRO2. MEM
LADDER. ROM
3
END
4
***MESSAGE***

5
(2) Select the file to be deleted.
desired file name.
6
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE 1/1
FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO1. MEM
MACRO2. MEM
LADDER. ROM
END
7
***MESSAGE***
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. 8
9
Previous screen Next screen
D When the file list is too large to be displayed on one screen, the
previous and subsequent pages can be viewed by using the
and soft keys. 10
D To return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, position
the cursor to END, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
2 Press the [SELECT] key.
(3) A confirmation message appears at the bottom of the screen. To delete
the file, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the deletion, press the
[NO] soft key.
D Once the file has been deleted, “HIT SELECT KEY” appears at the
bottom of the screen.
(4) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the MEMORY CARD FILE
DELETE screen.
54
F Formatting a memory card (MEMORY CARD FORMAT screen)

D A newly purchased memory card must be formatted before it can
be used. Also, a memory card must be formatted if its contents are
destroyed or lost due to battery failure.
(1) Select the MEMORY CARD FORMAT screen.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN
MENU screen.
2 Press the [SELECT] key.
(2) A confirmation message appears at the bottom of the screen. To format

the memory card, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the formatting,
D While the memory card is being formatted, the message
“FORMATTING MEMORY CARD” is displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
D Once formatting has been completed, “FORMATTING
COMPLETE HIT. SELECT KEY” appears at the bottom of the
screen.
(3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN
MENU screen.
F Quit system monitoring

(1) Quit system monitoring.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 10. END
on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1–02
1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING

2. SYSTEM DATA CHECH
3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5. SRAM DATA BACKUP
6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT
10.END
***MESSAGE***
SELECT MODE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(2) To quit system monitoring, press the [YES] soft key.

To continue system monitoring, press the [NO] soft key.
³ The NC system starts in the same way as when the power
is first turned on. The following messages are displayed on
the screen:
“CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM”
±
“LOADING BASIC CNC TO DRAM”
55
F Error message list
D The following table lists and describes the error messages which
may be output by the system. 1
Message Cause and Response
B BOOT ROM PARITY. The contents of flash memory containing boot
PLEASE POWER OFF. software was destroyed. Replace the CPU
card. 2
C CHANGE MEMORY The memory card becomes full in the middle
CARD. of SRAM backup operation. Replace the
AND HIT YES OR NO. card with a memory card containing enough
free space.
D DELETE ERROR.
HIT SELECT KEY.
An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM
was unsuccessful. Retry the deletion. If the
3
second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may
have been damaged or destroyed. Replace
the flash ROM module.
DEVICE ERROR (CNC x) An attempt to write data to flash ROM was
unsuccessful. Retry the write operation. If 4
the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM
may have been damaged or destroyed. Re-
palce the flash ROM module.
F FILE SAVE ERROR. An attempt to write a file to a memory card
HIT SELECT KEY. was unsuccessful. Check that the memory
card is not damaged. 5
FLASH MEMORY NO There is insufficient free flash ROM to store
SPACE the selected file. Delete any unnecessary
files from flash ROM.
FLASH ROM MODULE The flash ROM module is not mounted on
NOT EXIST. that Power Mate i. Put the flash ROM mod- 6
HIT SELECT. ule on the board.
I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE The selected file cannot be read into flash
memory. The selected file or the header in-
formation for flash ROM may have been dam-
aged or destroyed.
ILLEGAL FROM MOD- The flash ROM module ID is illegal. Check
7
ULE. the drawing No. of the flash ROM module.
HIT SELECT KEY.
ILLEGAL SRAM MOD- The SRAM module ID is illegal. Check the
ULE. drawing No. of the SRAM module.
HIT SELECT KEY. 8
L LOADING ERROR. An error occurred while loading data into
HIT SELECT KEY. flash ROM.
Do not touch the memory card while loading
data.
10
56
Message Cause and Response

M MAX EXTENSION OVER. The extension number added to a file name
HIT SELECT KEY. exceeds 31. Delete any unnecessary backup
files from the memory card.
MEMORY CARD BAT- The memory card’s battery is exhausted. Re-
TERY ALARM. place the battery.
HIT SELECT.
MEMORY CARD FULL. The memory card is full. Delete any unnec-
HIT SELECT KEY. essary files from the memory card. Alterna-
tively, replace the memory card with another
card having sufficient free space.
MEMORY CARD IS NOT The use of this memory card is not sup-
AVAILABLE. HIT SEL. ported. Use only FANUC–recommended
memory cards, as described in the order list.
MEMORY CARD MOUNT The memory card could not be accessed.
ERROR. Check that the memory card is normal.
HIT SELECT KEY
MEMORY CARD NOT EX- The memory card is not inserted into its slot.
IST. Check that the memory card is pushed fully
HIT SELECT KEY. home.
MEMORY CARD PRO- Although writing to the memory card was se-
TECTED.HIT SELECT lected, the write inhibit switch is set. Disable
KEY. the write inhibit switch.
MEMORY CARD RESET Access to a memory card failed. The
ERROR. memory card’s battery may have gone dead,
HIT SELECT KEY. the memory card may have been damaged
electrically, or the memory card may not be
inserted in the slot securely.
MEMORY CARD WRITE Access to the memory card has failed.
ERROR. Check whether the memory card is defective.
HIT SELECT KEY. Check that the memory card’s battery is not
exhusted, that its circuitry has not been dam-
aged, and that it is securely inserted into its
slot.
N NMI OCCURRED. A hardware or software error occurred. De-
PLEASE POWER OFF. termine the procedure which causes the er-
ror, and report it to FANUC together with the
series and edition of the boot software.
P PLEASE FORMAT FLASH It is not possible to delete only specific files
TYPE CARD.HIT SEL. from a flash ROM card, due to the character-
istics of the memory used. To delete a file it
is necessary to delete all files on the card, by
using the FORMAT function.
R ROM PARITY ERROR: The NC BASIC is parity error. Check whether
NC BASIC. HIT SELECT. NC BASIC is in flash ROM, using SYSTEM
DATA CHECK.
S SRAM DATA BACKUP An attempt to write a backup file to a memory
ERROR. card failed.
HIT SELECT KEY. Check that the memory card is normal.
Check that the memory card’s battery is not
exhusted, that its circuitry has not been dam-
aged, and that it is securely inserted into its
slot.
SRAM PARITY A parity error was detected during backup
OCCURRED. operation of SRAM (*1).
PLEASE POWER OFF.
57
(*1) Action to be taken when an SRAM parity error is detected during backup
of SRAM in the boot system
The SRAM area of each Power Mate i–D/H shipped from the factory is 1
cleared and is free of parity errors. However, shock applied to the
Power Mate i–D/H during transportation may cause a parity error in the
SRAM area. A parity error may also occur in the SRAM area when the
Power Mate i–D/H was kept switched off for one year or longer, and the
battery has been exhausted. If a parity error occurs in the SRAM area,
the data held in the SRAM area is not guaranteed. However, the Power 2
Mate i–D/H does not always use the entire SRAM area. A parity error
is not detected by hardware unless the part containing the error is read.
Therefore, if a parity error occurs in an area not accessed by the Power
Mate i–D/H, the Power Mate i–D/H may operate normally. The SRAM
backup function of the boot system reads the entire SRAM area. So, 3
a parity error may occur in the middle of backup operation even when
the Power Mate i–D/H has operated normally. In this case, the SRAM
data of the Power Mate i–D/H is not guaranteed, and the data cannot
be backed up using the SRAM backup function of the boot system.
Nevertheless, the Power Mate i–D/H may operate normally. So, it is
recommended that necessary data be backed up using the Floppy 4
Cassette or Handy File, data all clear operation be performed, then the
backed up data be restored in the Power Mate i–D/H. Once all clear
operation is performed, the parity error can be removed. Then, the
SRAM backup function of the boot system can be used.
(*2) If an error occurs, the corresponding error message appears on the 5
screen, together with the message “HIT SELECT KEY.” (Note that the
[SELECT] soft key is disabled for errors whose clearing requires that
the power be turned off.)
10
58
1.4.1 BOOT and INIT operations performed if the DPL/MDI

operation package is used
“BOOTINIT.EXE” executes the BOOT and INIT operations with the following
procedure:
À Start “BOOTIPL.EXE.”
Á Start the Power Mate.
Â BOOT operation (including system data loading and user file
backup/restore)
Ã End the BOOT system. (Select “10.SYSTEM MONITOR EXIT.”)
Ä Select INIT processing. (INIT processing: Maintenance operation,
including memory clear, performed at power–on)
Å End the INIT operation. (The INIT operation automatically ends
after performing processing on the selected item.)
Æ Start the “DPLMDI.EXE” window for the normal operation of the
system.
(3) BOOT SYSTEM screen configuration and operation method
Pressing the “±” (or “°”) key after “BOOTIPL.EXE” has been started
causes the screens shown below to be displayed on the [OPERATION]
area on the screen sequentially.
1. SYSTEM DATA : Load data into flash memory

LOADING.
2. SYSTEM DATA : Check the versions of system files

CHECK.
3. SYSTEM DATA : Delete flash memory files

DELETE.
4. SYSTEM DATA : Back up a flash memory file to a

SAVE. memory card
5. FILE DATA : Back up and restore the SRAM area

BACKUP/RESTORE.
6. MEMORY CARD : Delete a file from a memory card

FILE DELETE
7. MEMORY CARD : Format a memory card

FORMAT.
10.SYSTEM MONITOR : End BOOT SYSTEM and start the INIT

EXIT operation window.
59
F Operation method
On the menu of the function to be selected, press the <ENTER> key to
select that function. 1
SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen
Selecting “1.SYSTEM DATA LOADING” causes the file selection
screen, such as that shown below, to appear. Pressing the <±> or <°>
key on the keyboard of the PC, the names of the files in the memory card 2
are displayed sequentially. When the name of the file to be loaded is
displayed, press <ENTER> to start the loading of the file.
LOADING MENU : File selection screen

PMC–RB*.001 3
While loading is in progress, a screen such as that shown below appears.
: The name of the file being loaded is dis-
PMC–RB*.001 played, and the “LOADING” indication
LOADING flashes. 4
Upon the completion of loading, the system returns to the “file selection
screen.”
To return to the initial screen, press <ENTER> while “END” is displayed on
the screen. 5
SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen
This screen displays a list of files contained in the flash memory in the
Power Mate, as well as the number of 128KB management units of each
of these files and the series and edition of the software. 6
F Operation procedure
Selecting “2.SYSTEM DATA CHECK” causes the file information
screen, such as that shown below, to appear.
Pressing <±> or <°> causes other file information to be displayed.
7
: File information screen
CHECK MENU
The number of management unit used is
1. NC BASIC (10)
enclosed in parentheses. (One unit is
equal to 128 KB.)
Pressing the <ENTER> key while a file name is displayed causes detailed 8
information (series, ROM number, edition, and internal management
number (up to 16), such as that shown below, to be displayed.
NC BASIC : Detailed file information screen

0.88F0 801A 000 9
To return to the “file information screen,” press <ENTER> while “END” is

displayed on the screen. To return from the “file information screen” to the
initial screen, press <ENTER> while “END” is displayed on the screen.
F Note
10
Systems files, such as those whose file names are “NC BASIC” and
“DG SERVO” on the flash memory, have parity information embedded
for each of their management units. If the file name or parity field on the
check screen contains a non–ASCII character or “@,” the flash memory
may have been destroyed or a damaged file may have been loaded.
If this occurs, execute loading from the memory card again. User files,
such as “PMC–RB” and “PCD 0.5M,” do not have any parity information
embedded for each of their management units. A non–ASCII character
and “@” may be displayed in the display of series and edition
information, but this does not mean that the file has been destroyed.
60
SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen

This screen is used to delete user files from the flash memory.
Selecting “3.SYSTEM DATA DELETE” causes the file selection screen,
such as that shown below, to appear. Pressing <±> or <°> causes the
names of the files in the memory card to be displayed sequentially.
When the name of the file to be deleted is displayed, press <ENTER>
to delete that file.
: File selection screen
DELETE MENU The number of management unit used is
1. PCD 0.5M(1) enclosed in parentheses. (One unit is
equal to 128 KB.)
While deletion is in progress, a screen such as that shown below appears.

: The name of the file being deleted is dis-
PCD 0.5M played, and the “DELETE” indication
DELETE
flashes.
Upon the completion of deletion, the system returns to the “file selection
screen.”
the screen.
F System files vs. user files
On “3.SYSTEM DATA DELETE,” system files are protected.
The reason for this is to prevent the operator from erasing files
accidentally. User files are not protected. Although system files are
protected, they can be overwritten using “SYSTEM DATA LOADING.”
SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen

This screen is used to save a user file from the flash memory to a
memory card. Only user files can be saved from the flash memory to
a memory card. System files cannot be saved.
Selecting “4.SYSTEM DATA SAVE” causes the file selection screen,
such as that shown below, to appear.
Pressing <±> or <°> causes the names of the files in the memory card
to be displayed sequentially. When the name of the file to be saved is
displayed, press <ENTER> to save that file.
: File selection screen
SAVE MENU The number of management unit used is
3. PMC–RB(1)
enclosed in parentheses. (One unit is
equal to 128 KB.)
While saving is in progress, a screen such as that shown below appears.

: The name of the file being saved is dis-
PMC–RB.000 played, and the “SAVE” indication
SAVE
flashes.
Upon the completion of saving, the system returns to the “file selection
screen.”
the screen.
F System files vs. user files
On “4.SYSTEM DATA SAVE,” system files cannot be saved; only user
files can be saved.
SRAM DATA BACKUP screen
This screen allows backup and restoration of the data in SRAM that is
retained even after the CNC is turned off (including parameters and
programs) to and from a memory card at a time.
61
Selecting “5.FILE DATA BACKUP/RESTORE” from the initial screen
causes the file selection screen, shown below, to appear. Press <±> or 1
<°> to select between BACKUP and RESTORE and press <ENTER>
to back up or restore the data.
BACKUP causes the data to be backed up from the SRAM area to a
memory card at a time.
RESTORE causes the data to be restored from the memory card to the 2
SRAM area at a time.
FILE MENU : File data is backed up to a memory card.

1. FILE BACKUP
3
While saving or restoration is in progress, a screen such as that shown
below appears.
SRAM256A.FDB : The processing item is displayed, and an

BACKUP indication such as “BACKUP” flashes.
4
Upon the completion of backup or restoration, the system returns to the
“selection screen.” To return to the initial screen, press <ENTER> while
“END” is displayed on the screen.
F File name of the backup file
On the memory card, the file name of the backup of the data in SRAM
5
will be either “SRAM256A.FDB,” “SRAM1_0A.FDB, or
“SRAM1_0B.FDB.”
F Note
If an absolute pulse coder is used, and the data is restored at a time 6
using this function, check that the position displayed on the Power Mate
is the same as the actual position. If the position is not the same,
perform origin setting again.
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen
This screen allows deletion of a file from a memory card. 7
Selecting “6.MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE” causes the file selection
screen, such as that shown below, to appear. Pressing <±> or <°>
causes the names of the files in the memory card to be displayed
sequentially. When the name of the file to be deleted is displayed, press 8
<ENTER> to start the deletion of that file.
MEMORY DELETE : File selection screen

*BASIC.DAT
9
While deletion is in progress, a screen such as that shown below appears.
: The name of the file being deleted is dis-
BASIC.DAT played, and the “DELETE” indication
DELETE
flashes.
Upon the completion of deletion, the system returns to the “file selection 10
screen.”
F Note
For a memory card of the flash memory type, files cannot be deleted
individually.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT screen
This screen allows formatting of a memory card. When a new memory
card is purchased or if the contents of a memory card are destroyed
because the battery has run down, the card must be formatted before
use.
62
Selecting “7.MEMORY CARD FORMAT” causes the confirmation
screen, shown below, to appear. Pressing <ENTER> to start
formatting.
CARD FORMAT OK? : Confirmation screen

HIT [Y] OR [N] The “HIT [Y] OR [N]” indication flashes.
While formatting is in progress, the screen shown below appears.
CARD FORMAT : The “EXEC” indication flashes.

EXEC
Upon the completion of formatting, the system returns to the initial screen.
LOAD BASIC SYSTEM

This screen is used to terminate BOOT SYSTEM and start the Power
Mate i.
Selecting “10.SYSTEM MONITOR EXIT” causes the confirmation
screen, shown below, to appear. Pressing [Y] causes loading of CNC
system data to DRAM to start and the INIT operation window to start.
Selecting [N] returns the system to the initial screen.
MONITOR EXIT OF? : Confirmation screen

HIT [Y] OR [N] The “HIT [Y] OR [N]” indication flashes.
While loading is in progress, the screens shown below appear sequentially.
CHECK CNC BASIC

SYSTEM
LOADING BASIC
TO DRAM
CNC BASIC
LOADED
±The INIT operation window starts.
INIT SYSTEM operation method

If the power is turned off while an NC program is being edited or if the
contents of SRAM are destroyed due to a noise or for other reasons, the
power–on time operation, including memory clear, can be executed
when the power is turned on.
Startup procedure
This window is automatically started after “BOOTINIT.EXE” is started
up with the BOOT SYSTEM startup procedure and then
BOOTSYSTEM is terminated.
Operation method
Selecting “INIT” from the main menu in this window and selecting any
of the items from the pulldown menu causes that operation to be
executed.
MEMORY ALL CLEAR
Clear all memory
MEMORY CLEAR (PARAMETER,OFFSET)
Clear CNC parameters and offsets
63
MEMORY CLEAR (ALL PROGRAM)
Clear all programs
MEMORY CLEAR (PMC PARAMETER) 1
Clear PMC parameters
MEMORY CLEAR (PMC LADDER)
Clear PMC Ladder programs
IGNORE OVER TRAVEL ALARM 2
Reset OT alarm
START WITHOUT LADDER
Start the system with no Ladder program.
C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR (MAKE VOID C–EXEC) 3
Start the system without starting a C executor application
OTHERS
Sends any key code
EXIT 4
End the INIT operation
10
64
2. OPERATION LIST
2.1 CRT/MDI (FANUC Touch Panel)

Reset
KEY PWE Function

Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key
Operating – [(OPRT)] [TIME: 0] →

time POS [EXEC]
Number of – [(OPRT)] [PART: 0] →

machined POS [EXEC]
parts
OT alarm At pow- –
(software) er-up Pc and CAN
Alarm 100 – – CRT
CAN and RESET
FANUC touch panel
SPCL → CAN →
RESET → ENTER
(FANUC touch panel)

If a FANUC touch panel is used, normal power–ON–time key operations
cannot be performed. Perform the following:
À Press and hold down the upper right corner of the touch panel screen
and turn the power on. This causes the CNC system initialization
operation screen to appear.
Á For “KEY1” and “KEY2” on the screen that appears, enter the
characters corresponding to the keys to be pressed at power ON.
Â Press the EXIT soft key. The same processing as that performed when
CRT keys are pressed and held down and the power is turned is
performed, and the CNC starts.
NOTE 1 When the RESET and DELET key combination or the 7 and 9 key
combination is pressed for memory all clear operation, two–path
control is switched to one–path control.
Registration from MDI
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Parameter f – [PARAM] → Parameter No.

SYSTEM
→ [NO.SRH] → Data INPUT
→ or [INPUT] → PWE = 0 →
RESET
Offset f – [OFFSET] → Offset No. →

OFFSET
SETTING
[NO. SRH] → Offset value
→ INPUT or [INPUT]
Setting f – [SETTING] → Setting No. →

OFFSET
data SETTING
[NO. SRH]→Data→ INPUT
or [INPUT]
65
KEY PWE Function
SW =1 key
PMC pa- f MDI or [PMC] → [PMCPRM] → 1

SYSTEM
rameter (which of emer-
[COUNTR] or [DATA] →
(Counter, these) gency
data table) stop (PMC) Data → INPUT
PMC pa- f MDI or

SYSTEM
[PMC] → [PMCPRM] → 2
rameter emer-
(timer, gency [TIMER] or [KEEPRL] →
keep stop (PMC) Data → INPUT
relay)
Tool length JOG

measure- POS POS → [REL] (Relative 3
ment
³ coordinate system display)
OFFSET
SETTING
→ Axis → [ORIGIN] → SETTING
OFFSET
→ [OFFSET] → Offset num-
ber → [NO.SRH] → Axis →

4
[C INPUT]
NOTE f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.
Registration/input from external I/O device

5
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Parameter f EDIT or [PARAM] → [(OPRT)] →

emer- SYSTEM 6
gency → [READ] → [EXEC]
stop
PMC f Emer- [PMC] → → [I/O]→

SYSTEM
parameter gency
stop (CANNEL NO.) INPUT → 7
[FDCAS] → [READ] → File
No. → INPUT
→ [EXEC]
Offset f EDIT [OFFSET] → [(OPRT)] →

OFFSET
SETTING
8
→ [READ] → [EXEC]
Custom f EDIT Read by assigning a tempo-

macro PROG
rary program number →
variable Execute in AUTO mode →
Delete program 9
Program f EDIT [(OPRT)] → →
PROG
( O Program number) →
[READ] → [EXEC]
10
66
2. OPERATION LIST
Output to external I/O device
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Parameter EDIT [PARAM] → [(OPRT)] →

SYSTEM
→ [PUNCH] → [EXEC]
PMC EDIT [PMC] → → [I/O]→

SYSTEM
parameter
INPUT → [FDCAS] →
[WRITE] → (FILE NO) →

INPUT → [EXEC]
Offset EDIT [OFFSET] → [(OPRT)] →

OFFSET
SETTING
→ [PUNCH]→ [EXEC]
Custom EDIT → [MACRO] →

OFFSET
macro SETTING
variables [(OPRT)] → →
[PUNCH] → [EXEC]
All EDIT [(OPRT)] → →

PROG
programs
[PUNCH] → –9999 →
O
[EXEC]
One EDIT [(OPRT)] → →

PROG
program
[PUNCH] →
O
Program number → [EXEC]
Search
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Program AUTO
number or EDIT PROG
O → Program No. →
[O SRH]
Sequence AUTO
number PROG
N → Sequence No. →
[N SRH]
Address/ EDIT Word to be searched for →

PROG
word [SRH↑] or [SRH ↓]
Address EDIT Address to be searched for

only PROG
→ [SRH↑] or [SRH ↓]
Offset – [OFFSET] → Offset No. →

OFFSET
number SETTING [NO.SRH]
Diagnostic – [DGNOS] → Diagnosis No.

→ [NO.SRH]
SYSTEM
number
Parameter – [PARAM] → Parameter No.

number SYSTEM
→ [NO.SRH]
67
Collation
Function
KEY PWE
Mode
Function
Operation
1
SW =1 key
Memory EDIT [(OPRT)] → →

PROG
collation
[READ] → [EXEC]
2
Program editing
Function
KEY PWE
Mode
Function
Operation
3
SW =1 key
Deletion f EDIT
of all PROG
O → –9999 →
DELETE
programs
Deletion f EDIT 4
of one PROG O → Program No. →
program
DELETE
Deletion of f EDIT
multiple PROG
N → Sequence No. → 5
blocks
DELETE
Deletion of f EDIT
one block PROG EOB → DELETE
6
Word f EDIT Search for word to be
PROG
deletion
deleted → DELETE
Word f EDIT Search for word to be

alteration PROG
changed→ New data → 7
ALTER
Word f EDIT Search for word immediately

insertion PROG
before insertion location →
New data → INSERT 8
I/O to and from FANUC Cassette

9
KEY PWE Function
SW =1 key
File head EDIT

search PROG
N → FILE No. →
→ [F SRH] → [EXEC] 10
File f EDIT
deletion PROG N → FILE No. →
→ [F DELETE] → [EXEC]
Program f EDIT
registra- PROG
N → FILE No. →
tion → [READ] → [EXEC]
Output of EDIT
all PROG
O → –9999 →
programs → [PUNCH] → [EXEC]
68
2. OPERATION LIST
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Output of EDIT
one PROG
O → Program No. →
program
→ [PUNCH] →
[EXEC]
Program EDIT
collation PROG File head search → O
Program No. → →
[READ] → [EXEC]
Play-back
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
NC data f TJOG Move machine. →

PROG
input THND
X Y or Z
→ INSERT
→ NC data → INSERT
→ EOB
→ INSERT
Clear
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Memory all At pow- –

clear er-up RESET and DELETE
or 7
(Note 1)
and 9
Path 1 side of two–path con-
trol
CAN and 1
trol
CAN and 2
Parame- f At pow- –
RESET
ters/offset er-up

trol
RESET and 1
trol
RESET and 2
69
KEY PWE Function
SW =1 key
Program f At pow- –
1
DELETE
clear er-up

trol
2
DELETE
and 1
trol
DELETE
and 2 3
Program – –
being PROG and RESET
edited at
power
failure 4
(PS101)
Ladder At pow- –
clear er-up X and 0
PMC At pow-
nonvolatile er-up O and Z 5
memory
(FANUC touch panel)

If a FANUC touch panel is used, normal power–ON–time key operations
cannot be performed. Perform the following:
6
À Press and hold down the upper right corner of the touch panel screen
and turn the power on. This causes the CNC system initialization
operation screen to appear.
Á For “KEY1” and “KEY2” on the screen that appears, enter the
characters corresponding to the keys to be pressed at power ON. 7
Â Press the EXIT soft key. The same processing as that performed when
CRT keys are pressed and held down and the power is turned is
performed, and the CNC starts.
NOTE 1 When the RESET and DELET key combination or the 7 and 9 key
combination is pressed for memory all clear operation, two–path 8
control is switched to one–path control.
Path control switching (PowerMate i–D)

When two–path control is switched to one–path control or vice versa, all
CNC data including parameters and programs is cleared. Parameters are 9
set again to factory settings. However, option parameters are not cleared.
Once path control is switched, the new setting remains effective even after
power is turned off. It does not need to be set at each power–up.
KEY PWE Function
Function
SW =1
Mode
key
Operation 10
From one– At pow- –
path con- er–up S and 2
trol to two–
path con-
trol
From two– At pow- –

path con- er–up S and 1
trol to
one–path
control
70
2. OPERATION LIST
Manual operation
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Manual JOG Turn on Reference point re-

reference turn switch → [+X] [–X] [+Z]
point or [–Z] → Reference point
return return LED lit.
Jog feed JOG [+X] [–X] [+Z] or [–Z] → Set
jog feedrate → (Rapid tra-
verse button, if requred)
Incremen- STEP (Move distance selection
tal feed switch) → [+X] [–X] [+Z] or
[–Z] → (Rapid traverse but-
ton, if required)
Manual HND (Axis selection switch) →
handle (Turn manual pulse genera-
feed tion) → (Handle magnifica-
tion selection)
Registeration from NC tape
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
One f EDIT
program PROG
[(OPRT)] → → O
registera- → Program No. → [READ]
tion → [EXEC]
Plural f EDIT
program PROG
[(OPRT)] → →( O
registera- → Program No. )→[READ]
tion →[EXEC]
Collation EDIT [(OPRT)] → →

PROG
of program
in memory [READ] → [EXEC]
and NC
tape
71
DISPLAY
Function
KEY PWE
Mode
Function
Operation 1
SW =1 key
Program EDIT [LIB]

PROG
memory
used
Command AUTO Current command, Modal 2
PROG
or MDI command
[CURRENT]
Current command, Next

command
3
[NEXT]
MDI command, Modal com-

mand
[MDI ]
4
Current program in memory
[PRGRM]
Current block and Current

position
5
[CHECK]
Current Position in workpiece coor-

position POS dinate
[ABS]
6
Position in relative coordi-
nate
[REL]
Overall coordinate
7
[ALL]
Alarm – [ALARM]
MESSAGE
Alarm [HISTRY]
history
MESSAGE 8
10
72
2. OPERATION LIST
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Switching CRT
screen be- Path 2 →
tween H and 1 Path 1
paths
Path 1 →
H and 2 Path 2
FANUC touch panel
→ →
SPCL
H
→ Path 2 →
1 ENTER
Path 1
→ →
SPCL
H
→ Path 1 →
2 ENTER
Path 2
If a T–system key is used

(No. 3119#6)
Path 2 →
UH and 1 Path 1
Path 1 →
UH and 2 Path 2
HELP FUNCTION
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Displaying
HELP HELP
INITIAL
MENU
screen
Displaying [ALARM] → Alarm No. →
HELP
ALARM
DETAIL [SELECT]
screen
Displaying [OPERAT] → Item No. of op-
HELP
OPERA-
TION eration method → [SELECT]
METHOD
screen
Displaying [PARAM]
HELP
PARAME-
TER
TABLE
screen
SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Displaying [DGNOS]
DIAGNOS- SYSTEM
↓
TIC screen
1. Page change keys
PAGE
PAGE
2. Number of the diagnos-

tic data → [NO.SRH]
73
BOOT
Function
KEY PWE
Mode
Function
Operation 1
SW =1 key
Displaying At – – CRT
system power-
monitor up and the soft key to
screen its left
– FANUC touch panel
2
Upper left corner of the
screen
Reading Move cursor to

file from 1. SYSTEM DATA LODING
memory on system monitor screen 3
card → [SELECT] → Move cur-
sor to file to be read →
[SELECT] → [YES]
Displaying Move cursor to

detail
screen for
2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
on system monitor screen
4
flash ROM → [SELECT] → Move cur-
file list sor to item of which to dis-
play details → [SELECT]
Deleting Move cursor to

file in flash 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE 5
ROM on system monitor screen
→ [SELECT] → Move cur-
sor to file to be deleted →
[SELECT] → [YES]
Outputting Move cursor to 6

file in flash 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE on
ROM to system monitor screen →
memory [SELECT] → Move cursor to
card file to be output →
[SELECT] → [YES]
Batch out- Move cursor to

7
put of 5. SYSTEM DATA BACKUP
SRAM on system monitor screen
data to → [SELECT] → Move cur-
memory sor to 1. SRAM BACKUP or
card 2. RESTORE SRAM →
Batch in- [SELECT] → [YES]
8
put of
SRAM
data from
memory
card
9
Deleting Move cursor to
file in 6. MEMORY CARD FILE on
memory system monitor screen →
card [SELECT] → Move cursor to
file to be deleted →
[SELECT] → [YES] 10
Formatting Move cursor to
memory 7. MEMORY CARD FOR-
card MAT on system monitor
screen → [SELECT] →
[YES]
Exiting Move cursor to 9. END on

system system monitor screen →
monitor [SELECT] → [YES]
74
2. OPERATION LIST
P-CODE LOADER
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Starting P- At – – CRT
CODE power-
LOADER up
CAN and PROG
– FANUC touch panel

Upper right corner of the
screen
KEY1 [CAN]
KEY2 [PRG]
EXIT
75
2.2 DPL/MDI OPERATION PACKAGE
Reset 1
KEY PWE Function
SW =1 key
Operating – – Impossible
time 2
Number of – – Impossible
machined
parts
OT alarm At INIT IGNORE OVER TRAVEL

(software) power– SYSTEM ALARM 3
up operation
Alarm 100 – – [F5] while pressing [Back

Space]
4
Input from MDI
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Parameter f – [F4] [F6] → Parameter number 5

→ [Enter] → Data → [Enter]
→ PWE=0 → [Back Space]
Offset f – [F3] [F6] → Offset number →

[Enter] → Data → [Enter]
Setting f – [F3]
[°] ot [±] → Move cursor to 6
data
setting data → [1] or [0] →
[Enter]
PMC pa- DWE=1 MDI or [F4] @ screen → PMC address

rameter emer- → PMC number → [Enter]
gency → Data → [Enter] 7
stop
Tool length Impossible

measure-
ment
8
Input from external I/O device
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
9
Parameter f Emer- [F4] File head search → [F7]
gency
stop
PMC Impossible
parameter
10
Offset f EDIT [F3] File head search → [F7]
Custom f EDIT [F2] Read by assigning a tempo-

macro rary program number,
variable execute in AUTO mode,
then delete program
Program f EDIT [F2] File head search → [F7]
76
2. OPERATION LIST
Output to external I/O device
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Parameter EDIT [F4] [F8]
PMC Impossible
parameter
Offset EDIT [F3] [F8]
Custom EDIT [F3] [F8]

macro
variables
All EDIT [F2] O to 9999 → [F8]

programs
One EDIT [F2] O → Program number →

program [F8]
Input from the personal computer used to operate the DPL/

MDI operation package
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Parameter f EDIT or File in the pulldown menu →

emer- [Restore] → [CNC PA-
gency RAMETER]
stop
PMC EDIT or File in the pulldown menu →

parameter emer- [Restore] → [PMC PA-
gency RAMETER]
stop
Offset f EDIT or File in the pulldown menu →

emer- [Restore] → [TOOL OFF-
gency SET]
stop
Custom f EDIT or Read by assigning a tempo-

macro emer- rary program number,
variable gency execute in AUTO mode,
stop then delete program
Program f EDIT or File in the pulldown menu →

emer- [Restore] → [CNC PRO-
gency GRAM]
stop
Output to the personal computer used to operate the DPL/

MDI operation package
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Parameter EDIT File in the pulldown menu →

[Backup] → [CNC PARAME-
TER]
PMC EDIT File in the pulldown menu →

parameter [Backup] → [PMC PA-
RAMETER]
Offset EDIT File in the pulldown menu →

[Backup] → [TOOL OFF-
SET]
77
KEY PWE Function
SW =1 key
Custom EDIT File in the pulldown menu → 1

macro [Backup] → [MACRO VARI-
variables ABLE]
All EDIT File in the pulldown menu →

programs [Restore] → [CNC PRO-
GRAM] 2
Referencing and printing files and making hard copies in the

personal computer used to operate the DPL/MDI operation 3
package
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Referenc- File in the pulldown menu → 4

ing of a file [Open] → Select file to be
referenced
Printing of File in the pulldown menu →
the con- [Print] → Select file to be
tents of a
file
printed 5
Hard copy File in the pulldown menu →
of the [Hcopy]
screen
6
Search
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
7
Program EDIT [F2] [O] → Program number →
number
[±]
Sequence EDIT [F2] [N] → Sequence number →

number
[±] 8
Address EDIT [F2]
Address word → [±]
word
Address EDIT [F2]

Address → [±]
only
9
Offset EDIT [F3] [F6] → Offset number →
number [Enter]
Diagnostic EDIT [F4] [F6] → Diagnostic number

number → [Enter]
Parameter EDIT [F4] [F6] → Parameter number 10

number → [Enter]
Collation
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Memory EDIT [F2] [F7]

collation
78
2. OPERATION LIST
Program editing
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Deletion of f EDIT [F2] [O] → [–9999] → [Delete]

all pro-
grams
Deletion of f EDIT [F2] [O] → Program No. →

one pro- [Delete]
gram
Deletion of f EDIT [F2] [N] → Sequence No. →

multiple [Delete]
blocks
Deletion of f EDIT [F2] [;] + [Delete]

one block
Word f EDIT [F2] Search for word to be de-

deletion leted → [Delete]
Word f EDIT [F2] Search for word to be

alteration changed → New word →
[Home]
Word f EDIT [F2] Search for word immediately

insertion before insertion location →
New word → [Insert]
I/O to and from FANUC Cassette
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
File head EDIT [F2] [N] → FILE No. → [F7]

search
File f EDIT [F2] [N] → FILE No. → [Delete]

deletion
Program f EDIT [F2] [N] → FILE No. → [F7]

registra-
tion
Output of EDIT [F2] [O] → –9999 → [F8]

all pro-
grams
Output of EDIT [F2] [O] → Program No. → [F8]

one pro-
gram
Program EDIT [F2] File head search → [N] →

collation FILE No. → [F7]
Play–back
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
NC data f TJOG [F2] Move machine. → [X], [Y] or

input THND [Z] → [Insert] → NC data →
[Insert] → [EOB] → [Insert]
79
Clear
Function
KEY
SW
PWE
=1
Mode
Function
key
Operation 1
Memory all At INIT MEMORY ALL CLEAR
clear power– SYSTEM
(Note) up operation
trol
OTHERS 2
[KEY CODE1] ← 1
[KEY CODE1] ← CAN
trol
OTHERS 3
[KEY CODE1] ← 2
[KEY CODE1] ← CAN
Parame- At INIT MEMORY CLEAR
ters/offset power– SYSTEM (PARAMETER, OFFSET)
up operation
Path 1 side of two–path con- 4
trol
OTHERS
[KEY CODE1] ← 1
[KEY CODE1] ← PARAM
Path 2 side of two–path con- 5
trol
OTHERS
[KEY CODE1] ← 2
[KEY CODE1] ← PARAM
Program At INIT MEMORY CLEAR 6
clear power– SYSTEM (PROGRAM)
up operation
trol
OTHERS
[KEY CODE1] ← 1 7
[KEY CODE1] ← DELETE
trol
OTHERS
[KEY CODE1] ← 2 8
[KEY CODE1] ← DELETE
Program – – [F2] + [Back Space]
being
edited at
power
failure
9
(PS101)
Ladder At INIT MEMORY CLEAR (PMC

power– SYSTEM LADDER)
up operation
10
PMC non- At INIT MEMORY CLEAR (PMC
volatile power– SYSTEM PARAMETER)
memory up operation
NOTE When memory all clear operation is performed, two–path control is
switched to one–path control.
80
2. OPERATION LIST
Path control switching (PowerMate i–D)
When two–path control is switched to one–path control or vice versa, all

CNC data including parameters and programs is cleared. Parameters are
set again to factory settings. However, option parameters are not cleared.
Once path control is switched, the new setting remains effective even after
power is turned off. It does not need to be set at each power–up.
KEY PWE Function
SW =1 key
From one– At pow- OTHERS

path con- er–up [KEY CODE1] ← 2
trol to two– [KEY CODE2] ← S
path con-
trol
From two– At pow- OTHERS

path con- er–up [KEY CODE1] ← 1
trol to [KEY CODE2] ← S
one–path
control
Registration from NC tape
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
One pro- f EDIT [F2] O → Program No. → [F7]

gram reg-
istration
Plural pro- f EDIT [F2] O → Program No. → [F7]
gram reg-
istration
Collation EDIT [F2] [F7]

of program
in memory
and NC
tape
81
DISPLAY
Function
KEY
SW
PWE
=1
Mode
Function
key
Operation 1
Program EDIT [F4] [F6] → Diagnostic No. (841)
memory → [Enter]
used
Display of AUTO [F4] [F6] → Diagnostic No. → 2
specified [Enter]
value Diagnostic No.
802:Remaining travel dis-
tance
804:End position in pre-
vious block 3
810:No. of program under
execution
811:No. of sequence un-
der execution
820:G code in group 01
4
830:F code under execu-
tion
5
831:Actual feedrate
832:Actual spindle speed
852:Operation mode
Display of Absolute coordinates, ma-

current chine coordinates 6
position
Absolute and machine coor-
dinates are displayed alter-
nately each time [F1] is
pressed.
Relative coordinates 7
[F6] → [Diagnostic No. (800]
→ [Enter]
Alarm dis- [F5]
play
8
Switching [H] and [1] → Path 2 →
screen be- Path 1
tween [H] and [2] → Path 1 →
paths Path 2
9
SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Displaying [F4] [F6] → Diagnostic No. → 10

DIAGNOS- [Enter]
TIC screen
82
2. OPERATION LIST
BOOT
KEY PWE Function

SW =1 key
Displaying At BOOTI- Start BOOTINIT and turn

system power– NIT op- Power Mate on
monitor up eration
screen
Reading Move cursor to 1.SYSTEM

file from DATA LOADING on system
memory monitor screen → [Enter] →
card Move cursor to file to be
read → [Enter]
Listing files Move cursor to 2.SYSTEM

in flash DATA CHECK on system
ROM monitor screen → [Enter] →
Move cursor to item of
which to display details →
[Enter]
Deleting Move cursor to 3.SYSTEM

file from DATA DELETE on system
flash ROM monitor screen → [Enter] →
Move cursor to file to be
deleted → [Enter]
Outputting Move cursor to 4.SYSTEM

file in flash DATA SAVE on system
ROM to monitor screen → [Enter] →
memory Move cursor to file to be
card output → [Enter]
Batch out- Move cursor to 5.FILE

put of BACKUP on system moni-
SRAM data tor screen → [Enter] → Se-
to memory lect between BACKUP and
card RESTORE → [Enter]
Batch input
of SRAM
data from
memory
card
Deleting Move cursor to 6.MEMORY

file from CARD FILE DELETE on
memory system monitor screen →
card [Enter] → Move cursor to
file to be deleted → [Enter]
Formatting Move cursor to 7.MEMORY

memory CARD FORMAT on system
card monitor screen → [Enter] →
Y or N → [Enter]
Exiting sys- Move cursor to 10.SYS-

tem moni- TEM MONITOR EXIT on
tor system monitor screen →
[Enter] → Y or N → [Enter]
83
3. G CODE
G code list (1/2)

G code Group Function
1
G00 Positioning
G01 Linear interpolation
01
G02 Circular interpolation CW
G03 Circular interpolation CCW
G04 Dwell, Exact stop
2
G05 Electronic cam operation using the electronic cam
function
G08 00 Look–ahead control
G09 Exact stop 3
G10 Data setting
G11 Data setting mode cancel
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
21
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
4
G17 XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19 YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G20 Input in inch
G21
06
Input in mm 5
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Return to reference position
G29 00 Return from reference position
G30 2nd and 3rd reference position return 6
G31 Skip function, Multi–step skip function
G43 Tool length compensation + direction
G44 08 Tool length compensation – direction
G49 Tool length compensation cancel
7
G61 Exact stop mode
15
G64 Cutting mode
G65 00 Macro call
G66 Macro modal call
G67
12
Macro modal call cancel
8
G73 Peck drilling cycle
G74 Counter tapping cycle
G76 Fine boring cycle
G78 Rigid forward threading cycle for chaser tool 9
G79 Rigid backward threading cycle for chaser tool
G80 Canned cycle cancel
G81 Drilling cycle or spot boring cycle
G82 09 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle 10
G83 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
84
3. G CODE
G code list (2/2)

G code Group Function
G90 Absolute command
03
G91 Increment command
G92 Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at
00
maximum spindle speed
G93 Rate feed
G94 05 Feed per minute
G95 Feed per rotation
G96 Constant surface speed control
13
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G130 Multipath control
G135.1 00 High–speed response function continuous feed
G140 Phase adjustment using the electronic cam function
G145 Mechanical synchronization
05
G146 Start–point synchronization
NOTE Maximum spindle speed clamp (G92), which is a G code in groups

09 and 13 is effective to the Power Mate i–D only.
G05, G130, G135.1, G140, and G146 are effective to the Power
Mate i–H only.
85
Explanation
1. When the clear state (bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402) is set at
power–up or reset, the modal G codes are placed in the states 1
described below.
(1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with as
indicated in the above table.
(2) G20 and G21 remain unchanged when the clear state is set at
power–up or reset. 2
(3) The user can select G00 or G01 by setting bit 0 (G01) of parameter
No. 3402.
(4) The user can select G90 or G91 by setting bit 3 (G91) of parameter
No. 3402.
3
(5) The user can select G17, G18, or G19 by setting bit 1 (parameter
G18) and bit 2 (parameter G19) of parameter No. 3402.
2. G codes other than G10 and G11 are one–shot G codes.
3. When a G code not listed in the G code list is specified, or a G code that
has no corresponding option is specified, P/S alarm No. 010 is output. 4
4. Multiple G codes can be specified in the same block if each G code
belongs to a different group. If multiple G codes that belong to the same
group are specified in the same block, only the last G code specified is
valid.
5. If a G code belonging to group 01 is specified in a canned cycle, the 5
canned cycle is cancelled. This means that the same state set by
specifying G80 is set. Note that the G codes in group 01 are not affected
by a G code specifying a canned cycle.
6. G codes are indicated by group.
6
10
86
4. PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Explanation
Positioning (G00) IP
Start point
Linear interpolation IP
(G01)
Start point
Circular interpolation
(G02, G03)
Start point
R G02
J
Center
I End point
(x, y)
(x, y) G03
Start point
R J
Center I
87
Tape format PM i–D PM i–H
G00P
IP _ ; f f
1
G01P
IP _ F_ ; f f
G02 R_ f f
G17 Xp_Yp_ F_ ;
G03 I_J_
G02 R_
3
G18 Xp_Zp_ F_ ;
G03 I_K_
G02 R_
G19 Yp_Zp_ F_ ;
4
G03 J_K_
10
88
4. PROGRAM FORMAT
Dwell (G04) (Example)
G94 G04 P10000; Dwell by 10 seconds
Electronic cam opera- Cam Cam 1 Cam 2 Cam 3

tion using the electronic shaft displace- displace- displace-
phase ment ment ment
cam function
(G05)
The follow–up axis operates in synchronization with

the cam shaft according to the cam figure data.
Look-ahead feed for- With this function, the delay due to acceleration/de-
word celeration and the delay in the servo system which
(G08) increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be sup-
pressed.
The tool can then follow specified values accurately
and errors in the machining profile can be reduced.
Exact stop
Speed
(G09, G61)
Time
In–position check
Change of offset values- The tool compensation amount can be set or

by program changed with the G10 command.
(G10)
When G10 is used in absolute input (G90), the com-
pensation amount specified in the command be-
comes the new tool compensation amount. When
G10 is used in incremental input (G91), the com-
pensation amount specified in the command is added
to the amount currently set.
Change of offset values Parameter values can be input using a program.

by parameter
(G10)
89
f f 1
X_
G94 G04 ; Dwell by second
P_
f
G05 P23001 L_; 2
L: Specifies the number of executions (1 to
99999999). One rotation of the cam shaft from the
electronic cam operation start position in the
forward direction is counted as +1, while one
rotation in the backward direction is counted as –1.
Rotations end when (L is reached. If “0” is
specified continuous operation is assumed. 3
G08P_ ; f f 6
P1: Turn on look-ahead control mode.
P0: Turn off look-ahead control mode.
7
G09 IP ; f f
G61 ;
G10L_PpRr ; f f
p : Offset No.
r : Tool compensation amount
Format 9
G10L11P_R_;
G10L50; : Parameter input mode setting f f 10

N_R_; : Non–axis–type parameter input
N_P_R_; : Axis–type parameter input
G11; : Parameter input mode cancel
N : Parameter No. (5 digits) or pitch error com-
pensation No. + 10000 (5 digits)
R_ : Parameter setting
P_ : Axis No. I to P (to be set if axis–type pa-
rameters are input)
90
4. PROGRAM FORMAT
Polar coordinate c′ (hypothetical axis)
interpolation mode C axis
(G12.1, G13.1)
X axis
XpYp plane selection

Y X Z
(G17)
ZpXp plane selection
(G18) X Z Y
YpZp plane selection G17 G18 G19
(G19)
Inch/metric conversion
(G20, G21)
Reference position IP
return check
(G27) Reference position
Start point
Reference position Reference poisition (G28)

return (G28) IP
2nd, 3rd reference posi- Intermediate position
tion return (G30) IP
2nd reference
position (G30) Start point
Return to reference Reference position

position return start
position (G29) IP
Intermediate position
Skip function
(G31)
Multi–step skip function

(G31)
IP
Skip signal
Start point
Torque limit skip

function (G31)
(high–speed response
function only)
91
G12.1 ; f f 1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
G13.1 ;
Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel
2
G17 ; f f
G18 ;
G19 ;
3
G20 ; Inch input f f

G21 ; Metric input
4
G27IP _ ; f f
G28 IP _ ; f f 5
P2
G30 IP _ ;
P3
P2: 2nd reference position return
P3: 3rd reference position return
6
G29 IP _ ; f f
7
G31IP _F_ ; f f
Move command f f
G31 IP _F_P_;
F_: Feedrate
8
P_: P1-P4
Dwell
G04X (U, P)_(Q_);
X(U, P)_: Dwell time
Q_: Q1-Q4 9
G31 P98 IP _F_; (high–speed response function only) f
10
92
4. PROGRAM FORMAT
Tool length
compensation A, B, C
(G43, G44, G49)
Offset
G43: + offset Z
G44: – offset
Macro call
(G65) Main program Macro program
O_: O0001;
G65P0001L_;
_
G67; M99;
Macro modal call Main program Macro program

(G66, G67)
O_: O0001;
G66P0001L_;
X_
Y_
G67; M99;
93
f f 1
G43 (Z_)H_ ; Tool length compensation A
G44
G17 X_
G18 G43 Y_ H_;
G19 G44 Z_
2
Tool length compensation B
G43
α_H_ ; Tool length compensation C
G44
H: Offset number (H00 to H999)

α : Arbitrary one axis
3
G49 ; Tool length compensation cancel
G65 P_L_ ; f f
P: Program number 4
L: Repetition count (1 to 9999)
5
G66 P_L_ ; f f
G67; Cancel
P: Program number
6
L: Repetition count (1 to 9999)
10
94
4. PROGRAM FORMAT
Canned cycle G73: High-speed peck drilling cycle
(G73, G74, G80 to G89) G74: Left-hand tapping cycle
G76: Fine boring cycle
G78: Clockwise rigid tapping cycle for chaser tool
G79: Counterclockwise rigid tapping cycle for
chaser tool
G80: Cancel
G81: Drilling cycle, spot drilling cycle
G82: Drilling cycle, counter boring cycle
G83: Peck drilling cycle
G84: Tapping cycle
G85: Boring cycle
G86: Boring cycle
G87: Back boring cycle
G88: Boring cycle
G89: Boring cycle
Example
G73 (G98) G73 (G99)
Initial level
R point R point
q d q d
q d q d
q q
Z point Z point
95
f
G73 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; 1
G74 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G76 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G78 X__Y__Z__Q__R__F__ ;
G79 X__Y__Z__Q__R__F__ ;
G81 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G82 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; 2
G83 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G84 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G85 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G86 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G87 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G88 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ; 3
G89 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G80 ; Cancel
Gjj X__Y__Z__R__Q__P__F__K__ ;
Number of repeat
Hole position data
Drilling mode
Drilling data 4
Item Address Explanation
Drilling mode GVV G73, G74, G76, G78, G79, G80 to

G89
Hole position data X, Y Specifies the hole position by an in-

5
cremental or absolute value.
Drilling data Z Specifies the distance from point R to

the bottom of the hole.
R Specifies the distance from the initial 6

level to point R.
Q Specifies each cut-in value with G73

and G83 or the shift value with G76
and G87. (Always specified with an
incremental value.)
Specifies the hole position, at which
7
control between chasers is performed
by G78 and G79, using the distance
from the bottom of the hole.
P Specifies the dwell time at the bottom

of the hole. 8
F Specifies the feed rate.
Number of repeats K Specifies the number of repeats for a

series of operation 1 to 6.
10
96
4. PROGRAM FORMAT
Absolute/Incremental
command (Example)
(G90/G91)
60
30
50 100
ÇÇ
Absolute command G90X100Y60;
Incremental command G91X50Y30;
ÇÇ
Change of workpiece
coordinate system IP
(G92)
Y
Rate feed (G93)
Feed/minute,
Move Move
Feed/revolution distance distance
(G94, G95) F F
per minute per revolution
Feed/minute Feed/revolution
(G94) (G95)
Constant surface speed

control X
(G96, G97)
Z(X=0)
97
G90_; Absolute command f f 1
G91_; Incremental command
G90_G91_; Change of workpiece coordinate system
3
G92IP _ ; f f
G93 X_F_; f f
G94 · · · · · F_ ; f f
G95 · · · · · F_ ; 8
G96 Ss Pα ; f
G97 ; Cancel
10
α: 1 to 2
(X axis, Y axis)
s: Surface speed (m/min or feet/min)
98
4. PROGRAM FORMAT
Multipath control
(G130) One–path mode
Multipath
Define XY for path 1
control ON
Program for path 1
Define AB for path 2

Program for path 2
Define UV for path 3

Program for path 3
Multipath
control OFF
One–path mode
High–speed response This function can move the tool continuously along a
function continuous feed selected axis in a selected direction by setting the
(G135.1) signal +Jn/–Jn to “1” while a G135.1 block is being
executed. By setting the signal +Jn/–Jn to “0” during
movement, the tool is decelerated along the specified
axis and stops. If the command is an absolute one,
the stop position is the specified coordinates; if an
incremental one, it is the position where the tool is
located when the signal is set to “0” plus the speci-
fied value. After the tool is decelerated and stops,
the block following the G135.1 block is executed.
Positioning using the This function adjusts the phase relationship between
electronic cam function the cam shaft and the follow–up axis by moving the
(G140) follow–up axis to the position of the follow–up axis
corresponding to the cam shaft phase at the electron-
ic cam operation start position.
Multiaxis synchroniza- These functions are used to operate an axis (syn-

tion control chronized axis) in such a way that it follows the axis
Mechanical synchro- used as a synchronization reference (synchronization
nization (G145) reference axis), as if the axes were joined with a ser-
Start–point synchroniza- vo motor and a cogwheel.
tion (G146) The speed ratio (gear ratio) between the axes can be
set. No matter how many rotations are performed,
their synchronization relationship will not be im-
paired. The speed ratio can be changed during op-
eration.
Synchro- Grandchild
nization axis 1
Synchro-
nization
Grandchild
axis 2
Child axis
Parent axis
99
G130 Pn α1β1; (n=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8): Path control for f 1
path n
On (α, β, ...): Specification the axis
belonging to each axis
G135.1 IP_F_ ; f
IP_: [Absolute programming]
Specifies the absolute coordinates of the 4
stop position on the axis on which continu-
ous feed is to be performed.
[Incremental programming]
Specifies the extra distance measured after
the signal becomes 0. 5
F_: Specifies the feedrate for continuous feed (in
mm/min).
G140 IP_; f
IP_: Specifies the follow–up axis on which phase
adjustment is to be performed. The name of
6
the follow–up axis must be followed by “0.”
G145 G91 G01 any–one–axis_R_; (required) f

Operation: The child axis specified for “any–one–
axis” is synchronized with the parent 7
axis.
any–one–axis: Distance of travel along the child
axis (synchronized axis) (units: least
input increments)
R: Distance of travel along the parent axis
(synchronization reference axis) (units: 8
least input increments)
G146 G91 G01 any–one–axis_R_Q_; (only Q is op-
tional)
Operation: The axis specified for “any–one–axis” is
timed and synchronized with the parent
axis.
any–one–axis: Distance of travel along the child
9
axis (synchronized axis) (units: least
input increments)
R: Distance of travel along the parent axis
(synchronization reference axis) (units:
least input increments)
Q: Machine coordinates (unit: least input
10
increment) of the parent axis at which
the synchronization of the child axis is
to start
If this parameter is omitted, synchro-
nization will start at the origin of the par-
ent axis.
100
4. PROGRAM FORMAT
PMC axis control
Block to be specified
Function Axis control com- Data to be specified
mand code signal
EC0g to EC6g
Rapid traverse (Note 3) 00h Total travel distance
EID0g to EID31g
Rapid traverse rate
EIF0g to EIF15g
The rapid traverse rate is
effective when RPD (bit
0 of parameter No. 8002)
is 1.
Cutting feed 01h Total travel distance
Feed per minute (Note 3) EID0g to EID31g
Cutting feed rate EIF0g
Skip feed 03h
to EIF15g
Feed per minute (Note 3)
Cutting feed 02h Total travel distance
Feed per revolution EID0g to EID31g
(Note 3) The feedrate per revolu-
tion EIF0g to EIF15g
Dwell (Note 3) 04h Dwell time EID0g to
EID31g
Reference position return 05h None
(Note 3)
Continuous feed (Note 3) 06h Feed direction EID31g
Continuous feed rate
EIF0g to EIF15g
1st reference position re- 07h Rapid traverse rate
turn (Note 3) EIF0g to EIF15g
2nd reference position 08h
return (Note 3)
3rd reference position re- 09h is 1.
turn (Note 3)
External pulse synchro- 0Bh Pulse weight EIF0g to
nization main spindle EIF15g
External pulse synchro- 0Dh
nization manual handle
0Eh
Velocity command 10h Continuous feed rate
Torque control 11h Maximum feedrate EIF0g
to EIF15g
Torque data EIF0g to
EID31g
Auxiliary function 12h Auxiliary function code
(Note 3)
Machine coordinate sys- 20h Machine coordinate sys-
tem setting (Note 3) tem setting (absolute val-
ue) EID0g to EID31g
Rapid traverse rate
EIF0g to EIF15g
is 1.
101
Block to be specified
Function Axis control com- Data to be specified
mand code signal 1
EC0g to EC6g
Indirect command 22h Address character codes
(Note 2) E2F0g to E2F15g
Start addresses E2D0g
to E2D21g 2
cf.) Sub–command
number
Mechanical synchro-
nization 01h
Start point synchro-
nization 02h 3
Mechanical synchroniza- 23h Parent axis movement
tion (Note 2) amount/100 E2F0g to
E2F15g
Axis movement amount
for the axis of interest
E2D0g to E2D31g
4
Start point synchroniza- 24h Parent axis movement
tion (Note 2) amount/100 E2F0g to
E2F15g
Axis movement amount
for the axis of interest 5
E2D0g to E2D31g
NOTE 1 When the Power Mate i–D is performing two–path control, PMC
axis control cannot be used.
NOTE 2 Only for Power Mate i–H. 6
NOTE 3 This operation is usable PMC axis controlled operation, when the
bit 7 of parameter number 8003 is set to 1. Any operations other
than this operation can not be used.
10
102
5. CUSTOM MACRO
5.1 Types of Variables

Type of variable Variable number
Local variable #1 – #33
Common variable #100 – #199

#500 – #699
System variable (Note 2) #1000 – #9814
NOTE Details are shown in 5.2.
5.2 System Variable

Variable
Contents Purpose Series
number
#1000–#1015 Corresponds to UI000 to UI015 Interface input PM i–D/H
#1032 Unified input of UI000 to UO015 signal
#1100–#1115 Corresponds to UO000 to Interface PM i–D/H

UO015 output signal
#1132 Unified output of UO000 to
UO015
#1133 Unified output of UO100 to
UO131
#1200–#1959 PMC D/R area information Interface PM i–D/H
#1991–#1995
#3000 Alarm PM i–D/H
#3001 Clock 1 (unit: 1ms) Clock PM i–D/H

#3002 Clock 2 (unit: 1 hour)
#3003 Control of single PM i–D/H
block stop, wait
signal for FIN
#3004 Control of feed- PM i–D/H
hold, feedrate
override, exact
stop check
#3005 Setting PM i–D/H
#3007 Mirror image check signal Status of PM i–D/H
mikrror image
#3011 Year, month, day Clock PM i–D/H

#3012 Hour, minute, second
#3901 No. of parts machined No. of parts PM i–D/H
#3902 No. of parts required
#4001–#4022 G code (group 01–22) Modal PM i–D/H
#4109 F code information
#4111 H code
#4113 M code
#4114 Sequence number
#4115 Program number
#4119 S code (PM i–D/D2)
#4120 T code
#5001–#5008 1st axis block end position Block end PM i–D/H
to position (Work-
8th axis block end position piece coordi-
nate)
103
Variable
number
1
#5021–#5028 1st axis current position Machine PM i–D/H
to coordinate
8th axis current position
#5041–#5048 1st axis current position Workpiece PM i–D/H
to coordinate
8th axis current position 2
#5061–#5068 1st axis skip signal position Skip signal PM i–D/H
to position
8th axis skip signal position (Workpiece
coordinate)
#5081–#5088 1st axis tool offset value Tool offset val- PM i–D/H 3
to ue
8th axis tool offset value
#5101–#5108 1st axis servo position deviation Servo position PM i–D/H
to deviation
8th axis servo position devi-
ation
4
#9000–#9099 Buffer 1 of measurement func- Measurement PM i–H
tion by the high–speed skip data
function
#9100–#9199 Buffer 2 of measurement func-
tion by the high–speed skip
Measurement
data
PM i–H 5
function
function
6
function
function 7
function
tion by the high–speed skip data 8
function
function
#9800 WRITE pointer of buffer 1 of Measurement PM i–H 9
measurement function by the data
high–speed skip function
#9802 WRITE pointer of buffer 2 of Measurement PM i–H
10
104
5. CUSTOM MACRO
Variable
number
105
5.3 Argument Assignment I/II
Correspondence Table between Correspondence Table between 1

Argument Assignment I Addresses and Argument Assignment II Addresses
Macro Variables and Macro Variables
Argument Argument
Macro Macro
Assignment I Assignment II
Variables Variables 2
Addresses Addresses
A #1 A #1
B #2 B #2
C #3 C #3
3
D #7 I1 #4
E #8 J1 #5
F #9 K1 #6
H #11 I2 #7 4
I #4 J2 #8
J #5 K2 #9
K #6 I3 #10
M #13 J3 #11
5
Q #17 K3 #12
R #18 I4 #13
S #19 J4 #14
6
T #20 K4 #15
U #21 I5 #16
V #22 J5 #17
W #23 K5 #18 7
X #24 I6 #19
Y #25 J6 #20
Z #26 K6 #21
I7 #22
8
J7 #23
K7 #24
I8 #25
9
J8 #26
K8 #27
I9 #28
J9 #29 10
K9 #30
I10 #31
J10 #32
K10 #33
106
5. CUSTOM MACRO
5.4 Arithmetic Commands

Purpose Expression Contents
Definition and #i=#j Definition, substitution
substitution of
variables
Addition arithmetic #i=#j+#k Sum
#i=#j – #k Subtraction
#i=#jOR#k Logical sum

(at every bit of 32 bits)
#i=#jXOR#k Exclusive OR
Multiplication #i=#j*#k Product

arithmetic
#i=#j/#k Quotient
#i=#jAND#k Logical product

Functions #i=SIN [#j] Sine (degree unit)
#i=ASIN [#j] Arcsine (degree unit)
#i=COS [#j] Cosine (degree unit)
#i=ACOS [#j] Arccosine (degree unit)
#i=TAN [#j] Tangent (degree unit)
#i=ATAN [#j]/[#k] Arctangent (degree unit)
#i=SQRT [#j] Square root
#i=ABS [#j] Absolute value
#i=BIN [#j] Conversion from BCD to BIN
#i=BCD [#j] Conversion from BIN to BCD
#i=ROUND [#j] Rounding off
#i=FIX [#j] Discard fractions less than 1
#i=FUP [#j] Add 1 for fractions less than 1
#i=LN [#j] Logarithm
#i=EXP [#j] Index
Combination of – The above arithmetic operations

arithmetic operations and functions can be combined.
The order of priority in an arithme-
tic operation is function, multi-
plication arithmetic then addition
arithmetic.
107
5.5 Control Command
Purpose Expression
Kind of 1
operation
Conditional branch IF [<conditional expression>] #j EQ #k (=)
GOTO n
#j NE #k (0)
Branch to sequence number n.
#j GT #k (>) 2
Conditional execution IF [<conditional expression>]
THEN st #j LT #k (<)
Execute macro statement st. #j GE #k (y)
#j LE #k (x)
3
Iteration WHILE [<conditional expres- #j EQ #k (=)
sion>] DO m
#j NE #k (0)
(m = 1, 2, 3)
#j GT #k (>)
If omitted conditional expression,
blocks from DO m to END m are #j LT #k (<) 4
executed eternally.
#j GE #k (y)
#j LE #k (x)
5.6 Macro Call 5
Program Param e-
Name Format Remarks
No. ter No.
Simple G65P (program number) Refer to 5.3 for 6

call L (repetition count) argument
<argument assignment> assignment.
Modal G66P (program number)

call L (repetition count)
<argument assignment>
7
Macro Gxx 9010 6050 Refer to 5.3 for
call by <argument assignment> argument
to to
G code assignment.
Max. 10 G codes from 9019 6059
G01–G64 and Set G or M code
that calls a pro-
G68–G9999
gram specified in
8
Macro Mxx 9020 6080 the parameter.
call by <argument assignment>
to to
M code
Max. 10 M codes from 9029 6089
M006 to M99999999
9
Sub- Mxx ; 9001 6071 Displayed on pro-
program check screen
to to
gram but no MF nor M
call by 9009 6079 code is sent.
Mxx ;
M code Set an M code that
Max. 9 M codes from
M006–M99999999
calls a sub-pro- 10
gram specified by
the parameter.
108
5. CUSTOM MACRO
Program Param e-
Name Format Remarks
No. ter No.
Sub- Tt ; P9000 6001#5 Calls sub-program

pro- (Sub- TCS P9000. T code t is
gram pro- stored in common
call by gram) variable #149 as
T code an argument.
Multi- Main program Can be called up

plex to 4 loops includ-
call O. O. O. ing simple call and
G65P. G65P. G65P.
modal call.
M99 M99 DDD M99
Macro Macro
(level 1) (level 4)
5.7 Command Range
Item Contents
Variables Local variable: #1–#33
Common variable: #100–#199, #500–#699
System variable: #1000–#19099
Value of variables Maximum value "1047

Minimum value "10–29
Constant in expression Maximum value "99999999

Minimum value "0.0000001
Decimal point possible
Arithmetic precision Decimal 8 digits
Macro call duplex Max. 4 loops
Iteration 1 to 3
classification no.
Nesting Max. 5 loops
Nesting of Max. 4 loops (8 loops including macro calls)

subprograms
109
6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY
6.1 Displaying CNC Internal State

6.1.1 Procedure for displaying diagnostic screen 1
Display the CNC internal state as below:
SYSTEM
2
[DGNOS]
Input a diagnostic data 3

No. to be displayed.
Change by page change key
[NO.SRH]
6.1.2 Display of status in which command is not apparently

4
executed (No. 000 – 015)
No. Display Internal status when 1 is displayed

000 WATING FOR FIN M, S, T function is being executed
5
SIGNAL
001 MOTION Move command in automatic operation is being
executed
002 DWELL Dwell is being executed
6
003 IN–POSITION In-position check is being performed
CHECK
004 FEEDRATE OVER- Override 0%
RIDE 0%
005 INTERLOCK/ Interlock startlock is on. 7
START–LOCK
006 SPINDLE SPEED Waiting for spindle speed arrival signal to turn
ARRIVAL CHECK on
007 WAITING FOR Waiting for the chaser tool to open or close
CHASER OPEN OR
CLOSE
8
008 DURING WAITING Waiting with an M code.
BY WAITING M (Wait M function)
CODE
010 PUNCHING Data is being output via reader puncher inter-
face 9
011 READING Data is being input via reader puncher interface
013 JOG FEEDRATE Jog override 0%
OVERRIDE 0%
014 WAITING FOR RE- One of the emergency stop, external reset, re-
SET, ESP, RRW set & rewind or MDI panel reset key is on.
10
OFF
015 EXTERNAL PRO- External program number search is active.
GRAM NUMBER
SEARCH
016 BACKGROUND Background is being used.
ACTIVE
110
6.1.3 Information indicating automatic operation stop, automatic

idle statuses (No. 020 – 025)

020 CUT SPEED UP/ Set when emergency stop turns on or when ser-
DOWN vo alarm occurs
021 RESET BUTTON Set when reset key turns on
ON
022 RESET AND Reset and rewind turned on
REWIND ON
023 EMERGENCY Set when emergency stop turns on
STOP ON
024 RESET ON Set when external reset, emergency stop, reset
or reset & rewind key is on.
025 STOP MOTION OR A flag which stops pulse distribution. It is set to
DWELL 1 in the following cases.
(1) External reset is set to on.
(2) Reset & rewind is set to on.
(3) Emergency stop is set to on.
(4) Feed hold is set to on.
(5) The MDI panel reset key turned on.
(6) Switched to the manual mode
(JOG/HANDLE/INC).
(7) Other alarm occurred.
(There is also an alarm which is not set.)
Causes for cycle start LED turned off
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Emergency stop signal input

External reset signal input
MDI reset button turned on
Reset & rewind input
Servo alarm generation
Changed to another mode or feed hold
Single block stop
6.1.4 TH alarm statuses (No. 030, 031)

030 CHARACTER The position of the character which turned TH
NUMBER TH DATA alarm on is displayed in the number of charac-
ters from the beginning of the block at TH
alarm.
031 TH DATA Read code of character which turned TH alarm
on
111
6.1.5 Display of the cause of alarm 5800
Diagnosis 1
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
50 SYS SVO PMC
This parameter indicates the software that has caused alarm 5800. 2
PMC : The PMC software is inappropriate.
SVO : The servo software is inappropriate.
SYS : The system software is inappropriate.
Diagnosis 3
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
60 HPS
This parameter indicates the function that has caused alarm 5800. 4
HPS : The high–speed position switch function cannot be used.
NOTE1 While alarm No. 5800 is being issued, the system is in the emer-
gency stop state, so that the tool cannot move along any axis. 5
NOTE2 If the high–speed position switch function is not used, set a value
out of the valid data range in parameter No. 8516 or 8517 (for ex-
ample, set 0 in parameter No. 8516) and then turn off the power and
then on again. (This prevents alarm No. 5800 from being issued.)
6
6.1.6 Digital servo system, serial pulse coder alarm
(No. 200, 280)
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7
200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
OFA : Overflow alarm has occurred.

FBA : Wire breakage alarm has occurred.
(See No. 201.) 8
DCA : Regenerative discharge circuit alarm has occurred.
HVA : Overvoltage alarm has occurred.
HCA : Abnormal current alarm has occurred.
OVC : Overcurrent alarm has occurred. 9
LV : Undervoltage alarm has occurred.
OVL : Overload alarm has occurred.
(See No. 201.)
10
112
The detailed content of wire breakage alarm, overload alarm is displayed.

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
201 ALD EXP
When No. 200 OVL = 1:

ALD 1: Motor overheat
0: Amplifier overheat
When No. 200 FBAL = 1:
ALD EXP Detail of alarm

1 0 Built-in pulse coder wire breakage (hard)
1 1 Separately installed pulse coder wire breakage (hard)
0 0 Pulse coder wire breakage (soft)
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
SPH : Soft phase data trouble alarm has occurred.

CKA : Clock alarm has occurred.
BZA : Battery zero alarm has occurred.
RCA : Speed count trouble alarm has occurred.
PHA : Phase data trouble alarm has occurred.
BLA : Battery low alarm has occurred.
CSA : Check sum alarm has occurred.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
203 DTE CRC STB PRM
DTE : Data error has occurred.

CRC : Communication error has occurred.
STB : Stop bit error has occurred.
PRM : The parameter illegal alarm has been given.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
OFS : A/D conversion of a digital servo current value is abnormal.

MCC : The contact of the servo amplifier’s magnetic contactor has
melted.
LDA : The LED of the serial pulse coder is abnormal.
PMS : A feedback error occurred.
113
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT
1
When the same alarm is detected by the servo system, bit 4 (PRM) of DGN
No. 0203 is set to 1.
AXS : In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that exceeds
the range of 1 to the number of controlled axes (such as 4 instead 2
of 3), or non–sequential value is set.
DIR : In parameter No. 2022, used for specifying the direction of
rotation of the motor, a valid value (111 or –111) has not been set.
PLS : In parameter No. 2024, used for specifying the number of
position feedback pulses per motor rotation, an invalid value, 3
such as 0 or a negative value, has been set.
PLC : In parameter No. 2023, used for specifying the number of velocity
feedback pulses per motor rotation, an invalid value, such as 0
or a negative value, has been set.
MOT : In parameter No. 2020, used for specifying the motor model, an 4
invalid value has been set.
6.1.7 Positional error display (No. 300)

No. 5
300 Position error of an axis in detection unit
The positional error is displayed in Least command units.

6
6.1.8 Machine position display (No. 301)
No.
301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unit
7
The machine position from the reference point is displayed in least command
units.
6.1.9 Cause of the APZ bit (bit 4 of parameter 1815)

8
brought to 0
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
310 DTH ALP BZ2 BZ1 PR2 PR1
9
#0(PR1) : The setting of the following parameters has been changed:
Parameters 1821, 1850, 1860, 1861.
#1(PR2) : The setting of the ATS bit (bit 1 of parameter 8302) has been
changed.
#2(BZ1) : The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V. 10
#3(BZ2) : The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (separate position
detector).
#5(ALP) : Before the α pulse coder detects a full single rotation, reference
position establishment by parameters was attempted.
#6(DTH) : A controlled axis detach signal/parameter was input.
114
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
311 DUA XBZ GSG AL4 AL3 AL2 AL1
#0(AL1) : An APC alarm was issued.

#2(AL3) : The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (serial pulse coder).
#3(AL4) : An abnormal rotation speed (RCAL) was detected.
#4(GSG): The G202 signal was brought from 0 to 1.
#1(AL2) : A disconnection was detected.
#6(DUA) : While the dual position feedback function was being used, the
difference in error between the semi–closed loop side and the
closed loop side became too large.
#5(XBZ) : The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (serial separate position
detector).
6.1.10 Spindle data (No. 400–420)

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
400 SAI SSR POS SIC
SIC 0: The module required for spindle serial control is not installed.
1: The module required for spindle serial control is installed.
POS 0: The module required for spindle analog control is not installed.
1: The module required for spindle analog control is installed.
SSR 0: Spindle serial control is not used.
1: Spindle serial control is used.
SAI 1: Spindle analog control is not used.
0: Spindle analog control is used.
No.
401 Serial spindle alarm state of spindle
Information related to communication errors in the spindle serial output

interface
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE
CRE 1: A CRC error occurred (warning).

FRE 1: A framing error occurred (warning).
SNE 1: The sender/receiver is incorrect.
CER 1: A receiver error occurred.
CME 1: In automatic scanning, no response is returned.
SCA 1: A communication alarm is issued on the spindle amplifier side.
SSA 1: A system alarm is issued on the spindle amplifier side.
(These states represent the causes of spindle alarm No. 749. These states
are caused mainly by noise, disconnection, and momentary power failure.)
115
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
409 SPE S1E SHE
1
Refer to this diagnosis when alarm 750 has generated.
SPE In spindle serial control, serial spindle parameters

0: Satisfy start condition of spindle unit 2
1: Do not satisfy start condition of spindle unit
S1E 0: Spindle started normally in spindle serial control.
1: Spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.
SHE 0: Serial communication module is correct on CNC side. 3
1: An error occurred in serial communication module on CNC side.
No.
410 Display of the load meter for the spindle (%)
4
No.
411 Display of the speed meter for the spindle (rpm)
The above DGN parameters (No. 414 to 416) are represented in units of 5
pulses. One pulse corresponds to an error of 360/4096 (degrees).
No.
417 Feedback information of spindle position coder
6
No.
418 Position error of spindle position loop mode
The above four DGN items (No. 417 to 420) directly display the data received
from the serial spindle control unit.
7
6.1.11 Rigid tapping display (No. 450–457)

No.
450
8
Spindle position error during rigid tapping
The position deviation of the spindle during rigid tapping is displayed in

detection units.
No. 9
451 Spindle distribution during rigid tapping
The number of pulses issued to the spindle during rigid tapping, is displayed
in detection units. 10
No.
454 Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tapping
The cumulative number of pulses, issued to the spindle during rigid tapping,
is displayed in detection units.
116
No.
455 Instantaneous difference for the move command, calculated in
terms of the spindle, during rigid tapping
(signed, accumulated value)
The momentary value (signed, cumulative) of a spindle–converted move

command difference during rigid tapping is displayed in detection units.
No.
456 Instantaneous difference for the travel error, calculated in terms of
the spindle, during rigid tapping (signed)
The momentary value (signed) of a spindle–converted position deviation

difference during rigid tapping is displayed in detection units.
No.
457 Width of synchronization error during rigid tapping
(maximum value)
The width (maximum value) of a synchronization error during rigid tapping

is displayed in detection units.
6.1.12 Simplified synchronous control display (No. 540)

No.
540 Difference in the position error between the master and slave
axes in simple synchronas control
No.
541 Difference in the position error between the master and slave
axes in simple synchronas control
DGN 540 indicates the difference in the position error between the master
and slave axes when a single axis pair is subjected to simple synchronous
control. DGN 541 is used when two or more pairs are subjected to simple
synchronous control. The position error is indicated for the master axis.
6.1.13 Display related to the dual position feedback function

(No. 550–553)
No.
550 Closed loop error
Data is displayed in detection units.

No.
551 Semi–closed loop error

No.
552 Error between semi–closed and closed loops

No.
553 Amount of dual position compensation

117
Display of the items on the diagnostic screen (for the DPL/
MDI operation package only)
1
DGN Description Unit
number
800 Relative coordinates Least input increment
801 Skip position Least input increment
2
802 Remaining travel distance Least input increment/2
803 Accumulated acceleration/de- End position in previous
celeration amount block
804 End point position of the pre- Least input increment/2
vious block
3
810 No. of program under execu-
tion
811 No. of sequence under execu-
tion
820 G code in group 01 4
821 G code in group 02
5
830 F code under execution 0.001 mm/min
0.00001 inch/min
(For a command without 6
a decimal point
1 mm/min
0.01 inch/min)
831 Actual feedrate mm/min
deg/min
0.01 inch/min 7
832 Actual spindle speed min–1 PM i–D
833 Value resulting from compen- 10 mV
sating the value input with the
analog input function
840 Number of registered programs Number of programs 8
841 Number of programs used Number of characters
850 ROM series number of NC sys-
tem
851 ROM edition number of NC
system
9
852 Operation mode
853 ROM series number of servo
system
854 ROM edition number of servo 10
system
855 ROM series number of PMC
system
856 ROM edition number of PMC
system
857 Ladder program number
858 Ladder program edition number
NOTE Item No. 832, actual spindle speed, is displayed on the PM i–D only.
118
FHigh–speed response function

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
890 OVC0 OVC2 OVC1 ILK2 ILK1
ILK1 : The axis is interlocked.

ILK2 : The axis is interlocked by the following causes.
D The axis is detached.
D The signal *RILK is “0”.
D The axis is stopped by the feed stop function.
OVC1 : The override cancel signal (OVC,OVCn) is “1”.
OVC2 : The override cancel signal (OVCn) is “1”.
OVC0 : The feed rate override is 0%.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
891 ALM2 ALM1
ALM1 : Following alarm occurs, and so the motion program can not be
executed
D P/S alarm 000
D Overheat alarm
D Serial pulse coder (SPC) alarm
D Servo alarm
D Over travel alarm
D APC alarm
D The alarm for FSSB
(alarm No.5134 – 5139, 5197, 5198)
ALM2 : An alarm including the above alarm(ALM1) occurs, and so the
motion program can not be executed.
When this bit is “1”, the cause is set to the diagnostic data No.896.
No.
894 Executing program number
The number of the executing motion program for each axis is set.
If the time to execute the program is too short, this data might be set
incorrectly.
No.
895 Executing block number
The block number of the executing motion program for each axis is set.
If the time to execute the block is too short, this data might be set incorrectly.
So, if the executing motion program is finished, the value might not be set
the last block number of the executed motion program.
No.
896 Alarm number
The alarm number which occurred in the high response mode is set. For
detail of the alarm number, refer to next page.
The cause for the alarm will be displayed on the alarm message screen,
when this value is 0 and the alarm occurs.
119
The alarm number at the diagnosis data No.896
Number Contents 1
0010 An unusable G code is specified.
0011 The feedrate was inadequate.
(1) Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed.
(2) Feedrate was 0.
0015 The number of the commanded axes exceeded the maximum of 2
simultaneously controlled axes.
0059 A specified program number was not found.This alarm occurred
when the program, which had not been compiled, was specified.
0090 The reference point return could not be done because the refer-
ence position is not established. 3
0213 One of the following errors occurred during synchronous opera-
tion (simple synchronous control):
(1) The motion program contains a move command for the slave
axis.
(2) The difference of position error between the master and 4
slave axes exceeded the value set in parameter 8313 or
8323.
0224 Reference position return has not been performed before the
operation starts. Perform reference position return when parame-
ter ZRNX (No.1005#0) is 0.
0244 In the skip function activated by the torque limit signal, the num-
5
ber of accumulated erroneous pulses exceed 32767 before the
signal was input.
1000 The number of the programs to be executed at the same time
was exceeded the limit.
1001 The two or more programs including the same axis were 6
executed at the same time.
1002 The program was broken.
1003 The program could not be executed because the program was
compiling.
1010 The auxiliary function was not available. This alarm occurred at
7
following cases.
(1) Parameter No.8706#4 was 0.
(2) Parameter No.8745 was set the incorrect value.
(3) PMC–SB5 was specified.
1200 The feedrate was exceeded the value of the maximum cut fee- 8
drate (parameter No.1430).
1210 The movement value per a block was excessive.
1220 The axis which is used in the executing motion program was
synchronized with the master axis.
1231 For continuous feed, both the plus direction signal and the minus 9
direction signal for the same control axis were set to “1” at the
same time.
10
120
6.2 Screen Display at Power On

(1) Slot configuration display
PCB modules mounted on the slots are displayed. The CRT displays
this screen when a hardware trouble or invalid leading of PCB has
occurred.
(a) Screen display
SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY
0: 003E4000 0:
1: 30464202 1:
2: 00504303 2:
3: 3:
4: 4:
5: 5:
: :
: :
Slot No. (2ndary)

Module ID code, Software ID code, Logical No. (*1)
Slot No. (Primary)
*1) Module ID code of PCBs ĘĘjjnn
Slot No. of CNC (Logical No.)
Module function (Software ID code)
Type of PCBs (Module ID code)
(b) Module ID code
ID Name
DD Power Mate i base PCB
AA High–speed serial bus (HSSB) board
C4 or 95 FANUC I/O Link–II board
E3 PROFIBUS–DP slave board
FC PROFIBUS–DP master board
36 Ethernet board
EF or BF DeviceNet, slave board, master board
(c) Software ID code

40 : Basic function
5E : HSSB board
5F : Ethernet board
69 : PROFIBUS–DP slave board
6A : PROFIBUS–DP master board
6E : I/O Link–II board
70 : DeviceNet master board
71 or 79 : DeviceNet slave board
121
(2) Screen of waiting for setting module configuration information
88E0 – 01 2
COPYRIGHT FANUC LTD 1997–1998
SLOT 01 (3046) : END END : End
SLOT 02 (3050) : Blank :
Waiting
Module ID
code
Slot No. 3
(3) Display of the software series and version

4
88E0 – 01 ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅ
CNC control software
5
ÅÅÅÅÅ
COPYRIGHT FANUC LTD 1997–1998
SERVO : 9090–01 Servo CPU software
PMC : zzzz–zz PMC Ladder soft
OMM : Order–Made Macro 7

(4) Initial screen (different on some machines)
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010

8
X 235.891
Y 509.818
Z –50.000 9
PART COUNT 11
ACT.F 1200 MM/M S 0 T0000
AUTO STRT MTN *** 12:15:24
10
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ (OPRT) ]
122
6.3 System Configuration Screen
Software and hardware configuration are displayed on the system

configuration screen when the CNC becomes ready for operation.
(1) Display method
Function key SYSTEM

.
±
Soft key [SYSTEM].
±
PAGE
Page key PAGE or , selecting screens (2) to (4).
(2) PCB configuration screen

(a) Screen display
Software series
ÅÅÅÅÅ
SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT) PAGE01
ÅÅÅÅÅ
SLOT MODULE ID SERIES VERSION
00 10DD : 40 88E0 0006 Software version
ÅÅÅÅÅ
Software ID (type)
Module ID
Slot No.
(b) Module ID code
ID Name
DD Power Mate i base PCB
AA High–speed serial bus (HSSB) board
C4 or 95 FANUC I/O Link–II board
E3 PROFIBUS–DP slave board
FC PROFIBUS–DP master board
36 Ethernet board
EF or BF DeviceNet, slave board, master board
(c) Software ID code

40 : Basic function
123
(3) Software configuration screen
Kind of software
Software series
1
SYSTEM CONFIG (SOFTWARE) 01234 N12345
PAGE:02
Software version
SYSTEM 88E0 0001
BASIC Software configuration
SERVO 9090 0001 2
PMC(SYS) 407B 0001
PMC(LAD) PMI 0001
MACRO LIB BZG1 0001 Character written on
PMC title screen
BOOT 881I 0004
AUTO **** *** *** 12:14:59

4
(4) Module configuration screen
The configuration of the modules mounted on each board is
displayed.
Slot number
5
SYSTEM CONFIG (MODULE) 01234 N12345
PAGE:03
SLOT 00 MOTHER BOARD Type of PCB mounted
AXIS CTRL CARD : FF 6

DISPLAY CTRL CARD : 0E
CPU CARD : 09
FROM DIMM : 41
SRAM DIMM : 01 Hardware ID of
DRAM DIMM : 85 mounted card PCB
and DIMM module
7
Names of mounted
card PCB and DIMM
module
AUTO **** *** *** 12:14:59
8
System configuration of another PCB is displayed by page key
PAGE
( or PAGE ).
NOTE See Section 7.5 for display of each module.

9
10
124
6.4 Interface between CNC and PMC/MT and

Displaying I/O Signals
(1) Power Mate i–D (one–path control) or Power Mate i–H
Addresses of interface signals between CNC and PMC/MT.
G000X X000X
CNC PMC MT
F000X Y000X
(2) Power Mate i–D (two–path control)

The figure below shows the addresses of the interface signals between
the CNC and the PMC.
Note, however, that some of signals common to paths 1 and 2 are
allocated to path 1.
CNC PMC MT
G000X
Path 1 F000X
X000X
Path 2 Y000X
G1000X
F1000X
125
6.4.1 Signal summary (in order of functions)
f : Available
– : Unavailable 1
Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H

*+L1 to *+L8 G114 f f
Overtravel signals
*–L1 to *–L8 G116 f f 2
Manual absolute
*ABSM G006#2 f f
signal
X000#5 f –
*DEC1
X1000#5 f – 3
Reference position X002 – f
*DEC1 to *DEC8 return deceleration
signal X1002 – f
X001#5 f –
*DEC2
X1001#5 f – 4
Control axis selection
*EAXSL status signals F129#7 f f
(PMC axis control)
*ESP G008#4 f f
*ESP
Emergency stop
X000#4 f f
5
signal
*ESP X1000#4 f f
Emergency stop
*ESPA G071#1 f –
signals (serial spindle)
*FLWU Follow–up signal G007#5 f f 6
Feedrate override
*FV0 to *FV7 G012 f f
signals
*
Feedrate override
*FV0E to *FV7E signals (PMC axis G151 f f
control) 7
Software operator’s
*FV0O to *FV7O panel signals (*FV0 to F078 f f
*FV7)
*HROV0 to 1% step rapid traverse G096#0 to
f f
*HROV6 override signals #6 8
Interlock signal for all
*IT G008#0 f f
axes
Interlock signal for
*IT1 to *IT8 G130 f f
each axis
Manual feedrate G010,G01
9
*JV0 to *JV15 f f
override signals 1
*JV0O to *JV15O panel signals (*JV0 to F079,F080 f f
*JV15)
X000#6 f f
10
High–speed interlock
*RILK
signal X1000#6 f f
*SP Feed hold signal G008#5 f f
*SPO F075#7 f f
panel signal (*SP)
*SSTP Spindle stop signal G029#6 f –
126

PMC/controlled–axis–
+EDITA to
direction–specific G462 f f
+EDITH
interlock signal
Feed axis and
+J1 to +J8 direction selection G100 f f
signals
F081#0,#2
+ +J1O to +J4O panel signals (+J1 to f f
,#4, #6
+J4)
Stroke check external
+LM1 to +LM8 G110 f f
setting signals
+MIT1 to +MIT8 each axis and G132 f f
direction
+STEPn Device step signal G450 – f
PMC/control–axis–dir
–EDITA to
ection–specific G463 f f
–EDITH
interlock signal
Feed axis and
–J1 to –J8 direction selection G102 f f
signals
F081#1,#3
– –J1O to –J4O panel signals (–J1 to f f
,#5, #7
–J4)
Stroke check external
–LM1 to –LM8 G112 f f
setting signals
–MIT1 to –MIT8 each axis and G134 f f
direction
–STEPn Device step signal G451 – f
Servo axis abnormal
ABTQSV F090#0 f f
load detected signal
Spindle abnormal load
ABTSP1 F090#1 f –
detected signal
Temporary interrupt
ACT G212#7 f f
detection signal
AD00 to AD12, F206 to
Analog input signal f f
ADSGN F207
Auxiliary function lock
AFL G005#6 f f
signal
AL Alarm signal F001#0 f f
A
ALAPC APC alarm signal F251#0 f f
Alarm signals (serial
ALMA F045#0 f –
spindle)
Over heat alarm
ALOH F250#5 f f
signal
Over travel alarm
ALOT F250#4 f f
signal
ALPS P/S alarm signal F250#3 f f
ALPS1 P/S alarm 100 signal F250#0 f f
127
1
P/S alarm (No. 5001
ALPS4 F251#2 f f
or later) signal
ALSPD Spindle alarm signal F251#1 f –
ALSV Servo alarm signal F250#6 f f
APC battery low alarm F236#7 to
2
APBL1 to APBL8 f f
2 signal F243#7
APC battery low alarm F236#6 to
APBV1 to APBV8 f f
1 signal F243#6
APBZ1 to APBZ8
APC battery voltage 0
error signal
F236#5 to
F243#5
f f 3
A
APCM1 to APC communication F236#0 to
f f
APCM8 error signal F243#0
APC framing error F236#2 to
APFE1 to APFE8 f f
signal F243#2 4
APOV1 to APC over time error F236#1 to
f f
APOV8 signal F243#1
APC parity error F236#3 to
APPE1 to APPE8 f f
signal F243#3
APC pulse miss error F236#4 to 5
APPS1 to APPS8 f f
signal F243#4
Alarm reset signals
ARSTA G071#0 f –
(serial spindle)
BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2 f f
6
Optional block skip G044#0,
BDT1 to BDT9 f f
signals G045
B Software operator’s
BDTO F075#2 f f
panel signal (BDT)
BGEACT
Background editing
F053#4 f f
7
signal
Spindle switch
CFINA completion signals F046#1 f –
(serial spindle)
CHPA
Power line switch
F046#0 f –
8
Torque limit reach
CLRCH1 to signals for butt–type
F180 f f
CLRCH8 reference position
setting
9
Synchronous G452
CLTH1 to CLTH8 – f
connection signal #0 to #7
C
Constant surface
CSS F002#2 f –
speed signal
Chaser tool 10
CTCHK open/close state G212#4 f –
check signal
Clutch/gear signals
CTH1A,CTH2A G070#3,#2 f –
(serial spindle)
Chaser open control
CTOPN F209#7 f –
signal
CUT Cutting feed signal F002#6 f f
128

Differential speed
mode command
DEFMDA G072#3 f –
signals
(serial spindle)
DEN Distribution end signal F001#3 f f
High–speed skip X1003#0
DI30 to DI37 – f
signal to #7
DM00 F009#7 f f
DM01 F009#6 f f
Decode M signals
DM02 F009#5 f f
DM30 F009#4 f f
D DNC operation
DNCI G043#5 f –
selection signal
DRN Dry run signal G046#7 f f
Dry run signal (PMC
DRNE G150#7 f f
axis control)
DRNO F075#5 f f
panel signal (DRN)
DTCH1 to Controlled axis detach
G124 f f
DTCH8 signals
DVALM1 to F248#0 to
Device alarm signal f f
DVALM2 #2
Device input enable
DVIENn G455 – f
signal
Address signals for G002#0 to
EA0 to EA6 f f
external data input #6
EABUFA F131#1 f f
EABUFB F134#1 f f
EABUFC F137#1 – f
EABUFD Buffer full signals F140#1 – f
EABUFE (PMC axis control) F501#1 – f
EABUFF F504#1 – f
E EABUFG F507#1 – f
EABUFH F510#1 – f
EACNT1 to Controlling signals
F182 f f
EACNT8 (PMC axis control)
Distribution
EADEN1 to
completion signals F112 f f
EADEN8
(PMC axis control)
Control axis selection
EAX1 to EAX8 signals (PMC axis G136 f f
control)
129
EBSYA F130#7 f f
1
EBSYB F133#7 f f
EBSYC F136#7 – f
Axis control command
EBSYD read completion F139#7 – f
EBSYE signals (PMC axis F500#7 – f
control) 2
EBSYF F503#7 – f
EBSYG F506#7 – f
EBSYH F509#7 – f
EBUFA G142#7 f f 3
EBUFB G154#7 f f
EBUFC G166#7 – f
EBUFD Axis control command G178#7 – f
read signals
EBUFE (PMC axis control) G464#7 – f 4
EBUFF G476#7 – f
EBUFG G488#7 – f
EBUFH G500#7 – f
EC0A to EC6A
G143#0 to
f f 5
#6
G155#0 to
E EC0B to EC6B f f
#6
G167#0 to
EC0C to EC6C – f
#6 6
G179#0 to
EC0D to EC6D Axis control command – f
#6
signals (PMC axis
control) G465#0 to
EC0E to EC6E – f
#6
G477#0 to
7
EC0F to EC6F – f
#6
G489#0 to
EC0G to EC6G – f
#6
G501#0 to 8
EC0H to EC6H – f
#6
ECKZA F130#1 f f
ECKZB F133#1 f f
ECKZC F136#1 – f
Following zero
9
ECKZD F139#1 – f
checking signals
ECKZE (PMC axis control) F500#1 – f
ECKZF F503#1 – f
ECKZG F506#1 – f
10
ECKZH F509#1 – f
130

ECLRA G142#6 f f
ECLRB G154#6 f f
ECLRC G166#6 – f
ECLRD Reset signals (PMC G178#6 – f
ECLRE axis control) G464#6 – f
ECLRF G476#6 – f
ECLRG G488#6 – f
ECLRH G500#6 – f
X1003#0
ECMCHG Cam shaft – f
to #7
ECMCP1 to Phase matching F223#0 to
– f
ECMCP4 completion signal #3
Phase matching start
ECMCST G239#7 – f
signal
Electronic cam
ECMEND G239#1 – f
function end signal
Electronic cam
ECMEXE operation execution F224#0 – f
E in–progress signal
Electronic cam
ECMST G239#0 – f
operation start signal
Data signals for G000,
ED0 to ED15 f f
external data input G001
EDENA F130#3 f f
EDENB F133#3 f f
EDENC F136#3 – f
EDEND Auxiliary function F139#3 – f
executing signals
EDENE (PMC axis control) F500#3 – f
EDENF F503#3 – f
EDENG F506#3 – f
EDENH F509#3 – f
External punch start G252,
EDG00 to EDG15 f f
number signal G253
Diagnosis selection
EDGN G251#7 f f
signal
EDGN00 to External punch total G254,
f f
EDGN15 count signal G255
131
EFINA G142#0 f f
1
EFINB G154#0 f f
EFINC G166#0 – f
EFIND Auxiliary function G178#0 – f
completion signals
EFINE G464#0 – f
(PMC axis control) 2
EFINF G476#0 – f
EFING G488#0 – f
EFINH G500#0 – f
EGENA F130#4 f f 3
EGENB F133#4 f f
EGENC F136#4 – f
EGEND Axis moving signals F139#4 – f
(PMC axis control) f
EGENE F500#4 – 4
EGENF F503#4 – f
EGENG F506#4 – f
EGENH F509#4 – f
EIALA F130#2 f f 5
EIALB F133#2 f f
E EIALC F136#2 – f
EIALD Alarm signals (PMC F139#2 – f
EIALE axis control) F500#2 – f 6
EIALF F503#2 – f
EIALG F506#2 – f
EIALH F509#2 – f
EID0A to EID31A
G146 to
f f
7
G149
G158 to
EID0B to EID31B f f
G161
G170 to
EID0C to EID31C – f 8
G173
G182 to
EID0D to EID31D Axis control data – f
G185
signals (PMC axis
control) G468 to
EID0E to EID31E – f
G471
9
G480 to
EID0F to EID31F – f
G483
G492 to
EID0G to EID31G – f
G495
EID0H to EID31H
G504 to
– f 10
G507
132

G144,
EIF0A to EIF15A f f
G145
G156,
EIF0B to EIF15B f f
G157
G168,
EIF0C to EIF15C – f
G169
G180,
EIF0D to EIF15D Axis control feedrate – f
G181
signals (PMC axis
control) G466,
EIF0E to EIF15E – f
G467
G478,
EIF0F to EIF15F – f
G479
G490,
EIF0G to EIF15G – f
G491
G502,
EIF0H to EIF15H – f
G503
EINPA F130#0 f f
EINPB F133#0 f f
EINPC F136#0 – f
EINPD In–position signals F139#0 – f
E
EINPE (PMC axis control) F500#0 – f
EINPF F503#0 – f
EINPG F506#0 – f
EINPH F509#0 – f
EKC0 to EKC7 Key code signals G098 f f
Key code read
EKENB F053#7 f f
completion signal
EKSET Key code read signal G066#7 f f
ELCAM1 to Follow–up axis G238#0 to
– f
ELCAM4 selection signal #3
ELCKZA G142#1 f f
ELCKZB G154#1 f f
ELCKZC G166#1 – f
ELCKZD Following zero G178#1 – f
checking signals
ELCKZE (PMC axis control) G464#1 – f
ELCKZF G476#1 – f
ELCKZG G488#1 – f
ELCKZH G500#1 – f
133
EM11A to EM48A F132,F142 f f
1
EM11B to EM48B F135,F145 f f
EM11C to
F138,F148 – f
EM48C
EM11D to
F141,F151 – f
EM48D Auxiliary function 2
code signals (PMC
EM11E to EM48E axis control) F502,F488 – f
EM11F to EM48F F505,F491 – f
EM11G to
F508,F494 – f
EM48G 3
EM11H to
F511,F497 – f
EM48H
EMBUFA G142#2 f f
EMBUFB G154#2 f f
4
EMBUFC G166#2 – f
EMBUFD Buffering disable G178#2 – f
signals (PMC axis
EMBUFE control) G464#2 – f
EMBUFF G476#2 – f
5
EMBUFG G488#2 – f
EMBUFH G500#2 – f
E
EMFA F131#0 f f
EMFB F134#0 f f
6
EMFC F137#0 – f
EMFD Auxiliary function F140#0 – f
strobe signals (PMC
EMFE axis control) F501#0 – f
EMFF F504#0 – f
7
EMFG F507#0 – f
EMFH F510#0 – f
EMSBKA G143#7 f f
EMSBKB G155#7 f f 8
EMSBKC G167#7 – f
EMSBKD Block stop disable G179#7 – f
signals (PMC axis
EMSBKE control) G465#7 – f
EMSBKF G477#7 – f 9
EMSBKG G489#7 – f
EMSBKH G501#7 – f
ENB Spindle enable signal F001#4 f –
ENBKY
External key input
G066#1 f f 10
mode selection signal
134

EOTNA F130#6 f f
EOTNB F133#6 f f
EOTNC F136#6 – f
EOTND Negative–direction F139#6 – f
overtravel signals
EOTNE (PMC axis control) F500#6 – f
EOTNF F503#6 – f
EOTNG F506#6 – f
EOTNH F509#6 – f
EOTPA F130#5 f f
EOTPB F133#5 f f
EOTPC F136#5 – f
EOTPD Positive–direction F139#5 – f
overtravel signals
EOTPE (PMC axis control) F500#5 – f
EOTPF F503#5 – f
EOTPG F506#5 – f
EOTPH F509#5 – f
Override 0% signal
EOV0 F129#5 f f
(PMC axis control)
E Parameter selection
EPARM G251#6 f f
signal
External pulse input
EPCON G066#6 f f
interface select signal
Read completion
EREND signal for external F060#0 f f
data input
ERS External reset signal G008#7 f f
ESBKA G142#3 f f
ESBKB G154#3 f f
ESBKC G166#3 – f
ESBKD Block stop signals G178#3 – f
ESBKE (PMC axis control) G464#3 – f
ESBKF G476#3 – f
ESBKG G488#3 – f
ESBKH G500#3 – f
Search completion
ESEND signal for external F060#1 f f
data input
Skip signal (PMC axis X000#3 f f

ESKIP
control) X1000#3 f f
135
ESOFA G142#4 f f
1
ESOFB G154#4 f f
ESOFC G166#4 – f
ESOFD Servo off signals G178#4 – f
ESOFE (PMC axis control) G464#4 – f
2
ESOFF G476#4 – f
ESOFG G488#4 – f
ESOFH G500#4 – f
ESTB
Read signal for
external data input
G002#7 f f 3
ESTPA G142#5 f f
ESTPB G154#5 f f
ESTPC G166#5 – f
Axis control temporary
4
ESTPD G178#5 – f
stop signals
ESTPE (PMC axis control) G464#5 – f
ESTPF G476#5 – f
ESTPG G488#5 – f
5
ESTPH G500#5 – f
Variable selection
EVAR G251#5 f f
signal
X0000
#0 to #2, 6
E #6 (Path 1)
X0001
#0 to #2,
#6 (Path 2)
X0011 7
#4, #5
Speed switching (Path 1)
EXF1 to EXF5 f f
signal X0011
#6, #7
(Path 2)
8
X1000
#0 to #2,
#6 (Path 1)
X1001
#0 to #2,
#6 (Path 2) 9
Data I/O channel
selection signal of I/O G248
EXIO1, EXIO2 f f
device external #0, #1
control B
Program selection 10
EXPRG G251#4 f f
signal
External read start
EXRD G058#1 f f
signal
External read/punch
EXSTP G058#2 f f
stop signal
External punch start
EXWT G058#3 f f
signal
136

FANAL1, F248#5,
Fan alarm signal f f
FANAL2 #6
FIN End signal G004#3 f f
F
File number
designation signal of G249,
FLN00 to FLN15 f f
I/O device external G250
control B
Look–ahead forward
G08MD feed in progress F066#0 f f
signal
Gear selection signals
G GR1,GR2 G028#1,#2 f –
(input)
GR1O,GR2O, Gear selection signals F034#0 to
f –
GR3O (output) #2
GST Gear shift signal G212#5 f –
HALM1 to Motion program alarm
F230 – f
HALM8 signal
HERS1 to Motion program reset
G233 – f
HERS8 signal
Motion program use
HEX1 to HEX8 F229 – f
signal
High–speed response
HMD G226#0 – f
mode signal
High–speed response
HMDO mode in–progress F228#0 – f
signal
Handy operator’s
HOPATH panel connection F208#0 f f
signal
Handy operator’s
HOPEMG panel emergency stop F175#7 f f
status signal
Handy operator’s
HOPENB panel emergency stop F175#6 f f
H switch status signal
Handy operator’s
HOPSTP panel dead–man F175#5 f f
switch status signal
HOVC1 to Motion program
G227 – f
HOVC8 override cancel signal
HPST00 to Motion program start G228 to
– f
HPST31 signal G231
Motion program
HRDY1 to
execution enable F231 – f
HRDY8
signal
1% step rapid traverse
HROV override selection G096#7 f f
signals
Manual handle feed G018#0 to
HS1A to HS1D f f
axis selection signals #3
HS1AO F077#0 f f
panel signal (HS1A)
HS1BO F077#1 f f
panel signal (HS1B)
137
HS1CO
panel signal(HS1C)
F077#2 – f 1
HS1DO F077#3 – f
panel signal (HS1D)
Manual handle
G041#0 to
HS1IA to HS1ID interrupt axis f f
selection signals
#3 2
HS2A to HS2D f f
Manual handle
G041#4 to
HS2IA to HS2ID interrupt axis f f
H
selection signals
#7 3
HS3A to HS3D – f
Manual handle
G042#0 to
HS3IA to HS2ID interrupt axis – f
selection signals
#3 4
HSBK1 to Motion program
G232 – f
HSBK8 single–block signal
Motion program
HSBKO1 to
single–block stop F232 – f
HSBKO8
signal
5
All–axis VRDY off
IGNVRY G066#0 f f
alarm ignore signal
IGVRY1 to Each–axis VRDY off
G192 f f
IGVRY8 alarm ignore signal
6
Incremental command
externally set
INCMDA G072#5 f –
orientation signals
(serial spindle)
Incremental
INCSTA orientation mode F047#1 f – 7
Orientation stop
I position change
INDXA G072#0 f –
command signals
(serial spindle) 8
Key input disable
INHKY F053#0 f f
signal
INP1 to INP8 In–position signals F104 f f
Speed integral signals
INTGA
(serial spindle)
G071#5 f – 9
Data input/output
IOLNK selection signal with G251#0 f f
I/O LINK
IPL1 to IPL8 Distributing signals F221 f f
10
138

K0 to K9, KMNS,
KPRD, KNO,
KSLH, KEOB,
KCAN, KALT,
KINS, KDLT,
KINP, KWRT,
KRED, KPOS, Data reference F210 to
f f
KPRGKVAR, function by PMC F218
KPRM,
KALMKDWN,
KUP, KP, KQ, KH,
KO, KN, KG, KR,
KX, KF, KM, KS,
KT, KSHRP
KDEL Block deletion signal G215#6 – f
Simultaneous input
KENB F253#7 – f
completion signal
Memory protection G046#3 to
KEY1 to KEY4 f f
signals #6
K Software operator’s
KEYO panel signals (KEY1 F075#6 f f
to KEY4)
Input/deletion start
KEXC G215#7 – f
signal
F code simultaneous
KF G215#0 – f
input signal
G00 code
KG00 simultaneous input G215#2 – f
signal
G01 code
signal
G04 code
signal
Axis address/P code
KPAX G215#1 – f
input signal
KUP Cursor up signal G215#5 – f
Load detection
LDT1A signals 1 (serial F045#4 f –
spindle)
Load detection
L LDT2A signals 2 (serial F045#5 f –
spindle)
Handy operator’s
G204,
LED01 to LED09 panel LED control f f
G205#0
signal
Handy operator’s
M–OPE F169#5 f f
panel mode
Miscellaneous F010 to
M00 to M31 f f
function code signals F013
M
2nd M function code F014 to
M200 to M215 f f
signals F015
3rd M function code F016 to
M300 to M315 f f
signals F017
139
4th M function code F018 to
M400 to M415
signal F019
– f 1
5th M function code F020 to
M500 to M515 – f
signal F021
MA CNC ready signal F001#7 f f
MAUT
Operation mode
F003#5 f f
2
check signal
Power line switch
MCFNA completion signals G071#3 f –
(serial spindle)
MD1,MD2,MD4
Mode selection G043#0 to
f f
3
signals #2
MD1O F073#0 f f
panel signal (MD1)
MD2O F073#1 f f 4
panel signal (MD2)
MD4O F073#2 f f
panel signal (MD4)
MDTCH1 to Controlled axis detach
F110 f f
MDTCH8 status signals
5
MEAS0 to G0244#0
Measurement signal – f
MEAS7 to #7
Operation mode
MEDT F003#6 f f
check signal
MF2
2nd M function strobe
F008#4 f f 6
M signal
3rd M function strobe
MF3 F008#5 f f
signal
4th M function strobe
MF4 F008#6 – f
signal 7
5th M function strobe
MF5 F008#7 – f
signal
Miscellaneous
MF F007#0 f f
function strobe signal
Miscellaneous
8
MFIN function completion G005#0 f f
signal
2nd M function
MFIN2 G004#4 f f
completion signal
3rd M function
9
MFIN3 G004#5 f f
completion signal
4th M function
MFIN4 G004#6 – f
completion signal
5th M function
MFIN5
completion signal
G004#7 – f 10
Spindle switch MAIN
MFNHGA MCC contact status G072#6 f –
MI1 to MI8 Mirror image signals G106 f f
Operation mode
MJ F003#2 f f
check signal
140

All–axis machine lock
MLK G044#1 f f
signal
Axis machine lock
MLK1 to MLK8 G108 f f
signal
MLKO F075#4 f f
panel signal (MLK)
Operation mode
MMDI F003#3 f f
check signal
Mirror image check
MMI1 to MMI8 F108 f f
signals
Magnetic sensor
MORA1A orientation completion F046#6 f –
Magnetic sensor
MORA2A orientation proximity F046#7 f –
Magnetic sensor
MORCMA orientation command G073#0 f –
Manual handle feed
G019#4,
MP1, MP2 movement value f f
#5
select signal
MP1O F076#0 f f
M panel signal (MP1)
MP2O F076#1 f f
panel signal (MP2)
Motor power cutoff
MPOFA command signals G073#2 f –
(serial spindle)
Machine ready
MRDYA G070#7 f –
DNC operation
selection confirmation F003#4 f –
signal
MRMT
Cam–shape data
registration mode F003#4 – f
check signal
Operation mode
MSTP F003#1 f f
check signal
Operation mode
MTCHIN F003#7 f f
check signal
MV1 to MV8 Axis moving signals F102 f f
Axis moving direction
MVD1 to MVD8 F106 f f
signals
Manual reference
MZRN position return F004#5 f f
selection check signal
Shortcut command
signals for orientation
N NRROA G072#2 f –
stop position change
(serial spindle)
141
Automatic operation
OP
signal
F000#7 f f 1
Orientation
ORARA completion signals F045#7 f –
(serial spindle)
Orientation command
ORCMA
G070#6 f – 2
O panel
OUT0 to OUT7 F072 f f
general–purpose
switch signals
OVC Override cancel signal G006#4 f f
3
Override cancellation
OVCE signal (PMC axis G150#5 f f
control)
Analog override
OVRIDA
G072#4 f – 4
Path display
PATHO F254#7 f –
confirmation signal
PATHS Path switch signal G63#0 f –
Position coder 5
one–rotation signal
PC1DEA F047#0 f –
detection status
Workpiece number
PN0 to PN7 G009#0 to 7 f f
search signals
6
P Position coder
orientation proximity
PORA2A F046#5 f –
signal
(serial spindle)
Program screen
PRGDPL
display mode signal
F053#1 f f 7
Target part count
PRTSF F062#7 f f
reached signal
PSW01 to Position switch F070#0 to
f f
PSW10 signals F071#1
8
Spindle motor speed
G032#0 to
R01I to R12I command input f –
G033#3
signals
F036#0 to
S12–bit code signals f –
F037#3
9
R01O to R12O Spindle motor speed
F036#0 to
command output f –
F037#3
signals
Power line status
R RCHA check signals (serial G071#7 f –
spindle) 10
Spindle switch HIGH
RCHHGA MCC contact status G072#7 f –
Output switch signals
RCHPA F046#2 f –
(serial spindle)
Output switch
RCFNA completion signals F046#3 f –
(serial spindle)
142

Spindle rotation
RGSPM F065#1 f –
direction signals
Spindle rotation
RGSPP F065#0 f –
direction signals
RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061#0 f –
Stroke check release
RLSOT G007#7 f f
signal
Rotational direction
command signals for
ROTAA orientation stop G072#1 f –
position change
(serial spindle)
Rapid traverse
ROV1,ROV2 G014#0,#1 f f
override signals
Rapid traverse
ROV1E,ROV2E override signals (PMC G150#0,#1 f f
axis control)
ROV1O F076#4 f f
panel signal (ROV1)
ROV2O F076#5 f f
panel signal (ROV2)
Read/punch alarm
RPALM F053#3 f f
signal
Read/punch busy
RPBSY F053#2 f f
signal
R
RRW Reset & rewind signal G008#6 f f
Output switch request
RSLA G071#6 f –
RST Resetting signal F001#1 f f
Manual rapid traverse
RT G019#7 f f
selection signal
Rigid
RTAP tapping–in–progress F076#3 f –
signal
Manual rapid traverse
RTE selection signal G150#6 f f
(PMC axis control)
RTN11 to RTN18 G206 f f
RTN21 to RTN28 Return signals G207 f –
RTN31 to RTN38 G208 f f
Rigid tapping
RTNT G212#6 f –
retraction start signal
Tapping retraction
RTNT G212#6 f –
start signal
RTO F077#6 f f
panel signal (RT)
Tapping retraction
RTPT F209#5 f –
completion signal
RWD Rewinding signal F000#0 f f
143
Spindle function code F022 to
S00 to S31
signals F025
f – 1
SA Servo ready signal F000#6 f f
Spindle speed arrival
SAR G029#4 f –
signal
SARA
Speed arrival signals
F045#3 f –
2
(serial spindle)
SBK Single block signal G046#1 f f
SBKO F075#3 f f
panel signal (SBK)
3
Speed detection
SDTA F045#2 f –
Spindle function
SF F007#2 f –
strobe signal
SFIN
Spindle function
G005#2 f – 4
completion signal
CW command signals
SFRA G070#5 f –
(serial spindle)
Spindle motor
SGN command polarity G033#5 f – 5
command signals
Spindle orientation
G078#0 to
SHA00 to SHA11 external stop position f –
G079#3
command signals
SIND
Spindle motor speed
G033#7 f –
6
S command selection
signal
X000#7 f f
SKIP
X1000#7 f f
X000#0 to 7
f f
Skip signals #2
SKIP2 to SKIP4
X1000#0
f f
to #2
SKIPP G006#6 f f
8
Subordinate operation
SLVA mode command G073#1 f –
Subordinate operation
SLVSA status signals (serial F046#4 f –
spindle) 9
Soft start/stop cancel
SOCNA G071#4 f –
Spindle orientation
SOR G029#5 f –
signal
10
Spindle speed
SOV0 to SOV7 G030 f –
override signals
SPL Feed hold lamp signal F000#4 f f
Spindle selection
SPSLA G071#2 f –
CCW command
SRVA G070#4 f –
144

Spindle motor
SSIN command polarity G033#6 f –
selection signal
Speed zero signals
SSTA F045#1 f –
(serial spindle)
ST Cycle start signal G007#2 f f
Cycle start lamp
STL F000#5 f f
signal
Acceleration/decelerat
SUP1 to SUP8 F220 f f
ion signals
Servo position
SVER1 to
deviation monitor F222 f f
SVER8
signal
S
SVF1 to SVF8 Servo off signals G126 f f
Handy operator’s
F168 to
SW1 to SW61 panel key output f f
F175
signal
Synchronization mode
SYCMD G212#1 – f
signal
Synchronization mode
SYCMO F208#1 – f
in effect signal
SYNC1 to Simple synchronous
G138 f f
SYNC8 axis selection signals
Simple synchronous
SYNCJ1 to
manual feed axis G140 f f
SYNCJ8
selection signals
Tool function code F026 to
T00 to T31 f f
signals F029
TAP Tapping signal F001#5 f –
Tool function strobe
TF F007#3 f f
signal
Tool function
TFIN G005#3 f f
completion signal
Torque limit signals
TLMA F045#6 f –
(serial spindle)
Torque limit command
TLMHA HIGH signals (serial G070#1 f –
spindle)
Torque limit command
T TLMLA LOW signals (serial G070#0 f –
spindle)
General–purpose
TMRON integrating meter start G053#0 f f
signal
Touch panel screen
TPTONC G212#0 f f
switching signal
G217 to
TRQ10 to TRQ87 Torque limit signals f f
G224
TRQ1E to Torque limit enable
G216 f f
TRQ8E signals
Torque control mode
TRQM1 to
signal (PMC axis F190 f f
TRQM8
control)
145
Input signals for G054,G05
UI000 to UI015
custom macro 5
f f 1
Interrupt signal for
UINT G053#3 f f
U custom macro
UO000 to UO015 F054,F055 f f
Output signals for
UO100 to UO131 custom macro F056 to
f f
2
F059
F209#0,
WAT1 to WAT4 Wait signal f f
#3
Wait completion G214#0 to
W WFN1 to WFN4 f f 3
signal #3
V–READY waiting
WVRDY F209#4 f f
signal
Reference position
ZP1 to ZP8 F094 f f
return end signal
4
2nd reference position
ZP21 to ZP28 return completion F096 f f
signals
3rd reference position
ZP31 to ZP38 return completion F098 f f
signals 5
f
Signal for reference (one–
ZPEXT1 to
position external G211 path f
ZPEXT8
setting control
Z only) 6
Reference position
ZR1 to ZR8 without dogs setting G210 f f
signal
Reference position
ZRF1 to ZRF8 F120 f f
establishment signal 7
Manual reference
position return G043#7 f f
ZRN selection signal
Mode selection
G043#7 f f
signals 8
ZRNO F073#4 f f
panel signal (ZRN)
10
146
6.4.2 Address list

The address relationships between the Power Mate i–MODEL D/H and
PMC interface signals are shown below. (Two–path control is effective to the
Power Mate i–D only.)
Path 1 side of one–path

and two–path control
G000 to
CNC PMC MT
Path 2 side of two–
path control X000 to /X1000 to
G1000 to
Path 1 side of one–path Y000 to /Y1000 to

and two–path control
F000 to
Path 2 side of two–
path control
F1000 to
The details of the Power Mate i–MODEL D/H and PMC interface signals are
listed below. In the list, #D represents signals dedicated to the Power Mate
i–MODEL D, #D1 represents those dedicated to one–path control, #D2
represents those dedicated to two–path control, and #H represents those
dedicated to the Power Mate i–MODEL H. The G/F addresses in path 2 side
of two–path control are equivalent to those in path 1 plus 1000. The signals
common to both paths are arranged on the path 1 side.
In the list, #1 represents signals dedicated to path 1, while #2 represents
signals dedicated to path 2.
Example
#7 #6 #2 #1 #0
G005 AFL SFIN#D MFIN
MT→PMC
F Power Mate i–D
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 SKIP#1 *RILK#1 *DEC#1 *ESP#1 ESKIP#1 SKIP4#1 SKIP3#1 SKIP2#1
X001 SKIP#2 *RILK#2 *DEC#2 *ESP#2 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2 SKIP2#2
Built–in I/O is used

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 SKIP#1 *RILK#1 *DEC#1 *ESP#1 ESKIP#1 SKIP4#1 SKIP3#1 SKIP2#1
X1001 SKIP#2 *RILK#2 *DEC#2 *ESP#2 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2 SKIP2#2
F Power Mate i–H

Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 SKIP *RILK *ESP ESKIP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
X001
X002 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
147
When built–in DI is used
X1000 SKIP *RILK *ESP ESKIP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
1
X1001

2
X1003 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30
F When the speed switching function is used (Power Mate i–D)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3
X0000 SKIP#1 EXF3#1 *DEC1 *ESP#1 ESKIP#1 SKIP4#1 EXF2#1 EXF1#1
X0001 SKIP#2 EXF3#2 *DEC#2 *ESP#2 SKIP4#2 EXF2#2 EXF1#2
4
X0011 EXF5#2 EXF4#2 EXF5#1 EXF4#1

Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5
X1000 SKIP#1 EXF3#1 *DEC1 *ESP#1 ESKIP#1 SKIP4#1 EXF2#1 EXF1#1
X1001 SKIP#2 EXF3#2 *DEC#2 *ESP#2 SKIP4#2 EXF2#2 EXF1#2

6
F When the speed switching function is used (Power Mate i–H)
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 SKIP EXF3 *ESP ESKIP SKIP4 EXF2 EXF1
7
X001

8
X0011 EXF5 EXF4

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 9
X1000 SKIP EXF3 *ESP ESKIP SKIP4 EXF2 EXF1
X1001
10
X1003 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30
NOTE Set by parameter BIO (No.3008#3) for using the signals which
X0000 to X0003 or X1000 to X1003.
148
PMC→CNC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0
G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8
G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
G003
G004 MFIN5#H MFIN4#H MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN
G005 AFL TFIN SFIN#D MFIN
G006 SKIPP OVC *ABSM
G007 RLSOT *FLWU ST
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT
G009 PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0
G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV6 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8
G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
G013
G014 ROV2 ROV1
G015
G016
G017
G018 HS2D#H HS2C#H HS2B HS2A HS1D#H HS1C#H HS1B HS1A
G019 RT MP2 MP1 HS3D#H HS3C#H HS3B#H HS3A#H
G020
to
G027
149
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G028 GR2#D GR1#D
1
G029 *SSTP#D SOR#D SAR#D
G030 SOV7#D SOV6#D SOV5#D SOV4#D SOV3#D SOV2#D SOV1#D SOV0#D

2
G031
G032 R08I#D R07I#D R06I#D R05I#D R04I#D R03I#D R02I#D R01I#D

3
G033 SIND#D SSIN#D SGN#D R12I#D R11I#D R10I#D R09I#D
G034
to
4
G040
G041 HS2ID#H HS2IC#H HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID#H HS1IC#H HS1IB HS1IA

5
G042 HS3ID#H HS3IC#H HS3IB#H HS3IA#H
G043 ZRN DNCI#D MD4 MD2 MD1

6
G044 MLK BDT1
G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

7
G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK
G047
8
to
G052
G053 UINT TMRON 9
G054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000
G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008

10
G056
G057
G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
G059
150
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G060
G061 RGTAP#D
G062
G063 PATH#D2
G064
G065
G066 EKSET EPCON ENBKY IGNVRY
G067
G068
G069
G070 MRDYA#DORCMA#D SFRA#D SRVA#D CTH1A#D CTH2A#D TLMHA#D TLMLA#D
G071 RCHA#D RSLA#D INTGA#D SOCNA#D MCFNA#D SPSLA#D *ESPA#D ARSTA#D
G072 RCHHGA#DMFNHGA#D INCMDA#D OVRIDA#D DEFMDA#D NRROA#D ROTAA#D INDXA#D
G073 MPOFA#D SLVA#D MORCMA#D
G074
to
G077
G078 SHA07#D SHA06#D SHA05#D SHA04#D SHA03#D SHA02#D SHA01#D SHA00#D
G079 SHA11#D SHA10#D SHA09#D SHA08#D
G080
to
G095
G096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0
G097
G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0
151
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G099
1
G100 +J8#H +J7#H +J6#H +J5#H +J4#H +J3#H +J2 +J1
G101
2
G102 –J8#H –J7#H –J6#H –J5#H –J4#H –J3#H –J2 –J1
G103
3
G104
G105
4
G106 MI8#H MI7#H MI6#H MI5#H MI4#H MI3#H MI2 MI1
G107
5
G108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1
G109
6
G110 +LM8#H +LM7#H +LM6#H +LM5#H +LM4#H +LM3#H +LM2 +LM1
G111
7
G112 –LM8#H –LM7#H –LM6#H –LM5#H –LM4#H –LM3#H –LM2 –LM1
G113
8
G114 *+L8#H *+L7#H *+L6#H *+L5#H *+L4#H *+L3#H *+L2 *+L1
G115
9
G116 *–L8#H *–L7#H *–L6#H *–L5#H *–L4#H *–L3#H *–L2 *–L1
G117
to 10
G123
G124 DTCH8#H DTCH7#H DTCH6#H DTCH5#H DTCH4#H DTCH3#H DTCH2 DTCH1
G125
G126 SVF8#H SVF7#H SVF6#H SVF5#H SVF4#H SVF3#H SVF2 SVF1
152
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G127
G128
G129
G130 *IT8#H *IT7#H *IT6#H *IT5#H *IT4#H *IT3#H *IT2 *IT1
G131
G132 +MIT8#H +MIT7#H +MIT6#H +MIT5#H +MIT4#H +MIT3#H +MIT2 +MIT1
G133
G134 –MIT8#H –MIT7#H –MIT6#H –MIT5#H –MIT4#H –MIT3#H –MIT2 –MIT1
G135
G136 EAX8#H EAX7#H EAX6#H EAX5#H EAX4#H EAX3#H EAX2 EAX1
G137
G138 SYNC8#H SYNC7#H SYNC6#H SYNC5#H SYNC4#H SYNC3#H SYNC2 SYNC1
G139
G140 SYNCJ8#H SYNCJ7#H SYNCJ6#H SYNCJ5#H SYNCJ4#H SYNCJ3#H SYNCJ2 SYNCJ1
G141
G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA ELCKZA EFINA
G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A
G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A
G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A
G146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E
153
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E
1
G152
G153
2
G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFBELCKZB EFINB
G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B

3
G156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B
G157 EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EIF9B EIF8B
4
G158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B
5
G162 6
to
G165
7
G166 EBUFC#H ECLRC#H ESTPC#H ESOFC#H ESBKC#H EMBUFC#H ELCKZC#H EFINC#H
G167 EMSBKC#H EC6C#H EC5C#H EC4C#H EC3C#H EC2C#H EC1C#H EC0C#H
8
G168 EIF7C#H EIF6C#H EIF5C#H EIF4C#H EIF3C#H EIF2C#H EIF1C#H EIF0C#H
G169 EIF15C#H EIF14C#H EIF13C#H EIF12C#H EIF11C#H EIF10C#H EIF9C#H EIF8C#H
9
G170 EID7C#H EID6C#H EID5C#H EID4C#H EID3C#H EID2C#H EID1C#H EID0C#H

10
154
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G174
to
G177
G178 EBUFD#H ECLRD#H ESTPD#H ESOFD#H ESBKD#H EMBUFD#H ELCKZD#H EFIND#H
G179 EMSBKD#H EC6D#H EC5D#H EC4D#H EC3D#H EC2D#H EC1D#H EC0D#H
G180 EIF7D#H EIF6D#H EIF5D#H EIF4D#H EIF3D#H EIF2D#H EIF1D#H EIF0D#H
G181 EIF15D#H EIF14D#H EIF13D#H EIF12D#H EIF11D#H EIF10D#H EIF9D#H EIF8D#H
G182 EID7D#H EID6D#H EID5D#H EID4D#H EID3D#H EID2D#H EID1D#H EID0D#H
G186
to
G191
G192 IGVRY8#H IGVRY7#H IGVRY6#H IGVRY5#H IGVRY4#H IGVRY3#H IGVRY2 IGVRY1
G193
to
G203
G204 LED08 LED07 LED06 LED05 LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01
G205 MOPEC LED09
G206 RTN18#H RTN17#H RTN16#H RTN15#H RTN14#H RTN13#H RTN12 RTN11
G209
G210 ZR8#H ZR7#H ZR6#H ZR5#H ZR4#H ZR3#H ZR2 ZR1
155
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G211 ZPEXT8#H ZPEXT7#H ZPEXT6#H ZPEXT5#H ZPEXT4#H ZPEXT3#H ZPEXT2#D1 ZPEXT1#D1
1
G212 ACT RTNT#D GST#D CTCHK#D SYCMD TPTONC
G213
2
G214 WFN4 WFN3 WFN2 WFN1
G215 KEXC#H KDEL#H KUP#H KG04#H KG01#H KG00#H KPAX#H KF#H
3
G216 TRQ8E#H TRQ7E#H TRQ6E#H TRQ5E#H TRQ4E#H TRQ3E#H TRQ2E TRQ1E
G217 TRQ17 TRQ16 TRQ15 TRQ14 TRQ13 TRQ12 TRQ11 TRQ10
4
G218 TRQ27 TRQ26 TRQ25 TRQ24 TRQ23 TRQ22 TRQ21 TRQ20
G219 TRQ37#H TRQ36#H TRQ35#H TRQ34#H TRQ33#H TRQ32#H TRQ31#H TRQ30#H
5

6
G224 TRQ87#H TRQ86#H TRQ85#H TRQ84#H TRQ83#H TRQ82#H TRQ81#H TRQ80#H 7
G225
G226 HCPL#H HMD#H

8
G227 HOVC8#H HOVC7#H HOVC6#H HOVC5#H HOVC4#H HOVC3#H HOVC2#H HOVC1#H
G228 HPST07#H HPST06#H HPST05#H HPST04#H HPST03#H HPST02#H HPST01#H HPST00#H

9
10
G232 HSBK8#H HSBK7#H HSBK6#H HSBK5#H HSBK4#H HSBK3#H HSBK2#H HSBK1#H
G233 HERS8#H HERS7#H HERS6#H HERS5#H HERS4#H HERS3#H HERS2#H HERS1#H
156
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G234
to
G237
G238 ELCAM4#H ELCAM3#H ELCAM2#H ELCAM1#H
G239 ECMCST#H ECMCHG#HECMEND#H ECMST#H
G240
to
G243
G244 MEAS7#H MEAS6#H MEAS5#H MEAS4#H MEAS3#H MEAS2#H MEAS1#H MEAS0#H
G245
to
G247
G248 EXIO2 EXIO1
G249 FLN07 FLN06 FLN05 FLN04 FLN03 FLN02 FLN01 FLN00
G250 FLN15 FLN14 FLN13 FLN12 FLN11 FLN10 FLN09 FLN08
G251 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG IOLNK
G252 EDG07 EDG06 EDG05 EDG04 EDG03 EDG02 EDG01 EDG00
G253 EDG15 EDG14 EDG13 EDG12 EDG11 EDG10 EDG09 EDG08
G254 EDN07 EDN06 EDN05 EDN04 EDN03 EDN02 EDN01 EDN00
G255 EDN15 EDN14 EDN13 EDN12 EDN11 EDN10 EDN09 EDN08
G256
to
G449
G450 +STEP8 +STEP7 +STEP6 +STEP5 +STEP4 +STEP3 +STEP2 +STEP1
G451 –STEP8 –STEP7 –STEP6 –STEP5 –STEP4 –STEP3 –STEP2 –STEP1
G452 CLTH8#H CLTH7#H CLTH6#H CLTH5#H CLTH4#H CLTH3#H CLTH2#H CLTH1#H
157
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G453
1
G454
G455 DVIEN8#H DVIEN7#H DVIEN6#H DVIEN5#H DVIEN4#H DVIEN3#H DVIEN2#H DVIEN1#H

2
G456 HSBKM8 HSBKM7 HSBKM6 HSBKM5 HSBKM4 HSBKM3 HSBKM2 HSBKM1
G457 HERSM8#H HERSM7#H HERSM6#H HERSM5#H HERSM4#H HERSM3#H HERSM2#H HERSM1#H
3
G458 HFIN8#H HFIN7#H HFIN6#H HFIN5#H HFIN4#H HFIN3#H HFIN2#H HFIN1#H
G459
to
4
G461
G462 +EDITH#H +EDITG#H +EDITF#H +EDITE#H +EDITD#H +EDITC#H +EDITB +EDITA 5

G463 –EDITH#H –EDITG#H –EDITF#H –EDITE#H –EDITD#H –EDITC#H –EDITB –EDITA
G464 EBUFE#H ECLRE#H ESTPE#H ESOFE#H ESBKE#H EMBUFE#H ELCKZE#H EFINE#H

6
G465 EMSBKE#H EC6E#H EC5E#H EC4E#H EC3E#H EC2E#H EC1E#H EC0E#H
G466 EIF7E#H EIF6E#H EIF5E#H EIF4E#H EIF3E#H EIF2E#H EIF1E#H EIF0E#H

7
G467 EIF15E#H EIF14E#H EIF13E#H EIF12E#H EIF11E#H EIF10E#H EIF9E#H EIF8E#H
G468 EID7E#H EID6E#H EID5E#H EID4E#H EID3E#H EID2E#H EID1E#H EID0E#H

8
9
G472
to 10
G475
G476 EBUFF#H ECLRF#H ESTPF#H ESOFF#H ESBKF#H EMBUFF#H ELCKZF#H EFINF#H
G477 EMSBKF#H EC6F#H EC5F#H EC4F#H EC3F#H EC2F#H EC1F#H EC0F#H
G478 EIF7F#H EIF6F#H EIF5F#H EIF4F#H EIF3F#H EIF2F#H EIF1F#H EIF0F#H
158
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G479 EIF15F#H EIF14F#H EIF13F#H EIF12F#H EIF11F#H EIF10F#H EIF9F#H EIF8F#H
G480 EID7F#H EID6F#H EID5F#H EID4F#H EID3F#H EID2F#H EID1F#H EID0F#H
G484
to
G487
G488 EBUFG#H ECLRG#H ESTPG#H ESOFG#H ESBKG#H EMBUFG#H ELCKZG#H EFING#H
G489 EMSBKG#H EC6G#H EC5G#H EC4G#H EC3G#H EC2G#H EC1G#H EC0G#H
G490 EIF7G#H EIF6G#H EIF5G#H EIF4G#H EIF3G#H EIF2G#H EIF1G#H EIF0G#H
G491 EIF15G#H EIF14G#H EIF13G#H EIF12G#H EIF11G#H EIF10G#H EIF9G#H EIF8G#H
G492 EID7G#H EID6G#H EID5G#H EID4G#H EID3G#H EID2G#H EID1G#H EID0G#H
G496
to
G499
G500 EBUFH#H ECLRH#H ESTPH#H ESOFH#H ESBKH#H EMBUFH#H ELCKZH#H EFINH#H
G501 EMSBKH#H EC6H#H EC5H#H EC4H#H EC3H#H EC2H#H EC1H#H EC0H#H
G502 EIF7H#H EIF6H#H EIF5H#H EIF4H#H EIF3H#H EIF2H#H EIF1H#H EIF0H#H
G503 EIF15H#H EIF14H#H EIF13H#H EIF12H#H EIF11H#H EIF10H#H EIF9H#H EIF8H#H
G504 EID7H#H EID6H#H EID5H#H EID4H#H EID3H#H EID2H#H EID1H#H EID0H#H
159
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1
G508
2
to
G511
10
160
CNC→PMC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
F001 MA TAP#D ENB#D DEN BAL RST AL
F002 CUT CSS#D
F003 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MRMT MMDI MJ MSTP
F004 MZRN
F005
F006
F007 TF SF#D MF
F008 MF5#H MF4#H MF3 MF2
F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30
F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
F014 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200
F015 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208
F016 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
F017 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
F018 M407#H M406#H M405#H M404#H M403#H M402#H M401#H M400#H
F022 S07#D S06#D S05#D S04#D S03#D S02#D S01#D S00#D
161
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1

2
F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00
F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08

3
F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16
F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

4
F030
to
F033 5
F034 GR3O#D GR2O#D GR1O#D
F035 6
F036 R08O#D R07O#D R06O#D R05O#D R04O#D R03O#D R02O#D R01O#D
F037 R12O#D R11O#D R10O#D R09O#D 7
F038
to
8
F044
F045 ORARA#D TLMA#D LDT2A#D LDT1A#D SARA#D SDTA#D SSTA#D ALMA#D
9
F046 MORA2A#D MORA1A#D PORA2A#D SLVSA#D RCFNA#D RCHPA#D CFINA#D CHPA#D
F047 INCSTA#D PC1DEA#D
10
F048
to
F052
F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY RPGDPL INHKY
F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000
162
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F060 ESEND EREND
F061
F062 PRTSF
F063
F064
F065 RGSPM#D RGSPP#D
F066 G08MD
F067
to
F069
F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01
F071 PSW10 PSW09
F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
F074
F075 *SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO
F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP#D MP2O MP1O
F077 RTO HS1DO#H HS1CO#H HS1BO HS1AO
F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O
163
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

1
F081 –J4O#H +J4O#H –J3O#H +J3O#H –J2O +J2O –J1O –J1O

2
F082
to
F089
3
F090 ABTSP1#D ABTQSV
F091
4
F092
F093 5
F094 ZP8#H ZP7#H ZP6#H ZP5#H ZP4#H ZP3#H ZP2 ZP1
F095 6
F097 7
F099 8
F100
F101
9
F102 MV8#H MV7#H MV6#H MV5#H MV4#H MV3#H MV2 MV1
F103
10
F104 INP8#H INP7#H INP6#H INP5#H INP4#H INP3#H INP2 INP1
F105
F106 MVD8#H MVD7#H MVD6#H MVD5#H MVD4#H MVD3#H MVD2 MVD1
F107
164
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F108 MMI8#H MMI7#H MMI6#H MMI5#H MMI4#H MMI3#H MMI2 MMI1
F109
F110 MDTCH8#H MDTCH7#H MDTCH6#H MDTCH5#H MDTCH4#H MDTCH3#H MDTCH2 MDTCH1
F111
to
F119
F120 ZRF8#H ZRF7#H ZRF6#H ZRF5#H ZRF4#H ZRF3#H ZRF2 ZRF1
F121
to
F128
F129 *EAXSL EOV0
F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
F131 EABUFA EMFA
F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A
F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB
F134 EABUFB EMFB
F135 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B
F136 EBSYC#H EOTNC#H EOTPC#H EGENC#H EDENC#H EIALC#H ECKZC#H EINPC#H
F137 EABUFC#H EMFC#H
F138 EM28C#H EM24C#H EM22C#H EM21C#H EM18C#H EM14C#H EM12C#H EM11C#H
F139 EBSYD#H EOTND#H EOTPD#H EGEND#H EDEND#H EIALD#H ECKZD#H EINPD#H
F140 EABUFD#H EMFD#H
F141 EM28D#H EM24D#H EM22D#H EM21D#H EM18D#H EM14D#H EM12D#H EM11D#H
F142 EM48A EM44A EM42A EM41A EM38A EM34A EM32A EM31A
F143
165
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F144
1
F145 EM48B EM44B EM42B EM41B EM38B EM34B EM32B EM31B
F146
2
F147
F148 EM48C#H EM44C#H EM42C#H EM41C#H EM38C#H EM34C#H EM32C#H EM31C#H
3
F149
F150
4
F151 EM48D#H EM44D#H EM42D#H EM41D#H EM38D#H EM34D#H EM32D#H EM31D#H
F152
to 5
F167
F168 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1

6
F169 SW16 SW15 M–OPE SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW09

7

8
9
F175 HOPEMG HOPENB HOPSTP SW61 SW60 SW59 SW58 SW57
F176
to 10
F179
F180 CLRCH8#H CLRCH7#H CLRCH6#H CLRCH5#H CLRCH4#H CLRCH3#H CLRCH2 CLRCH1
F181
F182 EACNT8#H EACNT7#H EACNT6#H EACNT5#H EACNT4#H EACNT3#H EACNT2 EACNT1
166
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F183
to
F189
F190 TRQM8#H TRQM7#H TRQM6#H TRQM5#H TRQM4#H TRQM3#H TRQM2 TRQM1
F191
to
F205
F206 AD05 AD04 AD03 AD02 AD01 AD00
F207 ADSGN AD12 AD11 AD10 AD09 AD08 AD07 AD06
F208 SYCMO HOPATH
F209 CTOPN#D RTPT#D WVRDY WAT4 WAT3 WAT2 WAT1
F210 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0
F211 KCAN KEOB KSLH KNO KPRD KMNS K9 K8
F212 KRED KWRT KINP KDLT KINS KAST
F213 KALM KPRM KVAR KPRG KPOS
F214 KH KQ KP KUP KDWN
F215 KK KJ KI KE KD KC KB KA
F216 KEXIT KAMP KZ KY KW KV KU KL
F217 KX KR KG KN KO
F218 KSHRP KT KS KM KF KDEV
F219
F220 SUP8#H SUP7#H SUP6#H SUP5#H SUP4#H SUP3#H SUP2 SUP1
F221 IPL8#H IPL7#H IPL6#H IPL5#H IPL4#H IPL3#H IPL2 IPL1
F222 SVER8#H SVER7#H SVER6#H SVER5#H SVER4#H SVER3#H SVER2 SVER1
F223 ECMCP4#H ECMCP3#H ECMCP2#H ECMCP1#H
167
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F224 ECMEXE#H
1
F225
to
2
F228 HCPLO#H HMDO#H
F229 HEX8#H HEX7#H HEX6#H HEX5#H HEX4#H HEX3#H HEX2#H HEX1#H
F230 HALM8#H HALM7#H HALM6#H HALM5#H HALM4#H HALM3#H HALM2#H HALM1#H

3
F231 HRDY8#H HRDY7#H HRDY6#H HRDY5#H HRDY4#H HRDY3#H HRDY2#H HRDY1#H
F232 4
to
F235
5
F236 APBL1 APBV1 APBZ1 APPS1 APPE1 APFE1 APOV1 APCM1
F237 APBL2 APBV2 APBZ2 APPS2 APPE2 APFE2 APOV2 APCM2

6
F238 APBL3#H APBV3#H APBZ3#H APPS3#H APPE3#H APFE3#H APOV3#H APCM3#H
7
8
9
F244
to
F247
10
F248 FANAL2 FANAL1 DVALM2 DVALM1 DVALM0
F249
F250 ALSV ALOH ALOT ALPS ALPS3 ALPS2 ALPS1
F251 ALPS4 ALSPD#D ALAPC
168
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F252
F253 KENB#H
F254 PATH0
F255
to
F479
F480 HEXM8#H HEXM7#H HEXM6#H HEXM5#H HEXM4#H HEXM3#H HEXM2#H HEXM1#H
F481 HALMM8#H HALMM7#H HALMM6#H HALMM5#H HALMM4#H HALMM3#H HALMM2#H HALMM1#H
F482 HRDYM8#H HRDYM7#H HRDYM6#H HRDYM5#H HRDYM4#H HRDYM3#H HRDYM2#H HRDYM1#H
F483
F484 HMF8#H HMF7#H HMF6#H HMF5#H HMF4#H HMF3#H HMF2#H HMF1#H
F485
to
F487
F488 EM48E#H EM44E#H EM42E#H EM41E#H EM38E#H EM34E#H EM32E#H EM31E#H
F489
F490
F491 EM48F#H EM44F#H EM42F#H EM41F#H EM38F#H EM34F#H EM32F#H EM31F#H
F492
F493
F494 EM48G#H EM44G#H EM42G#H EM41G#H EM38G#H EM34G#H EM32G#H EM31G#H
F495
F496
F497 EM48H#H EM44H#H EM42H#H EM41H#H EM38H#H EM34H#H EM32H#H EM31H#H
F498
169
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F499
1
F500 EBSYE#H EOTNE#H EOTPE#H EGENE#H EDENE#H EIALE#H ECKZE#H EINPE#H
F501 EABUFE#H EMFE#H

2
F502 EM28E#H EM24E#H EM22E#H EM21E#H EM18E#H EM14E#H EM12E#H EM11E#H
F503 EBSYF#H EOTNF#H EOTPF#H EGENF#H EDENF#H EIALF#H ECKZF#H EINPF#H
3
F504 EABUFF#H EMFF#H
F505 EM28F#H EM24F#H EM22F#H EM21F#H EM18F#H EM14F#H EM12F#H EM11F#H
4
F506 EBSYG#H EOTNG#H EOTPG#H EGENG#H EDENG#H EIALG#H ECKZG#H EINPG#H
F507 EABUFG#H EMFG#H
5
F508 EM28G#H EM24G#H EM22G#H EM21G#H EM18G#H EM14G#H EM12G#H EM11G#H
F509 EBSYH#H EOTNH#H EOTPH#H EGENH#H EDENH#H EIALH#H ECKZH#H EINPH#H
F510 EABUFH#H EMFH#H 6
F511 EM28H#H EM24H#H EM22H#H EM21H#H EM18H#H EM14H#H EM12H#H EM11H#H
10
170
7. HARDWARE
7.1 Total Configuration
Host computer
Heat ex- Relay connector
changer
I/O
device
CRT/MDI
unit
Manual pulse generator
Operator ’s
Control I/O moduler Machine
unit etc. operator’s
panel
I/O module Power Sensor/

I/O unit etc. magnetic actuator
circuit
24VDC
Power
supply
Servo Servo
amplifier motor
Multi–tap Spindle Spindle

trans- amplifier motor
former
Power supply
Distribu -
tion
board
171
7.2 Total Connection Diagram
Base PCB 1
I/O Link slave– J22
IN(JD1B ) FANUC I/O Link Upper step
I/O Link slave– J22
OUT(JD1A)
FANUC I/O Link Lower step
J30
24V–IN(CP1) 24VDC power
24V–OUT(CP2) I/O device, CRT/MDI, and etc.
J30 2
CRT/MDI, etc.
CPD1
DISPLAY(JD41) J142
JD13
J146
RS–232–C(JD42) RS–232–C I/O device
PC, etc. (RS–232–C)

3
J41
MPG(JA47) Manual pulse generator
J86
Built–in I/O(CB155)
J87
Built–in I/O(CB156)
J24 I/O card

J88 4
J89 Opera-
24VDC CP61
I/O Link(JD1A1) J90 tor’s
JD1B panel
J22 J91
JD1A
J22 Power
24VDC CPD1 Distributed mag-
I/O board,
netics
JD1B
JD1A
I/O Unit,
and etc. cabinet 5
10
172
7. HARDWARE
J40, J147 Position coder,

POSITION(JA46)
external pulse generator
J38
SPINDLE(JA11) Analog spindle control circuit
Breaker
200VAC
AC reactor
200VAC
CX1A TB2 CX3 MCC breaker
JA11 is not PSM
J39 CX4
used for CX1B TB1 CX2B JX1B
Power Mate i–H Position coder
CX2A JX1A
JA7B TB1 JY2
SPM TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B
Servo card To 2nd spindle Spindle motor

TB2 CX2A JX1A
FSSB 1st axis
COP10B TB2
(COP10A) SVM JF1 servo motor
COP10A
CX2B JX1B
2nd axis
COP10B servo motor
SVM
COP10A
COP10B
3rd axis
COP10A SVM servo motor
COP10B
4th axis
COP10A
SVM servo motor
Up to 2 axes for Power Mate i–D

Up to 8 axes for Power Mate i–H
Separate detector interface unit 1
24VDC CP11A JF101 Linear scale 1st axis
JF102 Linear scale 2nd axis
COP10B JF103 Linear scale 3rd axis
COP10A JF104 Linear scale 4th axis
CNF1 JA4A Absolute scale battery
(Required only when the absolute
Separate detector interface unit 2 scale is used.)
CNF2 JF105 Linear scale 5th axis
JF106 Linear scale 6th axis
SV–CHK(CA54) Servo check
173
I/O Link–II board
From the I/O Link–II upper step
JEMA(TB1)
To the I/O Link–II lower step
1
HSSB board
HSSB(COP7) PC
Ethernet board
Ethernet(CD38) Hub
2
Profibus–DP
slave board From the Profibus–DP upper step
Profibus–DP(CN2)
To the Profibus–DP lower step
Profibus–DP
master board
Profibus–DP(CN2) To unit below the Profibus–DP 3
DeviceNet
slave board
From the DeviceNet upper step
DeviceNet(TBL)
To the DeviceNet lower step
DeviceNet
master board
DeviceNet(TBL) DeviceNet slave
4
FL–net board
(CA38N) FL–net
NOTE The I/O Link–II board, HSSB board, Ethernet board, Profibus–DP 5
slave board, Profibus–DP master board, DeviceNet master board,
DeviceNet slave board, and FL–net board are inserted into option
slots.
6
10
174
7. HARDWARE
7.3 Connector Layout

Front Bottom face
Battery
Display (CRT link) To back step of I/O Link
(slave)
Manual pulse generator
analog input
Memory card I/O Link (master)
Spindle To front step of I/O Link

(slave)
Position coder external
pulse input
Fuse diagnose display LED

Left CP2 24VDC output
Right CP1 24VDC input
Left CB156 Built in I/O

Right CB155 Built in I/O
LED display
To FSSB servo amplifier
Rotary switch
Push switch
Servo check
FG Frame ground
terminal
7.4 Configuration of the Control Unit

Panel unit
Control unit
Back panel
Option slot 2
Option slot 1
Front view Side view Back view
175
7.5 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board and
LED Display
1
7.5.1 Base printed circuit board
D Specification
Name Specification 2
Base printed circuit board A16B–3200–0260
D Connector and LED locations
CNM1B: Memory card BAT1: Battery

3
JD41: Display
CPU:
CPU card JA47: MPG, analog input
JD42: RS–232–C
JD1A1: I/O Link (master)
JA11: Spindle
4
JA46: Position coder
JD40: RS–422
LEDM2: Blown fuse
POS AI: indicator LED
Option card CP1 (lower): 24 VDC input
CP2 (upper): 24 VDC output
5
FUS1
Huse
CB155 (lower): Built–in I/O

CB156 (upper): Built–in I/O
Short pin
VBT1 6
SERVO: LEDM1: LED display
Axis control
card
MTSW: Rotary switch
DMM1:
Memory
module
PSW: Pushbutton switch 7
JNA:
CA54:
Backpanel
Servo check
FG terminal: Frame ground
JD1B:
From the I/O Link
JD1A:
To the I/O Link 8
(slave) at the (slave) at the
preceding stage following stage
10
176
7. HARDWARE
7.5.2 Card PCB

D Mounting location
(1)
CPU
card
(3)
Option
card
(2)
Axis control card
D Specification
No. Name Specification Function D H Remarks
(1) CPU card A A20B–3300–0071 CNC control f f 486DX2
CPU card B A20B–3300–0051 f Pentium
CPU card C A20B–3300–0171 f f MMX–
Pentium
A20B–3300–0261
(2) Axis control A20B–3300–0031, Axis control f f 2 axes
card A20B–3300–0033
A20B–3300–0121 f f 2 axes/
high–speed
A20B–3300–0030, f 4 axes
A20B–3300–0032
A20B–3300–0120 f 4 axes/
high–speed
A17B–3300–0101, f 6 axes
A17B–3300–0103
A17B–3300–0201 f 6 axes/
high–speed
A17B–3300–0100, f 8 axes
A17B–3300–0102
A17B–3300–0200 f 8 axes/
high–speed
(3) Option card 1 A20B–3300–0131 Analog f f Option
spindle
External
pulse input
Option card 2 A20B–3300–0130 Analog in- f f
put
Analog
spindle
External
pulse input
177
7.5.3 Memory module
D Mounting location
1
(1)
4
Memory
module
D Specification
No. Name Specification Function D H
6
(1) 4M/256K A20B–3900–0080 FROM 4MB f f
Memory module SRAM 256KB
6M/1M A20B–3900–0120 FROM 6MB f
Memory module SRAM 1MB
8M/1M A20B–3900–0141 FROM 8MB f f 7
12M/1M A20B–3900–0140 FROM 12MB f f
10
178
7. HARDWARE
7.5.4 DIMM module

D Mounting location
(2)
DRAM module
Connector
DIMM module socket
CPU card
Side–B
D Specification
No. Name Specification Function Remarks
(2) 12M DRAM A20B–3900–0040 DRAM 12MB For CPU card A, B
module
A20B–3900–0130 SDRAM 12MB For CPU card C
8M DRAM A20B–3900–0041 DRAM 8MB For CPU card A, B
module
4M DRAM A20B–3900–0042 DRAM 4MB For CPU card A, B
module
179
7.5.5 FANUC I/O link–II board
D Specification
1
Name Printed–circuit board specification
FANUC I/O Link–II board A20B–8100–0310
D Connector and LED locations 2

LED A
LED 2 ROM for

communication
control
3
Connector
Connector for
terminal
backpanel
board for
connection,
I/O Link–II,
JNA
TBA
4
Name Color Meaning Required action
LED A Red A RAM parity alarm Replace the printed–circuit board
occured. though the alarm can sometimes
be released by turning the power
off then on.
5
LED 2 Green Lights when commu- If this LED is kept off:
nication is performed
1) Check the I/O Link–II cable.
normally.
Does not light before 2) Check the connector terminal
communication be- board TBA. 6
gins and after a
3) Check the master unit status.
communication
alarm condition has 4) Replace the printed–circuit
occurred. board.
10
180
7. HARDWARE
7.5.6 High–speed serial bus (HSSB) board

D Specification
Printed–circuit board
Name
specification
High–speed serial bus (HSSB) board A20B–8001–0730

LED B
LED A
LED 4
LED 3
LED 2
LED 1
High–speed
serial bus set-
ting switch,
SW1
At maintenance: 0
Usually: 1
Connector for
connection with
the backpanel,
High–speed JNA
serial bus (HSSB)
connector , COP7

LED B Red HSSB–based com- – Check the HSSB cable.
munication has
– Check the PC or intelligent termi-
been interrupted.
nal status.
– Replace the printed–circuit board.
LED A Red A RAM parity alarm If this LED is on, replace the printed–
occurred in the circuit board though the alarm can
common RAM. sometimes be released by turning
the power off then on.
Green LED status display J : on and j : off

4 3 2 1 Status
JJJJ The power has just been switched on.
JJJj The HSSB board is being initialized.
JJjJ The HSSB is waiting for the PC to complete booting.
JJjj The CNC screen is displayed on the PC.
Jjjj Start–up has been completed normally, and the regular operation
is under way.
jJJj A thermal error has been detected at the intelligent terminal.
jJjJ HSSB–based communication has been interrupted.
jJjj A RAM parity alarm condition has occurred in the common RAM.
jjJJ A communication error has occurred.
jjJj A battery alarm condition has occurred at the intelligent terminal.
181
7.5.7 Profibus–DP slave board
D Specification
1
Name Specification
Profibus–DP slave board A20B–8100–0440

LED B
LED 3
LED 2
LED 1
3
Connector for
connection with
the backpanel,
Profibus interface JNA
connector CN2
4
LED1 Green The firmware on the com- If LED1 is kept off:
munication board has
1) Check the connection of
started running after the re-
the board to the back- 5
set of the CPU on the
panel.
board.
2) Replace the printed–cir-
cuit board.
LED2 Green Profibus communication If LED1 is on, and LED2 re-
has started. mains off: 6
This LED is turned on in
1) Check the communica-
the following cases:
tion parameters.
D Parameters and con-
2) Check the settings on
figuration data have
the communication mas-
not been received.
ter side. 7
D An illegal parameter or
configuration data has
been received.
LED3 Green Indicates whether Profibus If LED1 and LED2 are on,
communication is being and LED3 remains off: 8
performed normally.
1) Check the connection of
the cable.
2) Check the communica-
tion master status.
3) Check for noise on the
9
communication line.
LEDB Red A RAM parity alarm has Replace the printed–circuit

been issued on this board. board though this alarm can
sometimes be released by
turning the power off then on. 10
182
7. HARDWARE
7.5.8 Ethernet board

D Specification
Name Specification
Ethernet board A20B–8100–0450

Setting pin TM1
PAR LED B
COL LED A
LED 4
STA– LED 3
TUS LED 2 Red
LED 1
Green
TX LED 5 Red
RX LED 6
Connector for
connection with
Ethernet
the backpanel,
connector
JNA
CD38L
NOTE Never change the setting of the setting pin TM1.
D Status indication
In the following explanation, the LED status is indicated as shown below:
j : Off J : On l : Blinking z : To be ignored
At power–up
NO. LED 4321 Description
1 STATUS jjjj Power off
2 STATUS JJJJ Initial status immediately after power–up
3 STATUS JJJj MPU initialization completed
4 STATUS JJjj Firmware downloading completed
5 STATUS Jjjj Control passed to the OS
6 STATUS jJJJ OS PHASE 1
7 STATUS jJJj OS PHASE 2
8 STATUS jJjJ OS PHASE 3
9 STATUS jJjj OS PHASE 4
10 STATUS jjjl Activation completed/Normal status
183
When an error occurs
The STATUS LED indication status alternates the long and short patterns.
The long pattern appears for a long period of time, and the short pattern 1
appears for a short period.
LONG SHORT
NO. Description
4321 4321
1 Jjjj jjjJ Reset exception 2

2 Jjjj jjJj General machine check exception
3 Jjjj jjJJ Data Storage

3
4 Jjjj jJjj Instruction Storage
5 Jjjj jJJj Alignment
6 Jjjj jJJJ Program

4
7 JjjJ jjjj Floating Point Unavailable
8 JjjJ jjjJ Decrementer
9 JjjJ jJjJ Trace 5

10 JjjJ jJJj Floating Point Assist
11
JjJj jjjj Implementation Dependent Software
Emulation
6
12
JjJj jjjJ Implementation Dependent Instruction TLB
Miss
13 JjJj jjJj Implementation Dependent Data TLB Miss
JjJj jjJJ Implementation Dependent Instruction TLB 7

14
Error
15 JjJj jJjj Implementation Dependent Data TLB Error
16
JjJJ jJjj Implementation Dependent Data Break-
8
point
17
JjJJ jJjJ Implementation Dependent Instruction
Breakpoint
18
JjJJ jJJj Implementation Dependent Peripheral
9
Breakpoint
19
JjJJ jJJJ Implementation Dependent Non Maskable
Development
20 JJjj jjjJ DRAM Parity Alarm 10

21 JJjj jjJj Other NMI
22 JJJj jjjJ Invalid interrupt
184
7. HARDWARE
D Alarm indication
LED name Meaning Required action
LEDB (PAR) A system alarm condition has oc- Replace the board.
curred on this board.
D Communication status indication
LED name Communication status
LED 5(TX) Turned on when data is received.
LED 6(RX) Turned on when data is sent.
LED A(COL) Turned on when a data collision has occurred.
185
7.5.9 DeviceNet board
D Specification
1
Name Specification
DeviceNet board A20B–8100–0490, –0491

LED A
LED 3
LED 2
LED 1
LED MNS
3
Connector for
LED HEALTH connection with
the backpanel,
JNA
CO line
connector TBL
Internal daughter board Setting pin TM1 4

LED1 to 3 Green These LEDs indicate whether the DeviceNet board is the
master board or slave mode. At power–up, these LEDs 5
are off.
LED1 LED2 LED3
Master board On Off Off
Slave board On On Off
LEDA Red An abnormality occurred in the in- If this LED goes on,
6
ternal daughter board. replace the Device-
Net board.
MNS Red/ This LED is the DeviceNet mod- See the specifica-
green ule/network status LED. It indi- tions published by
cates whether the power is sup- ODVA. 7
plied and whether communication
is performed normally.
HEALTH Red/ This LED indicates the daughter If the LED does not
green board status. When the power light in green, re-
has been turned on, this LED place the DeviceNet 8
lights in red. When firmware has board.
been loaded, the LED lights in
green.
D Setting pin TM1 9

This board has a setting pin block TM1 with three pins. The TM1
indicates whether the board is used for the DeviceNet slave function or
master function.
10
MASTER SLAVE
186
7. HARDWARE
7.6 Fan Unit

D Method for dismounting the fan unit
(1) Push up the latch from the upper section of the unit to dismount it.
Push up the latch.
Latched state Unlatched state
CAUTION Do not lift up the entire latch. Just unlatch. If you push up the
latch forcibly, it may be broken.
(2) Put your finger on the lower section of the front surface of the fan
unit, and lift it up.
Lift up the fan unit.
(3) Lift up the fan unit until it is tilted to about 30 degrees.

(4) Dismount the fan unit by pulling it upward and toward you.
(3) Lift this portion of the (4) Dismount the fan unit
fan unit to tilt it to by pulling it upward
about 30 degrees. and toward you.
D Method for mounting the fan unit

(1) Tilt the fan unit to about 30 degrees, and push it in all the way until
it hits the far wall of the main unit.
(2) Lower and place the fan unit gently on the main unit.
(3) Push the fan unit at the upper section of its front side (side facing
you) to cause it to snap in the upper section of the main unit.
(1) Tilt the fan unit (2) Lower the fan (3) Snap in the fan unit
to about 30 unit. by pushing it down.
degrees and
insert it.
CAUTION The fan unit and the main unit are coupled directly using a con-
nector. If they are not coupled correctly, the coupling portions
of the connectors may be damaged.
187
(4) Push down the latch on the upper section of the fan unit to latch it.
Push down the latch.
1
Unlatched state Latched state

2
(5) Switch on the power, and make sure that no fan alarm condition
does not occur and that both fans are rotating.
NOTE1 If the fan unit has not been coupled with the main unit correctly, the
fans on the fan unit may fail to run even when the power is switched
3
on, or a fan alarm may be issued even when the fans are rotating.
NOTE2 If a force stronger than usual is needed to couple the fan unit with
the main unit, check that the pins of the connector on the base
printed–circuit board are straight. Also check that the base 4
printed–circuit board has been inserted securely all the way
through.
D Method for replacing fans 5

(1) Dismount the fan unit, then unlatch the fan.
Latch
Fan connection 6
printed–circuit
board
Latch 7
FAN1 FAN2
(2) Dismount the fan (FAN2) at the right side (in the above figure) first,
then the one (FAN1) at the left side.
(3) Detach the fan connectors from the fan connector printed–circuit 8
board.
(4) Attach the cable connector of a replacement fan to the left–side
connector (CA39A) on the fan connection printed–circuit board
first, and place the fan at a location labeled FAN1 with the cable held
to the right, then latch it. Be sure to lay the fan cable under FAN2. 9
10
FAN1
CA39A
188
7. HARDWARE
(5) Attach the cable connector of another replacement fan to the

right–side connector (CA39B) on the fan connection printed–circuit
board first, and place the fan at a location labeled FAN2 with the
cable held to the right, then latch it.
FAN2
CA39B
(6) Attach the fan unit to the main unit.
189
7.7 Methods for Dismounting and Mounting
Printed–Circuit Boards
1
WARNING Do not dismount or mount printed–circuit boards unless you
have received maintenance and safety training.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a printed–circuit board,
be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and 2
fitted with an insulating cover). Touching directly the high–volt-
age circuits gives you a shock hazard.
CAUTION When replacing a printed–circuit board, note the following:

3
CAUTION1 When dismounting the printed–circuit board, be careful not to
touch semiconductor devices on the board by hand or not to al-
low these devices to touch other parts.
CAUTION2 Check that the settings for the new printed–circuit board are cor-
rect. 4
CAUTION3 After replacement, make adjustments, if necessary, for the
printed–circuit board correctly.
CAUTION4 Cables removed during replacement must be connected as
they were connected previously. If there is a possibility that the 5
connection points of cables will be confusing, note down the
connection points before removing the cables.
CAUTION5 Before replacing the printed–circuit board, turn off the power to
the control unit.
6
10
190
7. HARDWARE
7.7.1 Methods for dismounting and mounting the base printed–

circuit board
CAUTION1 The fan unit must be removed before the base printed–circuit
board can be dismounted. If you attempt to dismount the base
printed–circuit board without removing the fan unit, both the fan
unit and base printed–circuit board may be damaged.
CAUTION2 If there is an I/O Link cable under the unit, an attempt to dis-
mount the base printed–circuit board without removing the
cable may damage the plastic case.
CAUTION3 When the base printed–circuit board is dismounted, the content
of the Power Mate SRAM memory may be lost while it is kept
dismounted. Before dismounting the base printed–circuit
board, be sure to save the content of the SRAM memory to the
built–in FROM.
CAUTION4 When dismounting and mounting the base printed–circuit board
with the battery connected, be careful not cause it to touch other
metal portions, because the battery voltage is being applied to
the printed–circuit board.
D Dismounting procedure
1) Detach all cables other than the battery cables. If there is a cable
in the lower section of the unit (on the base PCB and option board),
do not forget to detach it also. (Check that a detached connector
is labeled its connector number.)
2) Dismount the fan unit.
3) Hold the base printed–circuit board by grabbing two handles.
4) Pull out the base printed–circuit board by pushing it at lower handle.
NOTE1 The battery is attached to the face plate of the base printed–circuit
board. It is pulled out together with the base printed–circuit board.
NOTE2 The base printed–circuit board can be dismounted without remov-
ing option boards; cables attached to the option boards must be
dismounted, however.
D Mounting procedure
1) Hold the base printed–circuit board by grabbing two handles, and
insert it into the rack all the way through, then engage it with the
backpanel connector.
2) Place the fan unit back into the previous location.
3) Attach the cables detached before, correctly.
4) Switch on the power, and make sure that the printed–circuit board
operates normally.
191
D Replacement procedure
CAUTION1 Before replacing the base printed–circuit board, remove the
card PCBs and DIMM modules on the base printed–circuit 1
board, and mount them on a new base printed–circuit board. As
the memory module is removed, the SRAM memory contents
are erased. Therefore, before starting the replacement, check
that a backup copy of the latest SRAM data is saved in a 2
memory card or Handy File. Also, it is recommended that the
data in the SRAM be backed up into the built–in FROM of the
Power Mate.
CAUTION2 Observe the CAUTIONS on the methods for dismounting and
3
mounting the base printed–circuit board, methods for mounting
and dismounting card PCBs, and methods for mounting and dis-
mounting DIMM modules.
(1) Remove the lithium battery.
(2) Dismount the base printed–circuit board. 4
(3) Remove the CPU card, axis control card, option card, and memory
card by following the method for mounting and demounting card
PCBs in Subsections 7.7.2 and 7.7.3.
(4) Mount the CPU card, axis control card, option card, and memory 5
card on the new base printed–circuit board by following the method
for mounting and demounting card PCBs.
(5) Mount the base printed–circuit board.
(6) Mount the lithium battery.
(7) Restore the SRAM memory data. 6
10
192
7. HARDWARE
7.7.2 Mounting and demounting card PCBs

CAUTION1 The base printed–circuit board must be removed before the
PCB card can be dismounted and mounted. Observe the CAU-
TIONS in Subsection 7.7.1.
CAUTION2 Be careful not install the PCB card in an incorrect location.
Otherwise, the printed–circuit board may be damaged.
CAUTION3 The boot software is stored in the FROM on the CPU card.
When replacing the CPU card, make sure that the function
stored on the replacement CPU card is of the same version as
before or of a later version. Otherwise, it may be inoperable.
(The version of the system software has nothing to do with the
general version of the printed–circuit board.)
CAUTION4 The installed boot software varies depending on the type of the
CPU card. When replacing the CPU card, make sure that the
replacement CPU card is also a Power Mate i CPU card. Note
that the 16i/18i/21i CPU card cannot be used in place of the
Power Mate i CPU card.
D Demounting a card PCB

1) Dismount the base printed–circuit board by following the
dismounting procedure described in Subsection 7.7.1.
2) Pull outward the claw of each of the four spacers used to secure
the card PCB, then release each latch.
3) Extract the card PCB upward.
D Mounting a card PCB

1) Check that the claw of each of the four spacers is latched outward,
then insert the card PCB into the connector.
2) Push the claw of each spacer downward to secure the card PCB.
3) Mount the base printed–circuit board by following the mounting
procedure described in Subsection 7.7.1.
193
7.7.3 Mounting and demounting DIMM modules
CAUTION1 To remove the axis control card and CPU card, it is necessary
1
to remove the base printed–circuit board in advance. Carefully
observe the CAUTION described in Subsection7.7.1.
CAUTION2 The memory module contains a battery–backed SRAM. An at-
tempt to dismount and mount the memory module causes the
content of the SRAM to be lost. Do not forget to make a back–up 2
copy of the latest SRAM data into a memory card or Handy File
before dismounting the memory module. It is recommended
that the SRAM data also be backed up into the built–in FROM
of the Power Mate. 3
CAUTION3 Replacing the memory module with the battery voltage applied
to it may damage the memory module and battery. If you want
to dismount and mount the memory module, be sure to remove
the battery before attempting to dismount the base printed–cir-
4
cuit board.
CAUTION4 The FROM on the memory module contains many types of sys-
tem software. When replacing the memory module, make sure
that the functions stored in the FROM are of the same version
as before the replacement or of a later version. Otherwise, 5
some of the functions may become unavailable.
CAUTION5 Be careful not to touch the pins of the DIMM module.
D Demounting a DIMM module 6

1) Open the claw of the socket outward.
2) Extract the module slantly upward.
D Mounting a DIMM module

7
1) Insert the module slantly into the module socket, with side B facing
upward.
2) Push the module downward until it is locked.
10
194
7. HARDWARE
7.7.4 Methods for dismounting and mounting the option board

D Dismounting procedure
1) To pull out the option board, first detach any interfering cable.
(Make sure that the detached cable is labeled the number of the
mating connector.)
2) Hold the option board by grabbing two handles.
3) While pushing the latch of upper handle to the right, pull out the
option board.
NOTE The option board can be dismounted without removing the base
printed–circuit board. (It is necessary to detach any interfering
cable, however.)
Only one exception is the DeviceNet board. See Maintenance
Manual (B–63175EN)
D Mounting procedure
1) Hold the option board by grabbing two handles, then insert the
option board into the rack all the way through until it snaps in the
corresponding connector on the backpanel.
2) Attach any cable detached before, correctly.
3) Switch on the power, and make sure that the option board operates
normally.
195
7.8 Battery Replacement
WARNING Using other than the recommended battery may result in the 1
battery exploding.
Replace the battery only with the specified battery.
7.8.1 Battery for memory backup (3 VDC)
Data should be saved to the flash memory card or floppy disk beforehand. 2
When replacing the memory backup battery, do so while the control unit is
turned off.
D Replacing the lithium battery

(1) Prepare a new lithium battery. 3
(2) Turn the machine (Power Mate i) on for about 30 seconds.
(3) Turn the machine (Power Mate i) off.
(4) Remove the old battery from the top of the Power Mate i control
unit.
First unlatch the battery, remove it from the holder, and detach its
4
connector. The battery holder is on top of the face plate (or the
memory connector) on the base printed–circuit board.
(5) Remove the old battery, insert a new one into the battery holder,
and attach the connector. Confirm that the battery is latched firmly.
5
CAUTION1 Before replacing the battery, check that a backup copy of the lat-
est SRAM memory data has been made.
CAUTION2 When replacing the battery, the power to the machine must be
off. When the power to the machine is left on, only those who
have been educated in maintenance and safety can replace 6
battery.
CAUTION3 Complete the battery replacement steps (3) to (5) within 30 min-
utes. If the battery is left disconnected for a long time, the con-
tents of the SRAM memory will be lost. 7
CAUTION4 It is recommended that the SRAM memory contents be backed
up to the built–in FROM of the Power Mate i immediately before
the battery replacement. Then, data can be easily restored in
case the memory contents are lost.
8
D Replacing the alkaline dry cells (size D)
(1) Prepare two new alkaline dry cells (size D).
(2) Turn the machine (Power Mate i) on.
9
(3) Remove the battery case cover.
(4) Replace the batteries, paying careful attention to their orientation.
(5) Replace the battery case cover.
CAUTION When replacing the dry cells while the power is off, use the same
procedure as that for lithium battery replacement procedure, de-
10
scribed above.
196
7. HARDWARE
7.8.2 Replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder (servo am-

plifier α series)
WARNING Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power
to the machine (servo amplifier) switched on, and hold the ma-
chine at an emergency stop. Because this work must be carried
out while the power is kept switched on and the cabinet is open,
only the personnel who have been trained for safety are allowed
to engage in the work. When replacing the batteries, be careful
not to touch the high–voltage circuit section (marked and
shielded with a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will get an
electric shock.
Prepare lithium battery in advance.
(1) Turn machine (servo amplifier) power ON.
(2) Remove the battery case on the front panel of α series Servo Amp
Module (SVM).
The battery case can be removed by holding the top of the case and
pulling the case towards you.
(3) Remove the connector the battery.
(4) Replace the battery, and connect the connector.
(5) Attach the battery case.
(6) Turn machine (servo amplifier) power OFF.
CAUTION Replace the batteries for absolute pulse coder when servo am-
plifier power is ON.
Replacing the batteries with power OFF causes the absolute
position stored in memory to be lost.
197
7.8.3 Replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder (β series
servo amplifier)
1
WARNING Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power
to the machine (servo amplifier) switched on, and hold the ma-
chine at an emergency stop. Because this work must be carried
out while the power is kept switched on and the cabinet is open,
2
only the personnel who have been trained for safety are allowed
to engage in the work. When replacing the batteries, be careful
not to touch the high–voltage circuit section (marked and
shielded with a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the 3
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will get an
electric shock.
Prepare lithium battery in advance.
(1) Turn machine (servo amplifier) power ON. 4
(2) Remove the battery case from under the β series servo amplifier
module by holding the case at both sides and pulling downwards.
(3) Remove the connector the battery.
(4) Replace the battery, and connect the connector.
5
(5) Attach the battery case.
(6) Turn machine (servo amplifier) power OFF.
CAUTION Replace the batteries for absolute pulse coder when servo am-
plifier power is ON.
6
10
198
7. HARDWARE
7.8.4 Replacing batteries in the separate battery case

Prepare 4 alkaline batteries (UM–1type) commercially available in advance.
(1) Turn machine (servo amplifier, separate type detector interface unit,
and analog servo interface unit) power ON.
(2) Loosen screws on the battery case to remove the cover. For placement
of the battery case, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual.
(3) Replace the batteries in the case. Insert 2 batteries each in the opposite
direction as illustrated below.
Screw
Ç
Ç Ç Cover
(4) After replacement, install the cover.

(5) Turn machine power OFF.
CAUTION Replace the batteries when the power to the servo amplifier,
separate detector interface unit, and analog servo interface unit
is ON.
199
7.9 Setting/Display/Maintenance using the Main
Unit of The Power Mate i
1
7.9.1 Status indication with no alarm generated
No–alarm condition
LED indication
(after startup) 2
Automatic operation halted,
stopped, or reset
Automatic operation in prog-

ress
3
10
200
7. HARDWARE
7.9.2 Indication in alarm condition

The 7–segment LED blinks, indicating the number of an alarm type.
LED indication
Meaning of alarm
(blinking)
P/S alarm 100
P/S alarm 000
P/S alarm 101
P/S alarm other than 0, 1, and 2 above (0 to 299)

Alarm from the PMC (1000 to 1999, 3000 to 3200)
Overtravel alarm (500 to 599)
Overheat alarm (700 to 701)
Servo alarm (400 to 499)
Pulse coder alarm (300 to 399)
Spindle alarm (749 to 754)
P/S alarm 5000 and up
Rigid tapping alarm (740 to 742)
NOTE When more than one alarm is generated, all their corresponding
numbers blink alternatively.
201
7.9.3 Number displayed when a system alarm is issued
When a system alarm is issued, the 7–segment LED blinks, and the
number of the corresponding alarm type is displayed with a decimal 1
point.
LED number
System alarm type
(blinking)
2
ROM PARITY
(System alarms in the 900s)
SRAM PARITY, DRAM PARITY

(System alarms in the 910s) 3
SERVO ALARM
CPU INTERRUPT, 4
SRAM ECC ERROR
PMC SYSTEM ALARM

5
NON MASK INTERRUPT
Other systems alarms

6
The boot series is for other than the Power Mate.
7
FAN OVERHEAT ALARM
NOTE The decimal point indicated in the lower right part of the LED distin-
guishes system alarms from other ordinary alarms. 8
10
202
7. HARDWARE
7.9.4 7–segment LED indication status change at power–up
Number on LED Meaning

(stays on)
Power is not on.
The CPU does not operate after power–up.
Start of boot system operation
Start of system operation
Wait for processor ID setting in the system
Completion of processor ID setting in the system
Completion of FANUC bus initialization
Completion of PMC initialization
Completion of hardware configuration information

setting for each module in the system
Completion of PMC ladder initialization
Wait for digital servo initialization
Completion of digital servo initialization
Normal operation status after completion of initializa-

tion
203
7.9.5 Operation at power–up
Follow the procedure explained below to perform setting and maintenance
operation by using the rotary switch (MTSW), pushbutton switch (PSW), and
1
7–segment LED (LEDM1) on the Power Mate i.
(1) Primary selection (selection by the rotary switch)
Before turning on the power, set a desired number with the rotary
switch. (The rotary switch must be set before the power is turned on.)
When the power has been turned on, the selected rotary switch number 2
blinks on the 7–segment LED if the rotary switch number is set to a
non–zero number. When the pushbutton switch is pressed while the
LED indication is blinking, blinking stops, then the secondary selection
explained below starts.
(2) Secondary selection (selection by the 7–segment LED and pushbutton 3
switch)
After the primary selection operation is completed, numbers that can be
selected for the secondary selection appear on the 7–segment LED in
succession. While a desired number appears (for about one second),
press the pushbutton switch. Then, the number blinks (at high speed). 4
If the selected number is correct, press the pushbutton switch again.
Then, blinking stops, and the secondary selection is completed. If the
selected number is wrong, or if you want to cancel the number selection,
hold down the pushbutton switch for at least three seconds while the
number blinks (at high speed). Then, the selection operation is
canceled, and numbers are again displayed on the 7–segment LED one 5
by one.
(3) Tertiary selection (selection by the 7–segment LED and pushbutton
switch) and subsequent operations
When the tertiary selection is required, selectable numbers appear on
the 7–segment LED sequentially after the completion of the secondary 6
selection operation. Select a desired number using the 7–segment LED
and pushbutton switch in the same manner as the secondary selection.
The subsequent operations are the same as explained in (2) above.
To perform the primary selection for another setting item after completing a
selection operation, turn off the power, then perform steps (1) to (3) above. 7
After completing all the primary selection operations, be sure to set the rotary
switch to 0.
NOTE Although the rotary switch number setting is possible when the
Power Mate is on, the primary selection is made at power–up.
8
10
204
7. HARDWARE
Ter t i ar y Explanation
and sub-
Primary Secondary
seq u en t
operation
Normal condition
When completing setting and maintenance operation, be sure to
set the rotary switch to this position.
Setting for connection to a setting/display unit other than the CRT/

MDI
Cancels settings. (All the numbers selected as

explained below are canceled.) Default
Switching between HSSB synchronization/non–

synchronization
The Power Mate starts asynchronously regardless
of the PC status even when the HSSB board is
connected.
Connection to the handy operator’s panel

To connect the handy operator’s panel, set this
number. Then, the CRT/MDI can no longer be
connected.
Use of the DPL/MDI operation package (for boot

operation) on RS–232C channel 2
D Set this number only when the system cannot
start normally, and boot operation or memory
clear operation must be performed using the
DPL/MDI operation package.
D This setting is maintained even after the power
is turned off. When this setting needs to be
cleared, clear the setting by following the pro-
cedure explained in Subsection 7.9.6 after
system starts.
Reserved
205
and sub-
Primary Secondary 1
seq u en t
operation
Setting a device number for the CRT sharing function
D One to 16 Power Mate units can be connected to one CRT.
For each Power Mate, a device number is set. Selecting multi-
ple items is not permitted. 2
Sets the device number of this Power Mate i to #0
in the CRT sharing function. (Default)

in the CRT sharing function.
3

4

5
Sets the device number of this Power Mate i to #6 6


7

in the CRT sharing function. 8
Sets the device number of this Power Mate i to
#10 in the CRT sharing function.
Sets the device number of this Power Mate i to 9


10


206
7. HARDWARE
and sub-
Primary Secondary
seq u en t
operation
Confirmation of setting
Displaying selected data

D The item selected when 1 or 2 is selected as
the primary selection with the rotary switch is
displayed on the 7–segment LED.
Returns to the secondary selec-

tion.
Displays the number selected as

the secondary selection when 1 is
set as the primary selection with
the rotary switch. When no value
is set, the 7–segment LED is off.
Displays the device number set

for the CRT sharing function when
2 is selected as the primary selec-
tion with the rotary switch.
Memory all clear

D Clears all SRAM data in the memory module. The all clear
operation performed after memory module replacement must
be performed by following this method.
D After completing the primary selection, pressing the pushbut-
ton switch starts all–clear processing.
D After processing starts, the indication on the 7–segment LED
changes as follows:
(Low–speed blinking) :
All–clear processing in progress.
Executed after the pushbutton switch is
pressed.
(On) : Normal termination
(Blinking) : SRAM ECC Error
Copies SRAM data into the built–in FROM.

D The SRAM data backed up by battery is copied into the built–
in FROM of the Power Mate. This is a data backup method
performed at printed–circuit board replacement not involving
fuse replacement or memory module mounting/dismounting.
ton switch starts processing.
changes as follows:
Save operation in progress.
pressed.
(On) : An alarm is issued (such as ROM parity)
207
and sub-
Primary Secondary 1
seq u en t
operation
Saves data in a memory card in a batch.
D The SRAM data backed up by battery, and the ladder program,
C executor user program, and macro executor user program
stored in the FROM are all saved in file form on a memory card 2
in a batch.
D If the write protect switch of the memory card is not released,
an alarm is generated.
(A memory card is formatted before it is used to save data. Be
very careful when using the memory card.)
3
ton switch starts processing.
changes as follows:
Save operation in progress.
4
pressed.
5
(On) : An alarm is issued.
Abnormal memory card, memory card
with the write protect switch set to ON,
and so forth
(On) : A alarm is generated. 6

(Memory card full)
Restores SRAM data from the built–in FROM.

D SRAM data copied into the built–in FROM by selecting 7 as
the primary selection with the rotary switch is restored in the 7
SRAM.
D After completing the secondary selection, pressing the push-
button switch starts restoration.
D After restoration starts, the indication on the 7–segment LED
changes as follows: 8
Restoration in progress.
pressed.
(On) : Normal termination 9
(On) : An alarm is generated.

When saved data is not found.
10
Restores SRAM data copied into the built–in
FROM
Reserved
208
7. HARDWARE
and sub-
Primary Secondary
seq u en t
operation
Restores data from a memory card in a batch.
D The SRAM data, ladder program, C executor user program,
and macro executor user program saved on the memory card
in a batch by selecting 8 as the primary selection with the
rotary switch are restored in a batch.
ton switch again starts processing.
changes as follows:
Restoration in progress.
pressed.
(On) : An alarm is generated.

(Abnormal memory card, the write protect
switch set to OFF, and so forth)
Restores system files in a batch (restoration from a memory card).

D All the system files that can be loaded into the FROM are re-
stored in a batch.
ton switch again starts processing.
changes as follows:
Restoration in progress (executed after the
pushbutton switch is pressed)
(On) : An alarm is generated. (Abnormal

memory card, write protect switch set to
OFF, and so forth)
209
(1) Do not change the rotary switch position during the above setting
operation; otherwise, the CNC operation becomes unstable.
(2) When the 7–segment LED blinks at low–speed, the frequency is 0.5 Hz. 1
When the LED blinks at high–speed, the frequency is 2 Hz.
(3) When data is saved in and restored from a memory card in a batch, the
data is treated as follows:
Table 7.9.5 Data in the Power Mate i 2

Save/
Data restoration
Data Size File name
type allowed/
not allowed 3
User Ladder About 0.13 MB to PMC–RB.XXX Allowed
file program 0.38 MB
C executor About 1.0 MB or CEX_10M.XXX to Allowed

more CEX_*OM.XXX
4
(Note)
FAPT About 128 KB CEXOFAPT.XXX Allowed

PICTURE
5
Macro About 0.256 MB PD1M256K.XXX Allowed
executor
About 0.512 MB* PD1M05M.XXX Allowed
SRAM SRAM data About 0.256 MB SRAM256A.FDB Allowed 6

0.52 MB for each SRAM1_0A.FDB Allowed
SRAM1_0B.FDB
Note) The part XXX is a file extension. As the file extension, one of 32
numbers from 000 to 031 is set. 7
When more than one file is stored on the memory card, the file to be
restored has the largest file extension number. (See the example given
below.)
(4) Reference position setup flag of the absolute–position detector
When restoration from a memory card to the system is performed in a 8
batch, the reference position setup flag (bit 4 of parameter No. 1815) is
cleared. Therefore, after batch restoration, the reference position of the
absolute–position detector must be set.
(5) Do not remove or insert the memory card during batch save and
restoration operation. 9
(*1) The part indicated with * varies with the size of the C executor. A
file having a size of 6.0 M, for example, is named “60M.”
10
210
7. HARDWARE
7.9.6 Setting in normal operation

In normal operation, the following can be set by using the
7–segment LED and pushbutton switch:
Explanation
D When the pushbutton switch is held down for about five seconds with the
rotary switch set to 0, 0 blinks at high speed on the 7–segment LED. Then,
when the pushbutton switch is pressed again, primary selection mode ex-
plained below is entered.
D In primary selection mode, numbers corresponding to operations appear one
by one.
D When a desired number appears on the 7–segment LED, press the pushbut-
ton switch. Then, the LED indication blinks at high speed. Pressing the
pushbutton switch again enters secondary selection mode.
D When the lowest level of each setting has been determined, the finally deter-
mined operation value stays indicated on the LED. (When the pushbutton
switch is pressed again, or an alarm is issued in this condition, the ordinary
LED indication state is restored.)
Primary Secondary Explanation

End of this operation
Reserved
Reserved
Uses the following package software:
Cancels the RS–232C channel setting made by

the secondary selection explained below (opera-
tion 1 to 4).
D To cancel the DPL/MDI operation package (for
boot operation) setting made at power–up,
also select this number.
Uses the DPL/MDI operation package for

RS–232C channel 2.
D This setting is maintained even after power is
turned off. When the setting needs to be
cleared, set 0 which is explained above.
D Once this setting is made, boot operation by
the DPL/MDI operation package will be en-
abled at the next and subsequent power–up
operation. (For the operation method, refer to
the operator’s manual on the DPL/MDI opera-
tion package.)
Uses FAPT LADDER–II for RS–232C channel 2.

D This setting is maintained even after power is
turned off. When the setting needs to be
cleared, set 0 which is explained above.
Reserved
Reserved
211
8. PARAMETERS
8.1 How to Enter the Parameters

(1) Enabling writing the parameters
1
1 Press the SETTING
OFFSET
key several times to display the handy screen for
setting.
2 Move the cursor to the PARAMETER WRITE field and enter 1 2

and then INPUT
.
3 Alarm 100 occurs. Press the CAN and RESET keys simultaneously
to temporarily stop the alarm. 3
(2) Entering the parameters
1 Press the SYSTEM

key on the MDI panel several times to select the
parameter screen.
4

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5
0001 FCV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 RMV MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL 0
S 0 T0000 7
ZRN **** *** *** 10:15:30
[PARAM] [DGNOS] [PMC] [SYSTEM] [(OPRT)]
8
2 Pressing soft key [(OPRT)] displays the operation menu including
the items below.
Enter a parameter number and press [NO.SRH] : Searches for the
specified number.
Soft key [ON:1] : Sets the value at which the cursor is positioned to 1.
(Only for bit parameters)
9
Soft key [OFF:0] : Sets the value at which the cursor is positioned to 0.
(Only for bit parameters)
Soft key [+INPUT] : Adds the entered value to the value at which the
cursor is positioned. (Only for word parameters)
10
Soft key [INPUT] : Sets the value at which the cursor is positioned to
the entered value. (Only for word parameters)
Soft key [READ] : Inputs parameters from the reader/punch interface.
Soft key [PUNCH] : Outputs parameters to the reader/punch interface.
3 Convenient methods for entering data
3–1 To change data in units of bits
Pressing or changes the cursor to 1-bit size,
which enables setting data in units of bits (only for bit
parameters).
212
8. PARAMETERS
3–2 Use EOB to continuously set data starting from the cursor
position.
(Example 1)
When 1 2 3 4 EOB
4 5 6 7
EOB
9 9 9 9 INPUT
is entered,
0 1234
0 4567
³
0 9999
0 0
(Example 2)
When 1 2 3 4 EOB EOB
9 9 9
9 INPUT
is entered,
0 1234
0 0
³
0 9999
0 0
3–3 Use = to enter the same data.
(Example)
When 1 2 3 4 EOB = EOB = INPUT
is
entered,
0 1234
0 1234
³
0 1234
0 0
3–4 For bit parameters

(Example)
When 1 1 EOB = EOB = INPUT
is entered,
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
³
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 After all necessary parameters are entered, reset the

PARAMETER WRITE field to 0 on the SETTING screen.
213
8.2 Parameter List
1) Parameters for SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 0000 –) 1
2) For reader/puncher interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 0024 –)
3) Parameters of I/O LINK II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 0161 –)
4) Parameters for the DPL/MDI operation package . . . . . . (No. 0370 –)
5) Parameters for Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 0704 –) 2
6) Parameters of Power Mate CNC manager . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 0960 –)
7) Parameter for Axis control/Incremental system . . . . . . . . (No. 1000 –)
8) Parameter for Coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 1200 –)
9) Parameters of Stored stroke check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 1300 –) 3
10) Parameter of Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 1400 –)
11) Parameters of acceleration/deceleration control . . . . . . . (No. 1600 –)
12) Parameters of servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 1800 –)
13) Parameter of DI/DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 3000 –) 4
14) Parameters of Display, and Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 3100 –)
15) Parameters for programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 3400 –)
16) Parameters for Pitch Error Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 3600 –)
17) Parameters for Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 3700 –)
5
18) Parameters for tool offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5000 –)
19) Parameters for canned cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5100 –)
20) Parameters for rigid tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5200 –)
6
21) Parameters for polar coordinate interpolation . . . . . . . . . (No. 5450 –)
22) Parameters for straightness compensation . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5710 –)
23) Parameters for custom macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6000 –)
24) Parameters for pattern data input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6100 –)
7
25) Positioning by optimul acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6131 –)
26) Parameters for skip function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6200–)
27) Parameters for external data input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6300–)
28) Parameters related to picture displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6550) 8
29) Parameters for displaying operation time and
number of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6700 –)
30) Parameters of position switch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6900 –)
31) Parameters for manual handle feed / Interrupts . . . . . . . (No. 7100 –)
9
32) Parameters for butt-type reference position setting . . . . (No. 7181 –)
33) Parameters for software operator’s panel . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7200 –)
34) Parameters for the external pulse input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7670 –)
35) Parameters for axis control by PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8000 –)
10
36) Parameters for the electronic cam function . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8081 –)
37) Parameters for two–path control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8100 –)
38) Parameters for multiaxis synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8290 –)
39) Parameters for simple synchronous control . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8300 –)
40) Parameters for multi axis synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8380 –)
41) Parameters for high–speed position switches . . . . . . . . . (No. 8500 –)
42) Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8650 –)
43) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8901 –)
214
8. PARAMETERS
Data Types and Valid Data Ranges of Parameters

Data Type Valid data range Data Type Valid data range
Bit Word
0 or 1 –32767 to 32767
Bit axis Word axis
Byte –128 to 127 2–word –99999999 to
Byte axis 0 to 255 2–word axis 99999999
NOTE1 There is something to which the range of setting is limited depend-

ing on the parameter No.
NOTE2 A part of the parameter can be input with the setting screen.
NOTE3 In the description of a bit-type parameter, the explanation written
at the left-hand side of a slash (/) corresponds to setting 0, and that
at the right-hand side corresponds to setting 1.
NOTE4 <Axis> indicated at the right column in a parameter list shows that
the corresponding parameters are specified for each axis.
215
1) Parameters for SETTING
Number Contents Remarks 1

0000 For Setting
#0 TVC : TV check is not performed (0)/performed (1)

#1 ISO : Data output by EIA code (0)/by ISO code (1)
#2 INI : Input increment by mm (0)/by inch (1) 2
#5 SEQ : Automatic insertion of sequence No. is, not PRM3216
performed (0)/performed (1)
0002 Parameter relating to reference position
#7 SJZ : For manual reference position return, PRM 3

deceleration dogs are used when a reference 1005#3=1
position is not established, and positioning is
performed when a reference position is
established (0)/deceleration dogs are used at
all times (1) 4
0012 Parameter for axis detaching, mirror image <Axis>
#0 MIR : Setting of mirror image for each axis is OFF

(0)/ON (1)
#7 RMV : Detach of the each axis is not performed (0)/ PRM 5
performed (1) 1005#7
0020 Selection of channel for input/output devices
Setting 0 1 2 4 (Memory card

interface) 6
Common PRM0100
Output
PRM 0101 PRM 0111 PRM 0121
format
7
Specification
PRM 0102 PRM 0112 PRM 0122
number
Transfer
PRM 0103 PRM 0113 PRM 0123
rate 8
Transfer
Not set
method
Connector
JD42
number 9
6 : DNC1/Ethernet
(During DNC operation only)
7 : Memory card interface
(Touch panel side)
20 : Data input/output when the I/O Link with the Power Mate in 10
group 0 is used
to
35 : Data input/output when the I/O Link with the Power Mate in
group 15 is used
216
8. PARAMETERS
2) For reader/puncher interface
Number Contents Remarks
0024 Port for communication with the PMC ladder

development tool
0 : HSSB (COP7)
1 : RS–232C serial port 1 (JD42)
2 : RS–232C serial port 2 (JD42)
0100 Common to each channel
#1 CTV : TV check in the comment section of a program

is performed (0)/not performed (1)
#3 NCR : When output EOB by ISO code, LF, CR, CR
(0)/CR output (1)
#5 ND3 : DNC operation is performed to read blocks one
by one (0)/until the buffer becomes full (1).
#6 IOP : Input/output of an NC program is stopped by
resetting the CNC (0)/by pressing the [STOP]
soft key (1).
#7 ENS : Reading of data by EIA code, if NULL code is ALM001
red in the data, ignore it (0)/make alarm (1)
0101 Parameter relating to CHANNEL 1
(I/O CHANNEL=0)
#0 SB2 : Number of stop bit is 1 bit (0)/2 bits (1)

#3 ASI : Data input by EIA or ISO code (0)/ASCII code
(1)
#7 NFD : FEED before & after of data is output (0)/not
output (1)
0102 Spec. No. of I/O devices of CHANNEL 1

(I/O CHANNEL=0)
0 :
RS-232-C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 :
FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2
2 :
FANUC CASSETTE F1
3 :
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA
Card, FSP-H, FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE
4 : RS-232-C (Control codes DC1 to DC4 are not
used.)
5 : PORTABLE TAPE READER
6 : FSP-G, FSP-H, FANUC PPR
0103 Baud rate setting of CHANNEL 1
(I/O CHANNEL=0)
7 : 600 bps
8 : 1200 bps
9 : 2400 bps
10 : 4800 bps
11 : 9600 bps
12 : 19200 bps
0111 Parameter relating to CHANNEL 1 PRM0101

(I/O CHANNEL=1)
0112 Spec. No. of I/O devices of CHANNEL 1 PRM0102

(I/O CHANNEL=1)
217
0113 Baud rate setting of CHANNEL 1 PRM0103 1

(I/O CHANNEL=1)
0121 Parameter relating to CHANNEL 2 PRM0101

(I/O CHANNEL=2)
0122 Spec. No. of I/O devices of CHANNEL 2 PRM0102 2

(I/O CHANNEL=2)
0123 Baud rate setting of CHANNEL 2 PRM0103

(I/O CHANNEL=2)
3
3) Parameters of I/O LINK II
171 DI byte length (1 to 32) 4

172 DO byte length (1 to 32)
173 Local station address (1 to 32)
174 Baud rate 5
Setting Baud rate

0 1Mbps
1 500Kbps 6
2 250Kbps
3 125Kbps
180 Maximum number of slave stations (including 7

the location station) from which the local station
can receive data using the global I/O transfer
function
181 Internal relay address of the start of input data

8
182 Internal relay address of the start of output data
187 Internal relay address of the start of the

communication status
188 Communication timeout 9
10
218
8. PARAMETERS
4) Parameters for the DPL/MDI operation package
370 DPL/MDI operation package
#1 PCTD1: Only absolute coordinates and machine

coordinates (0)/absolute coordinates (1) are
displayed on the CRT when the “DPL/MDI
operation package” is connected.
380 “DPL/MDL operation package” communication

establishment request packet transmission
time interval
381 “DPL/MDL operation package” connection

confirmation request packet transmission time
interval
382 “DPL/MDL operation package” response

packet waiting time–out time
383 “DPL/MDL operation package” key input repeat

detection time (first time)
384 “DPL/MDL operation package” key input repeat

detection time (second and subsequent times5
5) Parameters for Ethernet
0704 First IP address of the NC
0705 Second IP address of the NC
0706 Third IP address of the NC
0707 Fourth IP address of the NC
0712 First mask address for the IP address of the

network
0713 Second mask address for the IP address of the

network
0714 Third mask address for the IP address of the

network
0715 Fourth mask address for the IP address of the

network
0720 First IP address of the router
0721 Second IP address of the router
0722 Third IP address of the router
0723 Fourth IP address of the router
0724 Port number for TCP
0725 Port number for UDP
0726 Time interval
219
0727 Ethernet parameter transfer/router IP address 1

selection
#0 TRN : Indicates whether Ethernet parameters were

received at the Ethernet board (1) / not (0).
#1 RIP : Indicates whether router IP address selection
is enabled (1) / disabled (0).
2
(*) Parameter Nos. 0704 to 0715 are valid only when the DPL/MDI
operation package is used as a display unit. When the CRT/MDI is
in use, the related information must be set on the “Ethernet
Parameter” screen. 3
6) Parameters of Power mate CNC manager

0960 Power mate CNC manager
#0 SLV : When the power mate CNC manager is

selected, the screen displays: one slave
(0)/divided into four (1) 5
#1 MD1 : These parameters set a slave parameter
input/output destination.
#2 MD2 : These parameters set a slave parameter
input/output destination.
MD2 MD1 Input/output destination 6
0 0 Part program storage
0 1 Memory card
In either case, slave parameters are output in

program format.
7
#3 PMN : The power mate CNC manager function is:
enabled (0)/disabled (1)
#4 SPW (parameter write protection) :
Specifies whether to allow the power mate
CNC manger to always set slave parameters 8
(0) or use the PWE settings in the host CNC
as the values of slave parameters set by the
CNC manager (1).
#5 ASG : Specifies whether to check (0) or not to check
(1) that the number of bytes assigned to an 9
I/O address for input to or output from the β
amplifier is 16.
#6 2CH : Specifies whether the second of the two
channels connected to the I/O LINK is used
for communication (the first channel is used if 10
the β amplifier is not connected to the second
channel) (0) or the first channel is used for
communication (1).
When only one channel is connected to the
I/O LINK, the channel is always used for
communication.
220
8. PARAMETERS
7) Parameter for Axis control/Incremental system
1001 Parameter relating to least input increment
#0 INM : Least command increment on linear axis is,

mm system (0)/inch system (1)
1002 Parameter relating to number of control axis
#0 JAX : Number of simultaneous controlled axis in 2 axes for

manual operation is, 1 axis (0)/3 axes (1) PMi–D
#1 DLZ : Reference position return function without dog PRM
is, disable (0)/enable (1) 1005#1
#3 AZR : For G28, specified when a reference position
has not yet been established, deceleration
dogs are used (0)/ALM 90 is issued (1).
#7 IDG : When the reference position is set without
dogs, automatic setting of the parameter (bit 0
of parameter No.1012) is: not performed (0)/
performed (1)
1004 Parameter relating to least input increment
#0 ISA : IS–A is
#1 ISC : ISC ISA CODE Least input increment used in
0 1 IS–A 0.01 mm or 0.01 deg PMi–H
0 0 IS–B 0.001 mm or 0.001 deg

1 0 IS–C 0.0001 mm or 0.0001 deg
#7 IPR : Least input increment of each axis is set to 1

time (0)/10 times (1) as of least command
increment
1005 Parameter relating to controlled axis detach <Axis>
and reference position return
#0 ZRN : A command is issued in automatic operation

before a return to reference position has not
been performed since the power was turned
on, an alarm is generated (0)/alarm is not
generated (1)
#1 DLZ : Function for setting the reference position PRM
without dogs disabled (0)/enabled (1) 1002#1
#3 HJZ : For manual reference position return when a
reference position is established, deceleration
dogs are used (0)/the setting of bit 7 of
parameter No. 0002 is followed.
#6 MCC : At axis removal, the MCC is turned off (0)/only PRM
motor activation is turned off (1). 0012#7
#7 RMB : Setting to detach of axis control for each axis is
not effective (0)/effective (1)
221
1006 Parameter relating to controlled axis <Axis> 1

#0 ROT : ROSx ROTx Meaning
#1 ROS :
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is
done. 2
(2) All coordinate values are
linear axis type. (Is not
rounded in 0 to 360_).
(3) Stored pitch error com-
pensation is linear axis
type (Refer to parameter 3
No.3624)
0 1 Rotation axis
(1) Machine coordinate val-
ues are rounded in 0 to
360_. Absolute coordi- 4
nate values are rounded
or not rounded by param-
eter No.1008#0 and #2.
1 0 Setting is invalid (unused)
5
1 1 Rotation axis
(1) Machine coordinate val-
ues, absolute coordinate
values and relative coor-
dinate values are linear
axis type. (Is not 6
rounded in 0 to 360_).
#5 ZMI : Initial set for direction of reference position

return and backlash compensation is, +
direction (0)/ – direction (1)
7
1008 Setting of rotation axis <Axis>
#0 ROA : The roll over function of a rotation axis is PRM

invalid (0)/valid (1) 1006#0=1
#1 RAB : In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in 8
the direction in which the distance to the target
is longer (0)/shorter (1)
#2 RRL : Relative coordinates are not rounded by the PRM1260
amount of the shift per one rotation (0)/are
rounded by the amount of the shift per one
rotation (1)
9
1009 Reference position external setting <Axis>
#0 ZEXx : Reference position external setting is

disable (0)/enable (1)
10
1010 Setting of number of CNC controlled axis (1 to
number of controlled axes)
1011 Number of controlled axes
1012 Reference position again <Axis>
#0 IDGx : The function for setting the reference position PRM

again, without dogs, is: not inhibited (0)/ 1002#7
inhibited (1)
222
8. PARAMETERS
1020 Setting of name of each axis used for <Axis>

programming
X : 88 Y : 89 Z : 90
A : 65 B : 66 C : 67
U : 85 V : 86 W: 87
1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate <Axis>

system
0 : Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis

1 : X axis of the basic three axes
2 : Y axis of the basic three axes
3 : Z axis of the basic three axes
5 : Axis parallel to the X axis
6 : Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 : Axis parallel to the Z axis
1023 Setting of axis number for each servo axis (1 to <Axis>

No. of controlled axis)
8) Parameter for Coordinate system
1201 Parameters for coordinates
#0 ZPR : When manual reference position return is

performed the automatic coordinate system is
not set (0)/set automatically (1)
#1 ZPI : The coordinate value of automatic coordinate PRM1250,
system is set PRM 1250 (0)/PRM 1250 & PRM 1251
1251 (1)
1203 Parameter for reference position establishment
#0 ZRFCG : The reference position establishment

signals (ZRF1 to ZRF8) conform to the
conventional specifications (0)./The signals
conform to the new specifications (1).
A reference position establishment signal
turns on if a reference position is
established and turns off if the origin is lost.
It also turns off if the origin is lost
temporarily as while APC follow–up is in
progress or while the APC/SPC alarm is
being issued.
1240 Coordinate value of the first reference position <Axis>
on each axis in the machine coordinate system
1241 Coordinate value of the second reference <Axis>

position on each axis in the machine coordinate
system
1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position <Axis>

on each axis in the machine coordinate system
1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used <Axis>

when automatic coordinate system setting is PRM
performed (mm input) 1201#1=0
223
1251 Coordinate value of the reference position on <Axis> 1

each axis used for setting a coordinate system PRM
automatically when input is performed in inches 1201#1=1
1260 The amount of travel per rotation <Axis>

2
9) Parameters of Stored stroke check
1300 Relating to Stroke check 3

#6 LZR : The stored stroke check are checked during PRM1320,
the time from power-on to manual return to the 1321
reference position (0)/not checked (1)
#7 BFA : When a command that exceeds a stored 4
stroke check is issued, an alarm is generated
after the stroke check is exceeded (0)/before
the check is exceeded (1)
1320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in <Axis>

the positive direction on each axis 5
1321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in <Axis>
the negative direction on each axis
10) Parameter of Feedrate

6
1401 Parameter relating to Feedrate

7
#0 RPD : Manual rapid traverse before the completion of
return to reference position is disable (0)/
enable (1)
#1 LRP : Positioning (G00) is nonlinear (0)/linear (1).
#4 RF0 : When cutting feedrate override is 0% during 8
rapid traverse, the machine tool does not stop
moving (0)/stops moving (1)
#5 TDR : Dry run during tapping in the canned cycle Only for
(G74, G84) is enable (0)/disable (1) PMi–D
#6 RDR : Dry run for rapid traverse command is, disable
(0)/enable (1)
9
1404 Reference position return
#1 DLF : After a reference position has been

established, a manual reference position return
10
operation is performed at the rapid traverse
rate (PRM1420) (0)/at the manual rapid
traverse rate (PRM1424) (1).
#2 F8A : With inch input, Valid data range for an F
command in feed per minute mode 9600
deg/min (0)/24000 deg/min (1)
1405 Speed changeover
#7 FDC : Enables (1) / disables (0) the speed

changeover function.
224
8. PARAMETERS
1410 Dry run rate (feedrate of jog override is 100 %)

[mm/min]
1411 Cutting feedrate in the automatic mode at

power-on [mm/min]
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis <Axis>

(Rapid traverse override is 100%) [mm/min]
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis <Axis>

[mm/min]
1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis <Axis>

[mm/min] PRM1430
1423 Manual continuous feedrate for each axis (jog <Axis>

feedrate) [mm/min]
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis <Axis>

If 0 is set, the rate set in PRM1420 is assumed PRM1420
[mm/min]
1425 FL rate of return to the reference position for <Axis>

each axis [mm/min]
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis <Axis>

[mm/min] PRM1422
1431 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the

look-ahead feed forward mode [mm/min]
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the <Axis>

look-ahead feed forward mode [mm/min] PRM 1431
1480 Lower limit of feedrate for the rate feed function
1481 Feedrate for speed switching signal EXF1
225
11) Parameters of acceleration/deceleration control
1
1601 Parameter relating to block overlap, inposition

check
#2 OVB : Cutting feed block overlap is not performed (0)/ 2

is performed (1).
#4 RTO : Block overlap in rapid traverse is not performed PRM 1722
(0)/performed (1)
#5 NCI : Inposition check at deceleration is performed
(0)/not performed (1) 3
1602 Acceleration/deceleration control
#0 FWB : Linear acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation is type A (0)/type B (1)
#3 BS2 : Types of post–interpolation 4
acceleration/deceleration related to cutting feed
used in the advanced feed forward mode
#6 LS2 : BS2 LS2 Acceleration/deceleration
0 0 Exponential acceleration/
deceleration after interpola- 5
tion
0 1 Linear acceleration/decel-
eration after interpolation
1 0 Bell–shaped acceleration/
deceleration after interpola- 6
tion
1605 Time constant expansion function
#1 TCE : The time constant expansion function is not

used (0)/used (1). 7
Normal mode
Number of axes Valid range
1 to 2 0 to 32000
3 to 4 0 to 16000
5 to 8 0 to 8000 8
High–speed response mode
Number of axes Valid range
1 to 2 0 to 4000
3 to 4 0 to 2000
5 to 8 0 to 1000 9
1610 Acceleration/deceleration control <Axis>
#0 CTL : Parameter PRM1622

#1 CTB : Acceleration/deceleration PRM1622
CTBx CTBx
10
0 0 Exponential acceleration/
deceleration
0 1 Linear acceleration/decel-
eration after interpolation
1 0 Bell–shaped acceleration/
deceleration after interpola-
tion
#4 JGL : Acceleration/deceleration for manual feed is PRM
exponential (0)/linear or bell-shaped (1). 1610#0,#1,
1624
226
8. PARAMETERS
1620 Time constant of linear acceleration/ <Axis>

deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis
bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid
traverse for each axis [msec]
1621 Time constant T2 used in bell-shaped <Axis>

acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for
each axis [msec]
1622 Time constant of exponential function <Axis>

acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for
each axis [msec]
1623 FL rate of exponential function acceleration/ <Axis>

deceleration in cutting feed for each axis
[mm/min]
1624 Time constant of exponential function <Axis>

acceleration/deceleration in manual continuous
feed for each axis [msec]
1625 FL rate of exponential function acceleration/ <Axis>

deceleration in manual continuous feed for
each axis [mm/min]
1630 Maximum machining speed during linear In

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation look-ahead
[mm/min] feed
forward
1631 Time until the machining speed reaches the mode,
maximum speed during acceleration/ PRM1770,
deceleration before interpolation [msec] 1771 are
enabled.
1635 Time constant for cutting feed acceleration/ PMi–H

deceleration or time constant T1
post–interpolation bell–shaped acceleration/
deceleration related to cutting feed for an
individual axis in the high–speed response
mode
1636 Time constant T for rapid traverse linear PMi–H

acceleration/ deceleration or T1 for rapid
traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration
for an individual axis in the high–speed
response mode
1637 Time constant T2 for rapid traverse PMi–H

bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for an
individual axis in the high–speed response
mode
1638 Time constant T2 for post–interpolation PMi–H

bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration related
to cutting feed for an individual axis in the
high–speed response mode
1722 Rapid traverse deceleration ratio when blocks <Axis>

in rapid traverse are overlapped [%] PRM
1601#4
227
1762 Time constant of exponential acceleration/ <Axis> 1

deceleration in cutting feed in look-ahead feed
forward mode [msec]
1763 FL rate for exponential acceleration/ <Axis>

forward mode [mm/min]
2
1768 Time constant of linear acceleration/
forward mode [msec]
3
1770 Maximum machining speed during linear Accelera-
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation tion/
[mm/min] decelera-
tion before
1771 Time needed until the machining speed interpola-
4
reaches the maximum machining speed during tion (look-
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation ahead
[msec] control
mode)
1784 Feedrate for overtravel alarm deceleration 5
during acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (stroke check 1)
12) Parameters of servo

6
1800 DRDY alarm, feed forward
#1 CVR : When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ALM 404 7
ON before position control ready signal PRDY
comes ON generated (0)/is not generated (1)
#2 OZR : If manual reference position return is
performed using the feed hold function when
there is a remaining distance to travel, a
miscellaneous function is being executed, a
8
dwell operation is being performed, or a
canned cycle is being executed, ALM091 is
issued (0)/not issued (1).
#3 FFR : The feed-forward function is enabled for cutting
only (0)/cutting and rapid traverse (1). 9
10
228
8. PARAMETERS
1801 Parameter relating to inposition
#4 CCI : In-position width parameter setting when a

block for cutting is followed by another block
for cutting
#5 CIN : In-position width parameter setting when a
block for cutting is followed by another block
for cutting
CIN CCI PRM1826 PRM1827
Same as rapid
0 0 (Not used)
traverse
When the next
block specifies When the next
block also
0 1 an operation
other than cut- specifies cut-
ting
ting
When rapid tra- When cutting
verse is to be feed is to be
performed re- performed re-
1 1 gardless of gardless of
what is speci- what is speci-
fied by the next fied by the next
block block
1802 Parameter relating to linear scale with

reference marks
#1 DC4 : When the reference position is established on

the linear scale with reference marks. An
absolute position is established by detecting
three reference marks (0)/four reference marks
(1)
1803 Torque control, two–path control
#0 TQI : While torque restriction is applied, in–position

check is not performed (0)/performed (1)
#1 TQA : While torque restriction is applied, checking for
an excessive error in the stopped state/during
movement is not performed (0)/performed (1)
#2 NVY : Specifies whether to issue servo alarm 401 (0)/
to wait until VRDY becomes on (1) if VRDY is
off.
#3 EEP : With two–path control, specifies whether to PMi–D
cause (1) an emergency stop for an individual PRM
path / not (0) when a single–axis amplifier is in 8100#7
use.
#4 TQF : When torque control is performed by an axis
control command of the PMC axis control
function, follow–up operation is not performed
(0)/performed (1)
229
1804 VRDY OFF ignore signal 1

#1 BLA : The voltage of APC battery is monitored only
during communication with the pulse recorder
(0)/constantly monitored (1) to see if it is low.
#4 IVO : When an attempt is made to release an
emergency stop while the VRDY OFF alarm
2
ignore signal is 1, the emergency stop state is
not released until the VRDY OFF alarm ignore
signal is set to 0 (0)/the emergency stop state
is released (1)
#5 ANA : When an abnormal load is detected for an axis: PRM 1881 3
movement along all axes is stopped, and a
servo alarm is output (0)/no servo alarm is
output, and movement along only the axes of
the group containing the axis with the abnormal
load is stopped in interlock mode (1) 4
#6 SAK : When the IGNVRY signal is 1 or the IGNVRYx
signal for each axis is 1, SA is set to 0 (0)/
1 (1).
1815 Parameter relating to position detector <Axis>

5
#1 OPT : A separate pulse coder is not used (0)/
used (1)
#2 DCL : As a separate position detector, the linear scale
with reference marks is: not used (0)/used (1)
#4 APZ : When the absolute position detector is used, 6
machine position and absolute position
transducer is not corresponding (0)/
corresponding (1)
#5 APC : Position transducer is incremental position
transducer (0)/absolute pulse coder (1) 7
1816 Parameter relating to detection multiply <Axis>
#4 DM1 : DM3 DM2 DM1 DMR DM3 DM2 DM1 DMR Flexible
#5 DM2 : feed gear
0 0 0 1/2 1 0 0 5/2
#6 DM3 : In case of 8
0 0 1 1 1 0 1 3 parameter
0 1 0 3/2 1 1 0 7/2 (No. 2084
and 2085
0 1 1 2 1 1 1 4
are not
Detection unit = used.)
Move amount per one rotation of the motor
9
Position feedback pulse per one rotation of
the motor DMR
1817 Tandem control <Axis>

10
#6 TAN : Tandem control is not applied (0)/applied (1).
230
8. PARAMETERS
1819 Follow-up, feed-forward <Axis>
#0 FUP : When the servo system is turned off, a

follow-up operation is performed based on
*FLWU (0)/is not performed (1).
#1 CRF : When servo alarm No.445 (software
disconnection), No.446 (hardware
disconnection), No.447 (hardware
disconnection (separate type)), or No.421
(excessive dual position feedback error) is
issued, the reference position setting remains
as is (0)/the system enters the reference
position undefined state (1)
1820 Command multiply for each axis (CMR) <Axis>
Least command increment
CMR =
Detection unit
CMR t 1 Setting value = (1/CMR) +100
CMR y 1 Setting value = 2 CMR
1821 Reference counter capacity for each axis <Axis>

[Detection unit]
1825 Servo loop gain for each axis [0.01 sec–1] <Axis>
Std=3000
1826 Inposition width for each axis [Detection unit] <Axis>
1827 Inposition width for successive cutting feed <Axis>

blocks for each axis [Detection unit] PRM
1801#4
1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in <Axis>

movement [Detection unit] PRM 1420
Setting value = PRM 1825
Rapid traverse 1
60 PRM 1825 Detecting unit 1.2
1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the <Axis>

stopped state [Detection unit] Std=5000
1830 Axis–by–axis positional deviation limit at <Axis>

servo–off time [Detection unit] PRM 1829
1832 Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis <Axis>

[Detection unit]
1836 Servo error amount where reference position <Axis>

return is possible [Detection unit] PRM
2000#0
1850 Grid shift for each axis [Detection unit] <Axis>
1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis <Axis>

[Detection unit]
1855 Current limit override value for each axis <Axis>
1872 Servo position deviation check value <Axis>
1880 Abnormal load detection alarm timer [ms]
231
1881 Group number when an abnormal load is <Axis> 1

detected PRM
1804#5
1882 Space between the mark–2 indications on the <Axis>

linear scale with reference marks
[Detection unit]
2
1883 Distance from the zero point of the linear scale <Axis>
with reference marks to the reference position
[Detection unit]
3
1885 Maximum allowable value for total travel during <Axis>
torque control [Detection unit]
1886 Positional deviation when torque control is <Axis>

canceled [Detection unit]
4
1901 Follow–up
#7 HFU : Emergency stop during torque control; the

follow–up to be performed if a servo alarm is
issued is of the conventional (0)/high–speed
type. 5
1902 FSSB Setting
#0 FMD : The FSSB setting mode is, automatic setting PRM

mode (0)/manual setting 2 mode (1) 1902#0
#1 ASE : When automatic setting mode is selected for 6
FSSB setting (when the FMD parameter (bit 0 of
parameter No.1902) is set to 0), automatic setting
is, not completed (0)/completed (1)
1904 Using status of DSP <Axis> 7

#0 DSP : Two axes use one DSP (0)/one axis uses one
DSP (1)
1905 Type of servo interface

8
#0 FSL : The type of interface used between the servo
amplifier and servo software is, fast type (0)/slow
type (1)
#4 IO1 : First axis
Specifies whether to use (1) the FSSB I/O
module basic unit in the first group / not (0).
9
Second axis
module expansion unit in the first group / not
(0).
#5 IO2 : First axis 10
module basic unit in the second group / not (0).
Second axis
module expansion unit in the second group /
not (0).
#6 PM1 : The first pulse module is, not used (0)/used (1)
#7 PM2 : The second pulse module is, not used (0)/used
(1)
232
8. PARAMETERS
1910 Address conversion table value for slave 1

(ATR)

(ATR)

(ATR)

(ATR)

(ATR)

(ATR)

(ATR)

(ATR)

(ATR)

(ATR)
1920 Controlled axis number for slave 1 (dedicated

to the FSSB setting screen)









1931 Connector number for the first pulse module <Axis>

(dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
233
1932 Connector number for the second pulse module <Axis> 1

(dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1934 Master and slave axis numbers subject to <Axis>

tandem control (dedicated to the FSSB setting
screen)
2
1936 Connector number of the first pulse module <Axis>
1937 Connector number of the second pulse module <Axis>
1960 Start address of an R area to which the DI bit

information of the FSSB I/O module for the first 3
group is transferred
1961 Size of an R area to which the DI bit

information of the FSSB I/O module for the first
group is transferred 4
1962 Start address of an R area where the bit
information to be output to the DO of the FSSB
I/O module for the first group is stored
1963 Size of an R area where the bit information to 5

be output to the DO of the FSSB I/O module for
the first group is stored
1964 Start address of an R area to which the DI bit

information of the FSSB I/O module for the
second group is transferred 6
1965 Size of an R area to which the DI bit
information of the FSSB I/O module for the
second group is transferred
1966 Start address of an R area where the bit

7
information to be output to the DO of the FSSB
I/O module for the second group is stored
1967 Size of an R area where the bit information to

be output to the DO of the FSSB I/O module for 8
the second group is stored
1968 Address of an R area where the status

information about DO alarms is output
2000 Parameter for servo <Axis> 9

#0 PLC0 : 0.1 mm control is, not performed (0)/ PRM2023,
performed (1) 2024, 1836
#1 DGPR : When the power is turned on, the digital
servo parameter specific to the motor is set
(0)/not set (1).
10
#3 PRMC : Unusable
#4 PGEX : Position gain range is not expanded (0)/
expanded by 8 times (1)
234
8. PARAMETERS
2001 Arbitrary AMR <Axis>
#0 AMR0:
Motor
#1 AMR1: #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
type
#2 AMR2:
#3 AMR3: 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 AC5-0
#4 AMR4:
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4-0S,
#5 AMR5: AC3-0S
#6 AMR6:
#7 AMR7: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 α pulse
coder
2002 Separate detector <Axis>
#3 PFSE : A separate position detector is, not used (0)/ PRM

used (1) 1815#1
automati–
cally set
#7 VFSE : A separate position detector is, not used (0)/ PRM
used (1) 1815#1
automati–
cally set
2003 Parameter for velocity control <Axis>
#1 TGAL : Specifies which to use, a standard value (0) / PRM 2064

a parameter–specified value (1), as a
detection level for a position detection
disconnection alarm.
#2 OBEN: Velocity control observer is not used (0)/used PRM 2047,
(1) 2050, 2051
#3 PIEN : Velocity control by I–P control (0)/PI control
(1)
#4 NPSP : The N pulse suppression function is, not used
(0)/used (1)
#5 BLEN : In speed control, backlash compensation is, PRM 2048
not improved (0)/proved (1)
#6 OVSC: Overshoot compensation is invalidated (0)/ PRM 2045
validated (1)
#7 VOFS : VCMD is not offset (0)/offset (1)
2004 PWM dead zone <Axis>
#6 DLY0 : The PWM dead zone is, set to 8 ms (0)/set

to 16 ms (1)
2005 Parameter for servo <Axis>
#1 FEED : Feedforward function is ineffective (0)/ PRM2068,

effective (1) 2069, 2092
#6 BRKC: Gravity shaft break control function is PRM2083
ineffective (0)/effective (1)
#7 SFCM: The static friction compensation function is,
not used (0)/used (1)
235
2006 Parameter for servo <Axis> 1

#0 FCBL : In fully closed feedback, backlash PRM 2048
compensation pulses are dealt normally (0)/
not used (1)
#2 PKVE : Speed–dependent current loop gain variable PRM 2074
function is, not used (0)/used (1)
2
#4 ACCF : Acceleration feedback while stopping function
is ineffective (0)/effective (1)
#6 DCBE: While decelerating, back electromotive force Unusable
compensation is ineffective (0)/ effective (1)
3
2007 Fine acceleration/deceleration <Axis>
#6 FAD : The fine acceleration/deceleration function is,

#7 FRCA : Torque control is, not exercised (0)/exercised
(1) 4
2008 Tandem control
#1 TNOM : Tandem axis setting Automatica

lly set by
PRM
5
1817#6
#2 VFBA : Velocity feedback averaging function Main axis
invalidated (0)/validated (1) only
#3 SPPR : Full preload function invalidated (0)/validated Usually,
(1) set this bit
6
to 1
Main axis
only
#4 SPPC : The motor output torque polarities are as Main axis
follows, outputs only the positive polarity to only 7
the main axis, and outputs only the negative
polarity to the sub–axis (0)/outputs only the
negative polarity to the main axis, and
outputs only the positive polarity to the
sub–axis (1) 8
#5 VCTM : Velocity command tandem control, Main axis
invalidated (0)/validated (1) main axis only only
#6 PFBS : Position feedback according to the direction Main axis
of a torque command, not used (0)/used (1) only
#7 LAXD : Damping compensation for the sub–axis only Usually, 9
(0)/damping compensation with both the set this bit
main axis and sub–axis (1) to 1
Main axis
only
10
236
8. PARAMETERS
2009 Parameter for backlash acceleration, dummy <Axis>

function
#0 SERD: Dummy function for the serial pulse coder is

#1 IQOB : Effect of voltage saturation in abnormal load Only 9066
detection invalidated (0)/validated (1) series
PRM
2200#2
#2 ADBL : New type backlash acceleration stop function PRM2048,
is ineffective (0)/effective (1) 2087
#6 BLCU : Backlash acceleration stop function in cutting PRM2066,
mode is ineffective (0)/effective (1) 2082
#7 BLST : Backlash acceleration stop function is
2010 Parameter for backlash acceleration <Axis>
#2 LINE : Controls a linear motor, invalidated (0)/

validated (1)
#3 BLTE : Multiply backlash acceleration amount is PRM2048
1 (0)/ 10 (1)
#4 HBPE : A pitch error compensation is added to the
error counter of, full–closed loop (0)/
semi–closed loop (1)
#5 HBBL : A backlash compensation amount is added
to the error counter of, semi–closed loop (0)/
full–closed loop (1)
2011 Torque limit variable function
#5 RCCA: The actual current torque limit variable Unusable

function is not used (0)/used (1)
2012 Parameter for servo <Axis>
#1 MSFE: Machine velocity feedback function is PRM2088

#4 VCM1: VCM2 VCM1 Revolution/5V
#5 VCM2:
0 0 0.9155 min–1/5V
0 1 14 min–1/5V
1 0 234 min–1/5V
1 1 3750 min–1/5V
#7 STNG: In velocity command mode, a software
disconnection alarm is, detected (0)/ignored
(1)
2015 High-speed positioning function <Axis>
#0 PGTW : Polygonal lines for the position gain are not PRM2028
used (0)/used (1)
#1 SSG1 : Integration function at low speed is not used PRM2029,
(0)/used (1) 2030
#5 TDOU : Between channels 2 and 4 on the check
board TCMD is output (0)/estimated load
torque is output (1)
#6 BLAT : The two–stage backlash acceleration
function is not used (0)/used (1)
237
2016 Abnormal load detection function <Axis> 1

#0 ABNT : The abnormal load detection function (option)
is not used (0)/used (1)
#3 K2VC : The function for changing the proportional
gain in the stop state is not used (0)/used (1)
2
2017 Stop distance reduction function <Axis>
#0 DBST : The stop distance reduction function is not

used (0)/used (1)
This bit is not supported by the Power 3
Mate–E
#4 HTNG : In velocity command mode, the hardware
disconnection alarm of a separate detector
is: detected (0)/ignored (1)
#5 RISC : When RISC is used, the feed–forward
response characteristics remain as is (0)/
4
improved (1)
#6 OVCR : The OVC alarm remains as is (0)/improved
(1)
#7 PK25 : High–speed velocity loop proportional
processing is not used (0)/used (1) 5
2018 Observer stop time disable function <Axis>
#1 MOVO : The observer stop time disable function is:

#7 PFBC : The motor feedback signal for the main axis 6
is shared by the sub–axis (0)/is not shared
by the sub–axis (1)
2019 Digital servo function <Axis>
#7 DPFB : The dual feedback function is not used (0)/

7
used (1).
2020 Motor model <Axis>
2021 Load inertia ratio <Axis> 8

2022 Motor rotation direction <Axis>
111=CCW, –111=CW
2023 No. of speed pulses <Axis>

PRM 9
2000#0
PRM PRM
2000#0=0 2000#0=1
Serial PC A/a PC 8192 819
10
238
8. PARAMETERS
2024 No. of position pulses <Axis>

PRM
2000#0
1 Position detecting by built-in type of pulse coder
PRM PRM
2000#0=0 2000#0=1
Serial PC A/a PC 12500 1250
2 In case of separate type of position detector, Setting

value=the feedback pulse/motor one revolution 4
When bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is 1, use the value
obtained by dividing, by 10, the value used when this bit is 0.
2028 Speed at which the position gain is switched <Axis>

PRM
2015#0
2029 Acceleration–time velocity enabling integration <Axis>

function for low speed. PRM
2015#1
2030 Deceleration–time velocity enabling integration
function for low speed
2033 Number of position feedback pulses <Axis>
2034 Vibration–damping control gain <Axis>
2039 Second–stage acceleration of the Two–stage <Axis>

backlash acceleration function
2040 Current loop integral gain (PK1) <Axis>

Need not
changed
2041 Current loop proportional gain (PK2) <Axis>
2042 Current loop gain (PK3) <Axis>

Need not
changed
2043 Velocity loop integral gain (PK1V) <Axis>

Need not
changed
2044 Velocity loop proportional gain (PK2V) <Axis>
2045 Velocity loop incomplete integral gain (PK3V) <Axis>
2046 Velocity loop gain (PK4V) <Axis>

Need not
changed
2047 Observer parameter (POA1) <Axis>

Need not
changed
2048 Backlash acceleration amount <Axis>
2049 Maximum zero width of dual feedback <Axis>
239
2050 Observer gain (POK1) <Axis> 1

Need not
changed
2051 Observer gain (POK2) <Axis>

Need not
changed
2
2052 Not used <Axis>
Need not
changed
3
2053 Current dead band compensation (PPMAX) <Axis>
Need not
changed
2054 Current dead band compensation (PDDP) <Axis>

Need not 4
changed
2055 Current dead band compensation (PHYST) <Axis>

Need not
changed
5
2056 Back electromotive force compensation <Axis>
(EMFCMP) Need not
changed
2057 Current phase compensation (PVPA) <Axis> 6

Need not
changed
2058 Current phase compensation (PALPH) <Axis>

Need not
changed 7
(EMFBAS) Need not
changed
2060 Torque limit <Axis> 8

Need not
changed

(EMFLMT) Need not 9
changed
2062 Overload protection coefficient (OVC1) <Axis>

Need not
changed
10
2063 Overload protection coefficient (OVC2) <Axis>
Need not
changed
2064 Software alarm level disconnection <Axis>

PRM
2003#1
240
8. PARAMETERS
2065 Overload protection coefficient (OVCLMT) <Axis>

Need not
changed
2066 250 m sec acceleration feedback <Axis>
2067 Torque command filter <Axis>
2068 Feedforward coefficient <Axis>
2069 Speed feedforward <Axis>
2070 Backlash acceleration timing <Axis>
2071 Time during which backlash acceleration is <Axis>

effective
2072 Static–friction compensation <Axis>
2073 Stop time determination parameter <Axis>
2074 Velocity depending type current loop gain <Axis>

Need not
changed
2076 Acceleration feedback gain <Axis>
2077 Overshoot provention counter <Axis>
2078 Numerator of dual position feedback <Axis>

conversion coefficient
2079 Denominator of dual position feedback <Axis>

conversion coefficient
2080 Primary delay time constant of dual position <Axis>

feedback
2081 Zero width of dual position feedback <Axis>
2082 Backlash acceleration stop amount <Axis>
2083 Gravity axis break control timer [ms] <Axis>

PRM
2005#6
2084 Flexible feed gear numerator n <Axis>
2085 Flexible feed gear denominator m <Axis>
Position feedback
n pulses/motor rev.
=
m 1,000,000
2086 Rated current parameter <Axis>

Need not
changed
2087 Torque offset <Axis>
2088 Machine velocity feedback gain <Axis>

PRM
2012#2
241
2089 Base pulse for backlash acceleration <Axis> 1

2091 Nonlinear control parameter <Axis>
2092 Advance feed-forward coefficient [0.01%] <Axis>
2097 Static–friction compensation stop parameter <Axis> 2

2098 Current phase compensation coefficient <Axis>
2099 N pulse suppress level <Axis>
2101 Overshoot compensation valid level <Axis> 3

2102 Final clamp value of the actual current limit <Axis>
2103 Track back amount applied when an abnormal <Axis>

load is detected
2104 Threshold of abnormal load detection in cutting <Axis>

4
2105 Torque constant <Axis>
2109 Fine acceleration/deceleration time constant <Axis>

(in ms) 5
2110 Magnetic saturation compensation <Axis>
(base/coefficient)
2111 Deceleration torque limit (base/coefficient) <Axis>
2112 AMR conversion coefficient 1 <Axis>

6
2113 Notch filter center frequency (Hz) <Axis>
2116 Abnormal load detection dynamic friction <Axis>

cancel 7
2118 Dual position feedback <Axis>
Semi–closed/full–closed error overestimation
level
2119 Function for changing the proportional gain in <Axis> 8

the stop state: Stop level
2126 Position feedback switching time constant t
2127 Non–interactive control coefficient

9
2128 Weak magnetic flux compensation (coefficient)
2129 Weak magnetic flux compensation (base/limit)
2130 Correction of two thrust ripples per magnetic

pole pair 10
2131 Correction of four thrust ripples per magnetic
pole pair
2132 Correction of six thrust ripples per magnetic

pole pair
2138 AMR conversion coefficient 2
2142 Abnormal load detection threshold in rapid

traverse
242
8. PARAMETERS
2143 Fine acceleration/deceleration time constant 2

(in ms)
2144 Position feed–forward coefficient for cutting

(in 0.01%)
2145 Velocity feed–forward coefficient for cutting

(in %)
2165 Maximum amplifier current
2200 Abnormal load detection <Axis>
#2 IQOB : Effect of voltage saturation on abnormal load PRM

detection is not eliminated (0)/ eliminated (1) 2009#1
#3 ABGO : When an abnormal load is detected, a
threshold is not set (0)/set (1) for cutting and
rapid traverse
2201 Function for obtaining current offsets <Axis>
#0 CROF: The function for obtaining current offsets upon

an emergency stop is not used (0)/used (1)
#6 CPEE : The actual current display peak hold function
2202 Fine acceleration/deceleration function <Axis>
#0 FAGO: The fine acceleration/deceleration function,

used separately for cutting and rapid traverse,
#3 OVS1 : Overshoot compensation is valid only once
after the termination of a move command (1)
#4 DUAL : Zero width is determined only by setting = 0
(0)/by setting (1)
2203 Torque control <Axis>
#4 FRC2 : Torque control type 2 is not exercised (0)/

exercised (1)
2209 FAD <Axis>
#2 FADL : FAD bell–shaped type (0)/FAD linear type (1)
243
13) Parameter of DI/DO

3001 Parameter for Interface
#1 SON : Starts at a rising edge (0)/falling edge (1) of
the automatic operation start signal (ST).
#2 RWM : RWD signal is put out only when the tape 2
reader is being rewound (0)/ when a program
in memory is being rewound (1)
#7 MHI : Exchange of strobe and completion signals for
the M, S, T and B codes are normal (0)/ high
speed (1) 3
3002 Override polarity
#4 IOV : For the feedrate override signal and rapid

traverse override signal uses negative logic
(0)/positive logic (1). 4
3003 Parameter for Interlock signal
#0 ITL : Interlock signal is enable (0)/ disable (1) *IT, *IT

STLK
#1 HIL : Disables (0) or enables (1) the high–speed *RILK 5
interlock signal.
#2 ITX : Interlock signals for each axis is, enable (0)/ *IT1 - *IT8
disable (1)
#3 DIT : Interlock for each axis direction is, enable (0)/ +MIT1 -
disable (1) –MIT4 6
#5 DEC : Deceleration signals (*DEC1 to *DEC8) for
manual reference position return specify
deceleration when they are 0 (0)/when they are
1 (1)
#6 MVX : The axis movement in-progress signal is set to 7
0 at the time of distribution completion (0)/
in-position (1).
3004 Overtravel
#5 OTH : The hardware overtravel function is used (0)/ 8

not used (1).
3005
#1 BDE : *DEC is not used (0)/used (1) when built–in I/O

is used. 9
3006 Reference position return deceleration signal
#7 CDE : The *DEC1 signal is not used (0)/used (1) for PMi–D
two axes.
10
3008
#3 BIO : The signals that PM i references directly, such

as deceleration signals for emergency
stop/high–speed interlock/skip/reference
position return, are external I/O signals
(0)/internal I/O signals (1).
3010 Delay time of strobe signals MF, SF, TF [ms]
244
8. PARAMETERS
3011 Acceptable width of M, S, and T function

completion signal (FIN) [ms]
3017 Output time of reset signal RST [16 ms]
3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code

(1 to 8)
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code PMi–D

(1 to 5)
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

(1 to 8)
14) Parameters of Display, and Edit
3100 Parameter for MDI panel
#1 CEM : On screens such as the operation history

screen and help screen, keys on the MDI panel
are indicated in English (0)/with graphics
qualifying for CE marking (1)
3101 Display
#4 BGD : The display of a foreground program in the

background is disabled (0)/enabled (1).
3102 The selection of language used in the display
#0 JPN : Japanese When all

#1 GRM: German (Option) the bits are
#2 FRN : French (Option) set to 0,
#4 ITA : Italian (Option) English is
#6 SPN : Spanish (Option) used.
3104 Parameters for position display
#0 MCN : The machine position display is not displayed PRM

according to the unit of input (0)/displayed 0000#2
according to the unit of input (1)
#3 PPD : When a coordinate system is set, the relative
position display is not preset (0)/preset (1)
#4 DRL : For displaying relative positions, tool length
compensation is considered (0)/not considered
(1)
#6 DAL : For displaying absolute positions, tool length
compensation is considered (0)/not considered
(1)
245
3105 Parameters for data display 1

#0 DPF : Display of the actual speed on the current
position display screen, program check screen
and program screen(MDI mode)is, not
displayed (0)/displayed (1)
#1 PCF : The movement of the PMC controlled axes are
2
added to the actual speed display (0)/not
added (1)
#2 DPS : Actual spindle speed and T code are not
always displayed (0)/always displayed (1)
#7 SMF : During simplified synchronous control, PMi–D 3
movement along a slave axis is included (0)/
not included (1) in the actual speed display.
3106 Operation history
#4 OPH : The operation history screen is not displayed 4

(0)/displayed (1).
#7 OHS : Operation history sampling is performed (0)/not
performed (1).
3107 Parameters for program display 5

#0 NAM : In the Program list, only program numbers are MDI mode
indicated (0)/program numbers and program
names (1)
#2 DNC : Upon reset, the program display for DNC
operation is not cleared (0)/cleared (1) 6
#4 SOR : In the Display of the program directory,
programs are listed in the order of registration
(0)/in the order of program number (1)
#7 MDL : Display of the modal state on the program
display screen is, not displayed (0)/displayed 7
(1)
3108 Data display
#7 JSP : On the current position display screen and

program check screen, jog feed is not 8
displayed (0)/displayed (1)
3109 Parameter for display of tool offset
#2 IKY : On the tool compensation screen, the [INPUT]

soft key is displayed (0)/not displayed (1). 9
#3 SFM : The soft key [menu] for pattern data input
screen selection is displayed on the second
page (0)/first page (1) of the offset/setting
screen.
#5 RHD : When a manual handle interrupt is generated, 10
the relative position display is not updated (0)/
updated (1)
246
8. PARAMETERS
3111 Parameter for CRT display
#0 SVS : The servo setting screen is displayed (0)/not

display (1)
#1 SPS : The spindle setting screen is not displayed (0)/ PMi–D
displayed (1)
#2 SVP : The synchronization errors displayed on the PMi–D
spindle adjustment screen is the instant values
(0)/peak hold values (1)
#7 NPA : When an alarm is generated, the display shifts
to the alarm screen (0)/does not shift (1)
3112 Parameter for alarm and operation history
display
#3 EAH : As alarm history information, macro alarm and

external alarm messages are recorded (0)/not
recorded (1).
#5 OPH : The operation history log function is displayed
(0)/enable (1).
3115 Parameter for current position display <Axis>
#0 NDP : The current position for each axis is, displayed

(0)/not displayed (1)
#1 NDA : Absolute coordinates and relative coordinates
are displayed (0)/not displayed (only machine
coordinates being displayed) (1).
#3 NDF : To the actual speed display, axis movement
data is added (0)/not added (1)
3116 Memory card input/output screen
#0 MDP : The memory card input/output screen is not

displayed (0)/displayed (1) on the ALL I/O
screen.
#7 MDC : All maintenance information is not erased at a
time (0)/erased at a time (1) through soft key
operation on the maintenance information
screen.
3118 Actual spindle speed and maintenance

information display
#0 AS1 : When the actual spindle speeds (SACT) of the

spindle are displayed, each value is the value
calculated from the position coder (0)/the value
calculated from the spindle motor speed (1)
#3 MDC : All clear maintenance information by operating
soft key is disable (0)/enable (1)
3119 MDI panel
#6 TKY : Specifies which to use, the M series (0) / T

series (1), for MDI–based inputs.
3122 Time interval used to record time data in

operation history [Minute]
3131 Subscript for the name of each axis PMi–D

(2-path
control)
247
3137 Simultaneous 4–axis teach–in function PMi–H 1

#0 TIN : The simultaneous 4–axis teach–in function is
disabled (0)/enabled (1).
3138 Simultaneous 4–axis teach–in function PMi–H

2
TI1 to 8 : Input address (axis number)
3139 Setting of address P for simultaneous 4–axis PMi–H

teach–in
3141 Character codes of device name (first 3

character)
L L
3146 Character codes of device name (sixth

character)
4
3170 Number of connected Power Mates that can
share a CRT/MDI.
If a PMi with three or more axes is to be
connected with a single unit, set the number of 5
PMis that is connected + 128.
3191 FANUC touch panel
#7 DMM : Switching to full screen display is not

performed (0)/performed (1) when a FANUC 6
touch panel is used.
3201 Parameter for program registration
#0 RDL : In case of program registration by MINP signal, EXRD

the new program is registered following the signal 7
programs already registered (0)/all registered
programs are deleted, then the new program is
registered (1)
#1 RAL : In case of the program registeration, all
programs are registered (0)/only one program 8
is registered (1)
#2 REP : When program registration, if the program
number is same as an existing one, an alarm is
generated (0)/the existing program is deleted
then the new program is registered (1) 9
#5 N99 : When an M99 block is specified, program PRM
registration is terminated (0)/not terminated (1) 3201#6=0
#6 NPE : At the program registration, M02, M30 and M99
is assumed as completion of registration (0)/
not assumed (1)
10
248
8. PARAMETERS
3202 Parameter for program protect
#0 NE8 : Editing of programs with program numbers

8000 to 8999 are not inhibited (0)/inhibited (1)
#1 OLV : When a program other than the selected
program is deleted or output the display of the
selected program is not held (0)/held (1).
#2 CND : With the [ARRANGE] soft key, main program
arrangement is not performed (0)/performed
(1).
#3 OSR : In programming number search, when pressing
soft key [O–SEARCH] without inputting
program number by key search the following
program number (0)/operation is invalid (1)
#4 NE9 : Editing of programs with program numbers
9000 to 9999 are not inhibited (0)/inhibited (1)
#5 CPD : When an NC program is deleted, a
confirmation message and confirmation soft
key are not output (0)/output (1)
#6 PSR : Search for the program number of a protected
program is disabled (0)/enabled (1)
3203 MDI operation
#5 MIE : During MDI operation, program editing is

enabled (0)/disabled (1).
#6 MER : When MDI operation is terminated in single
block mode, program deletion is not performed
(0)/performed (1).
#7 MCL : Whether a program coded in the MDI mode is
cleared by reset (0)/not cleared (1)
3204 MDI panel
#0 PAR : With the MDI panel, [,] is used without

modification (0)/used as (,) (1).
#2 EXK : The [C–EXT] soft key is not used (0)/used (1)
#3 P8E : Editing of 80000000 to 89999999 is not
inhibited (0)/inhibited (1)
#4 P9E : Editing of 90000000 to 99999999 are not
inhibited (0)/inhibited (1)
#5 SPR : Program numbers in the 9000 range for
specific programs are not added (0)/added (1)
with 90000000
#6 MKP : When M02, M30, or EOR(%) is executed
during MDI operation, the created MDI program
is erased automatically (0)/not erased
automatically (1)
3205 Change function of the extended edit
#0 COL : Any colons (:) in the comments of the program

are converted to letter O (0)/displayed or
output as is (1)
#1 CHG : When the change function of the extended edit
function is used, the cursor is moved to the
target position after choosing (0)/before
choosing (1)
249
3216 Increment in sequence numbers inserted PRM 1

automatically 0000#5=1
3230 Program registration
#6 O48 : Program numbers have four digits (0)/eight

digits (1). 2
3290 Parameter for protect of data input
#2 MCV : Macro variable setting by MDI key input is not

disabled (0)/disabled (1)
#6 MCM: Macro variable input from the MDI panel is 3
enabled regardless of which mode is set (0)/
enabled in MDI mode only.
#7 KEY : The KEY1 to KEY4 signals are used (0)/KEY1
is used for program protection (1).
4
3291 Memory protection
#0 WPT : The input of the tool offset amount is enabled

according to signal KEY1 (0)/enabled
regardless (1)
5
15) Parameters for programs

3401 Parameter for G code
#0 DPI : When a decimal point is omitted in an address, Calculation

the least input increment is assumed (0)/the type
unit of mm, inches, or sec. is assumed (1) 7
#4 MAB : When in the MDI operation, switching between
the absolute and incremental commands is
performed by G90 or G91 (0)/depending on the
ABS setting in parameter 3401#5 (1)
#5 ABS : When in the MDI operation, program command PRM 8
is assumed as an incremental command (0)/ 3401#4=1
absolute command (1)
3402 Parameter for G code
#0 G01 : When the power is turned, the mode is G00 9

(0)/G01 (1)
#1 G18 : When the power is turned, the mode is
G17/G18/G19
#2 G19 : When the power is turned, the mode is
G17/G18/G19 10
G19 G18 G17, G18, or G19 mode
0 0 G17 mode (plane XY)
0 1 G18 mode (plane ZX)
1 0 G19 mode (plane YZ)
#3 G91 : When the power is turned, the mode is G90
(0)/G91 (1)
#6 CLR : Cause reset state the CNC with Reset
signal(0)/cause clear state (1)
250
8. PARAMETERS
3403 Circular interpolation
#5 CIR : When R, I, J, and K are not specified for ALM022

circular interpolation, a linear movement is
made (0)/an alarm is issued (1).
#6 AD2 : Specification of the same address two or more ALM5074
times in a block is enabled (0)/disabled (1)
3404 Parameter for M function
#0 NOP : In program execution, only O, EOB, and N are

not ignored (0)/ignored (1).
#1 POL : For a command address allowing a decimal ALM5073
point, omission of the decimal point is enabled
(0)/disabled (1)
#4 M30 : When M30 is read, the cursor returns to the
beginning of the program (0)/does not return to
the beginning of the program (1).
#5 M02 : The cursor returns to the beginning of the
program when M02 is read (0)/not return (1)
#6 EOR : When EOR(%) is read, an alarm is issued (0)/ ALM 5010
not issued (1).
#7 M3B : The number of M code that can be specified in
one block is one (0)/three (PMi–D) or five
(PMi–H) (1)
3406 G code clear PRM

3402#6=1
#1 C01 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 01 are

cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
3407 G code clear PRM

3402#6=1

3409 Clear F and H codes
#7 CFH : Specifies whether to clear (0) F and H codes or

not (1) when a reset occurs with parameter
CLR (bit 6 of No. 3402) = 1.
3410 Tolerance of arc radius [Setting unit]
251
3411 M code preventing buffering 1 1

3412 M code preventing buffering 2
L L
3419 M code preventing buffering 9 2

3420 M code preventing buffering 10
16) Parameters for Pitch Error Compensation

3
3620 Number of the pitch error compensation point Valid data

for the reference position for each axis range :
0 - 1023 4
3621 Number of pitch error compensation points of <Axis>
negative direction for each axis
3622 Number of pitch error compensation points of

positive direction for each axis
5
3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for <Axis>
each axis (0–100)
3624 Interval between pitch error compensation <Axis>

points for each axis [Setting unit]
6
17) Parameters for Spindle Control

7
3701 Parameter for the number of connections in PMi–D
serial spindle control
#1 ISI : Specifies whether the serial spindle interface is

used (0)/note used (1)
8
3702 Parameter for spindle orientation function PMi–D
(O.S.S)
#2 OR1 : The stop position external-setting type

orientation function O.S.S is not used at the
spindle motor (0)/used (1)
9
10
252
8. PARAMETERS
3705 Parameter for gear shift of spindle PMi–D
#0 ESF : The SF signal output condition is such that S PRM

codes and SF are output with all S commands 3705#5
(0)/not output when constant surface speed
control is used or the spindle speed is clamped
(1).
#1 GST : The SOR signal is used for spindle orientation PRM3751,
(0)/gear shift (1) 3752
#2 SGB : The gear switching method is method A
(PRM3741, 3743) (0)/ method B (PRM3751,
3752)(1)
#3 SGT : The gear switching method during G84 and PRM3761,
G74 is method A (0)/method B (1) 3762
#5 NSF : When an S code command is issued in
constant surface-speed control, SF is output
(0)/not output (1)
#6 SFA : The SF signal is output when gears are
switched (0)/irrespective of whether gears are
switched (1)
3706 Parameter for the voltage polarity of spindle PMi–D
#0 PG1 : The gear ratio of spindle to position coder SLPCA

( 1, 2, 4, 8) signal
#1 PG2 : The gear ratio of spindle to position coder SLPCB
( 1, 2, 4, 8) signal
#4 GTT : Spindle gear selection is based on M type (0)/ PRM
T type (1). 3705#0
#5 ORM : The voltage polarity during spindle orientation
is positive (0)/negative (1)
#6 CWM : The voltage polarity when the spindle speed
voltage is output
#7 TCW : The voltage polarity when the spindle speed
voltage is output
PG2 PG1 TCW CWM Volt. polarity
1 0 0 0 0 M03, M04 = +
2 0 1 0 1 M03, M04 = –
4 1 0 1 0 M03 = +, M04 = –
8 1 1 1 1 M03 = –, M04 = +
3708 Parameter for spindle speed arrival signal PMi–D
#0 SAR : The spindle speed arrival signal is not checked SAR signal
(0)/checked (1)
3715 Confirmation of the spindle speed signal PMi–D
#0 NSAx : This parameter specifies an axis for which

confirmation of the spindle speed reached
signal (SAR) is necessary (0)/unnecessary
(1)
3730 Dta used for adjusting the gain of the analog PMi–D
output of spindle speed [0.1%]
3731 Compensation value for the offset voltage of PMi–D

the analog output of the spindle speed
253
3732 The number of spindle revolutions during PRM 1

spindle orientation or the spindle motor velocity 3705#1
during spindle gear shift [min–1] PMi–D
For a serial spindle
Spindle motor speed during spindle
Set value =
gear shift 2
Maximum spindle motor speed
16383
For an analog spindle
Spindle motor speed during spindle
gear shift
Set value =
3
4095
3735 Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor PMi–D

Minimum clamp speed of the
Set value =
spindle motor 4
4095
3736 Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor PMi–D

Maximum clamp speed of the 5
spindle motor
Set value =
4095
3740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle PMi–D

speed arrival signal (SAR) [msec]
6
3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 [min–1] PMi–D
3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 [min–1] PMi–D 7

3751 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear PMi–D

1 to gear 2 PRM
3705#2=1 8
3752 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear
2 to gear 3
Spindle motor speed when the
gears are switched
Set value =
9
4095
3761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to PMi–D

gear 2 during tapping [min–1] PRM
3705#3=1
3762 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to 10
gear 3 during tapping [min–1]
3770 Axis as the calculation reference in constant PMi–D

surface speed control
3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant PMi–D

surface-speed control mode (G96) [min–1]
3772 Maximum spindle speed [min–1] PMi–D
254
8. PARAMETERS
[Parameters for serial spindle (a series spindle amplifier)]
4000 Parameter of rotation direction of spindle
#0 ROTA1 : The spindle and the spindle motor rotate

to the same direction (0)/ to the opposite
direction each other (1)
#1 ROTA2 : The spindle rotate to CCW with
+command (0)/to CW (1)
#2 POSC1 : The spindle and the position coder rotate
the same direction (0)/ the opposite
direction each other (1)
#3 RETRN : The direction of return to reference From
position is CCW (0)/ CW (1) spindle side
#5 DEFMOD : The differential speed function is not used
(0)/used (1)
#6 DEFDRT : The direction to which the differential
speed function is applied and the direction
specified in the feedback signal is the
same (0)/reversed (1)
4001 Parameter for magnetic senser, position coder,

or MRDY signal
#0 MRDY1 : The MRDY signal is not used (0)/used (1)

#2 POSC2 : The position coder is not used (0)/used (1)
#3 MGSEN: The magnetic senser and the spindle rotate
to the same direction (0)/opposite direction
each other (1)
255
4003 Position coder, orientation 1

#0 PCMGSL : The system of the orientation is position
coder system (0)/magnetic senser system
(1)
#1 PCCNCT : A motor’s built-in sensor is not used (0)/ 2
used (1).
#2 DIRCT1 : The direction of rotation at the spindle
orientation
#3 DIRCT2 : The direction of rotation at the spindle
orientation
3
DIRECT 2 DIRECT 1
0 0 Direction of rotation
immediately before
spindle orientation
0 1 Direction of rotation 4
immediately before
spindle orientation
1 0 The counter-clockwise
in view of the motor
shaft 5
0 1 The clockwise in view
of the motor shaft
#4 PCTYPE : Position coder signal setting (See the

table below.) 6
#6 PCPL1 : Position coder signal setting (See the
table below.)
#7 PCPL2 : Position coder signal setting (See the
table below.)
High- 7
Built-in resolution
PCPL2 PCPL1 PCTYPE Remarks
sensor magnetic
pulse coder
0 0 0 256 λ/rev 65 φ Position coder,
high-resolution
position coder
8
0 0 1 128 λ/rev – –
0 1 0 512 λ/rev 130 φ –
0 1 1 64 λ/rev – –
1 0 0 – 195 φ –
9
1 1 0 384 λ/rev 97.5 φ –
4004 Detector selection
#0 HRPC : A high-resolution position coder is not used

(0)/used (1). 10
#1 SPDBIS : A separate built-in sensor is not used (0)/
used (1).
#2 EXTRF : The external one-rotation signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#3 REFTYP : The external one-rotation signal is detected
on its rising edge (0)/falling edge (1).
#4 BISGAN : A standard built-in sensor is used (0)/a PRM
built-in sensor with a non-standard gain is 4003#1=1
used (1).
256
8. PARAMETERS
4006 Gear ratio resolution
#1 GRUNIT : The gear ratio resolution is 0.01 (0)/0.001 PRM4056

(1). to 4059
#2 SPDUNT : The unit of motor speed is 1 min–1 (0)/10
min–1 (1).
#3 SYCREF : In spindle synchronization, the
one-rotation signal is automatically
detected (0)/not detected (1).
#5 ALGOVR : The spindle analog override value is 0% to
100% (0)/0% to 120% (1).
#6 PRMCHK : Parameters are transferred from the NC
(0)/the data being used currently is
checked (1).
#7 BLTRGD : Rigid tapping using a motor’s built-in
sensor is not performed (0)/performed (1).
4007 Alarm related to the position coder–signal
#5 PCLS : Disconnection of a high-resolution

magnetic pulse coder and position coder is
detected (0)/not detected (1).
#6 PCALCL : Alarms related to the position coder signal
are detected (0)/not detected (1).
#7 PHAICL : Motor voltage pattern when no load is
applied
4009 Velocity loop gain
#0 VLPGAN : The setting of a velocity loop gain is used

without modification (0)/used after division
by 16 (1).
#1 RVSVCM : In slave operation, the sub-spindle and
main spindle rotate in the same direction
(0)/opposite directions (1).
#2 ALSP : When a serial communication alarm is
issued, the power is not turned off until the
motor has stopped (0)/the power is turned
off immediately (1).
#3 PCGEAR : The arbitrary gear function between the
spindle and position coder is disabled (0)/
enabled (1).
#4 LDTOUT : During acceleration/deceleration, the load Depends
detection signal is not output (0)/output on the
(1). motor
model.
#5 TRSPRM : Output compensation method
#6 OVRTYP : Analog override is of linear function type
(0)/quadratic function type (1).
257
4011 Number of speed detector pulses 1

#0 VDT1 : Speed detector setting (Following table)
VDT3 VDT2 VDT1 Number of pulse 2
0 0 0 64 λ/rev
0 0 1 128 λ/rev
0 1 0 256 λ/rev
0 1 1 512 λ/rev
1 0 0 192 λ/rev 3
1 0 1 384 λ/rev
#3 POLE1: The number of motor poles is 2 (0)/4 (1).
#4 MXPW : Setting of maximum power during
acceleration/deceleration (for each model)
#5 ADJG : Acceleration/deceleration status 4
determination condition (for each model)
#7 POLE2: The number of motor poles is set by bit 3 (0)/
is 8 (1).
4012 PWM setting

5
#0 PWM1 :
#1 PWM2 : } PWM setting (Set 00 usually.)
4013 Data of the dead zone of current
#0 ESEC : The position coder one-rotation signal is 6

detected on either edge (0)/on the rising
edge at all times (1).
#2 DS1 :
#3 DS2 :
The data of the dead zone of current 7
#4 DS3 :
(Set automatically)
#5 DS4 :
#6 DS5 :
#7 PWM3K: Setting of a PWM carrier wave in the
output switching low-speed characteristics
area (for each model) 8
4014 Spindle switching, MCC confirmation
#0 AXISSL : The spindle switching function is disabled

(0)/enabled (1).
#1 AXSUB : During sub-spindle rotation, the spindle 9
switching function is disabled (0)/enabled
(1).
#2 AXSLCT : The spindle switching (between the main
spindle and sub-spindle) MCC contact
check function is disabled (0)/enabled (1). 10
#3 CHGCLT: Output switching (between high speed and
low speed) is checked using the RCH
signal (0)/the MCC contact signal (1).
#5 SLVEN : The slave operation function is disabled
(0)/enabled (1).
258
8. PARAMETERS
4015 Parameter of rotation direction of spindle
#0 ORIENT : The orientation function is not provided (0)/ Automatic

provided (1) setting by
#1 SPLDMT: The spindle load monitor function is NC option,
disabled (0)/enabled (1). Need not
#2 SPDSW : The output switching function is not changed
provided (0)/provided (1)
4016 One-rotation signal error detection function
#3 FFSMTH: The feed-forward smoothing function is

#6 RFCHK2 : The position coder one-rotation signal error
detection function is disabled (0)/enabled
(1).
#7 RFCHK3 : In spindle orientation or rigid tapping
reference position return mode, the position
coder one-rotation signal is not detected
again (0)/detected again (1).
4017 One-rotation signal error detection function
#2 RFCHK4 : During normal rotation, the position coder

one-rotation signal error detection function
is disabled (0)/enabled (1).
#7 NRROEV : With an orientation command from the
stop state, the shortcut function is
4019
#2 SSTTRQ : When the speed is 0, speed clamping is

#4 SDTCHG : In output switching, the function for
switching at a speed detection level or
lower operates independently of speed
detection (0)/at the speed detection level
or lower (1).
#7 PRLOAD : Automatic parameter setting is not
performed (0)/performed (1).
4020 Maximum motor speed [min–1]
4022 Speed arrival detection level [0.1%]
4023 Speed detection level [0.1%]
4024 Speed zero detection level [0.01%]
4025 Torque limit value [%]
4026 Load detection level 1 (LDT1 signal) [%]
4027 Load detection level 2 (LDT2 signal) [%]
4028 Output limit pattern
4029 Output limit value [%]
4030 Soft start (0)/stop time (1) [min–1/sec]
4031 Position coder method orientation stop position
259
4038 Spindle orientation speed [min–1] 1

4039 Slip compensation gain
4040 Normal velocity loop proportional gain

(High gear)
2
4041 Normal velocity loop proportional gain
(Low gear)
4042 Velocity loop proportional gain during

orientation (High gear)
3
orientation (Low gear)
4044 Velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode

(High gear)
4
4045 Velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode
(Low gear)
4048 Normal velocity loop integral gain (High gear)
4049 Normal velocity loop integral gain (Low gear) 5

4050 Velocity loop integral gain during orientation
(High gear)

(Low gear)
6
4052 Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode
(High gear)
4053 Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode

(Low gear)
7
4056 Number of motor rotation in one revolution of
the spindle (High gear) [ 100]
4057 Number of motor rotation in one revolution of 8

the spindle (Medium high gear) [ 100]

the spindle (Medium low gear) [ 100]
9
the spindle (Low gear) [ 100]
4060 Position gain during orientation (High gear)
4061 Position gain during orientation 10

(Medium high gear)
4062 Position gain during orientation

(Medium low gear)
4063 Position gain during orientation (Low gear)
4064 Position gain change ratio when orientation is

completed [%]
260
8. PARAMETERS
4065 Position gain in servo mode (High gear)
4066 Position gain in servo mode

(Medium high gear)
4067 Position gain in servo mode

(Medium low gear)
4068 Position gain in servo mode (Low gear)
4075 Orientation completion signal detection level
4076 Motor velocity limit value during orientation [%]
4077 Orientation stop position shift amount [%]
4078 MS signal constant (Magnetic senser system

orientation)
4079 MS signal gain adjustment (Magnetic senser

system orientation)
4080 Regenerative power limit
4081 Delay time prior motor power shut-off [msec]
4082 Acceleration/deceleration time setting [sec]
4083 Motor voltage during normal rotation [%]
4084 Motor voltage during orientation [%]
4085 Motor voltage in servo mode [%]
4087 Over-speed detection level [%]
4088 Excessive velocity deviation detection level

when the motor is constrained [0.01%]
4089 Excessive velocity deviation detection level

when the motor is rotated [0.1%]
4090 Overload detection level [%]
4091 Position gain change ratio when returning to

the origin in the servo mode [%]
4095 Speed meter output voltage adjustment value

[0.1%]
4096 Load meter output voltage adjustment value

[0.1%]
4098 Speed that enables position coder signal

detection [min–1]
4099 Delay time for energizing the motor [msec]
4100 Base velocity of the motor output specification

[min–1]
4101 Limit value of the motor output specification [%]
4102 Base speed [min–1]
4103 Magnetic flux weakening start velocity [min–1]
261
4104 Current loop proportional gain during normal 1

operation
4105 Current loop proportional gain when the Cs

axis is controlled
4106 Current loop integral gain during normal 2

operation
4107 Current loop integral gain when the Cs axis is

controlled
4108 Zero point of current loop integral gain 3

4109 Current loop proportional gain velocity factor
[%]
4110 Current conversion sconstant

4
4111 Secondary current factor for exceiting current
4112 Current expectation constant
4113 Slip constant

5
4114 High-speed rotation slip compensation
constant
4115 Compensation constant of voltage applied to

motor in the dead zone [%]
6
4116 Electromotive force compensation constant [%]
4117 Electromotive force phase compensation

constant [%]
4118 Electromotive force compensation velocity 7

factor [%]
4119 Time constant of voltage filter for electromotive

force compensation [msec]
4120 Dead zone compensation data [%]

8
4121 Time constant for changing the torque [msec]
4122 Velocity filter [0.1 msec]
4123 Overload detection time setting [sec] 9

4124 Voltage compensation factor during
deceleration
4125 Time during automatic running [0.1sec]

10
4126 Velocity command during automatic running
[min–1]
4127 Load meter displayed value for maximum

output [%]
4128 Maximum output zero point [min–1]
4129 Secondary current factor during rigid tapping
262
8. PARAMETERS
4130 Constant for compensating for the phase of the

electromotive force at deceleration
4132 Conversation constant of the phase-V current
4133 Motor model code
[Parameter for low speed driving when the output switching function is used]
4136 Motor voltage during normal rotation [%]
4137 Motor voltage in the servo mode [%]
4138 Base speed of the motor output specifications

[min–1]
4139 Limit value of the motor output specifications

[%]
4140 Base speed [min–1]
4141 Magnetic flux weakening start velocity [min–1]
4142 Current loop proportional gain during normal

operation
4143 Current loop integral gain during normal

operation
4144 Zero speed of the current loop integral gain
4145 Velocity factor of the current loop proportional

gain [%]
4146 Current conversion constan
4147 Secondary current factor for activating current
4149 Slip constant
4150 High speed rotation slip compensation constant
4151 Compensation constant for voltage applied to

motor in the dead zone [%]
4152 Electromotive force compensation constant [%]
4153 Electromotive force phase compensation

constant [%]
4154 Voltage factor of the electromotive force

compensation [%]
4155 Voltage compensation factor during

deceleration
4156 Slip compensation gain
4157 Time constant for changing the torque [msec]
4158 Maximum output zero point [min–1]
263
4159 Secondary current factor during rigit tapping 1

4160 Hysteresis of the speed detection level
4161 Constsnt for compensating for the phase of the

electromotive for at deceleration
2
4164 Conversion constant of phase V current
4165 Time constant of voltage filter for eletromotive

force compensation
4166 Regenerative power limit 3

4167 Reserved
4168 Overload current alarm detection level

(for low speed characteristic)
4
4169 Overload current alarm detection time constant

(for high speed characteristic)
4171 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and 5

Position coder
(HIGH no. of teeth on the spindle)
4172 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and

position coder (HIGH no. of teeth on PC)
6
position coder (LOW no. of teeth on spindle)

position coder (LOW no. of teeth on PC)
7
4175 Delay timer at ON of electromagnetic contactor
in unit (S series)
Spindle analog override zero level (α series)
[Parameters for spindle switching function is used (Sub–spindle)] 8
4176 Bit parameter

to 9
4190
4191 Bit parameter (User can not set)
4192 Bit parameter

to
10
4194
4195 Bit parameter (Automatic setting by parameter)
4196 Maximum motor speed
4197 Reached speed level
4198 Speed detection level
4199 Speed zero detection level
264
8. PARAMETERS
4200 Torque limit value
4201 Load detection level 1
4202 Output limit pattern
4203 Output limit value
4204 Position coder method orientation stop position
4205 Orientation speed
4206 Proportional gain (HIGH) of the normal velocity

loop
4207 Proportional gain (LOW) of the normal velocity

loop

orientation (HIGH)

orientation (LOW)
4210 Velocity loop proportional gain in the servo

mode (HIGH)
4211 Velocity loop proportional gain in the servo

mode (LOW)
4212 Normal velocity loop integral gain
4214 Velocity loop integral gain in the servo mode

(HIGH)
4215 Reserved
4216 Gear ratio (HIGH)
4217 Gear ratio (LOW)
4218 Position gain during orientation (HIGH)
4219 Position gain during orientation (LOW)
4220 Position gain change ratio when orientation is

completed
4221 Position gain in the servo mode (HIGH)
4222 Position gain in the servo mode (LOW)
4223 Grid shift amount in the servo mode
4224 Reserved
4225 Reserved
4226 Detection level of orientation completion signal
4227 Motor velocity limit value during orientation
4228 Shift amount of orientation stop position
4229 MS signal constant = (L/2)/(2 π H) 4096
265
4230 MS signal gain adjustment 1

4231 Regenerative power limit
4232 Delay time up to motor power shut–off
4233 Acceleration/deceleration time setting 2

4234 Spindle load monitor observer gain 1
4236 Motor voltage during normal rotation 3

4237 Motor voltage during orientation
4238 Motor voltage in the servo mode
4239 Position gain change ratio when returning to

the origin in the servo mode
4
4242 Reserved

position coder 5
(SUB/HIGH no. of teeth on spindle)

position coder (SUB/HIGH no. of teeth on PC)
4245 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and 6

position coder
(SUB/LOW no. of teeth on spindle)

position coder (SUB/LOW no. of teeth on PC)
7
4247 Spindle load monitor magnetic flux
compensation time constant (for high–speed
characteristic on the MAIN side)
4248 Spindle load motor torque constant (for

high–speed characteristic on the MAIN side)
8
(on the MAIN side)

(on the MAIN side)
9
compensation time constant (for low–speed
characteristic on the MAIN side)
10
compensation time constant
(for high–speed characteristic)

compensation time constant
(for low–speed characteristic)
4254 Slip correction gain

266
8. PARAMETERS
4255 Slip correction gain

4256 Base velocity of the motor output specifications
4257 Limit value for the motor output specifications
4258 Base speed
4259 Magnetic flux weakening start velocity
4260 Current loop proportional gain during normal

operation

operation
4262 Zero point of current loop integral gain
4263 Velocity factor of current loop proportional gain
4264 Current conversion constant
4265 Secondary current factor for excitation current
4267 Slip constant
4268 Compensation constant for high–speed rotation

slip

motor in the dead zone
4270 Electromotive force compensation constant

4271 Phase compensation constant of electromotive
force
4272 Compensation velocity factor for electromotive
force
4273 Time constant for changing the torque
4274 Displayed value of load meter for maximum
output
4275 Maximum output zero point
4276 Secondary current factor in rigid tapping
4277 Constant for compensating for the phase of
the electromotive force at deceleration
4278 Time constant of the speed detection filter
4279 Reserved
force compensation
4281 Spindle load monitor torque constant (for
low–speed characteristic on the MAIN side)
267
4282 Spindle load monitor torque constant 1

4283 Spindle load monitor torque constant
2
[If the spindle switching function is provided: If the output switching function
is also used on the SUB–spindle side]

3
4284 Motor voltage during normal rotation
4285 Motor voltage in the servo mode
4286 Base speed of the motor output specifications
4287 Limit value for the motor output specifications 4
4288 Base speed
4289 Magnetic flux weakening start velocity
4290 Current loop proportional gain during normal 5
operation
operation
4292 Zero point of current loop integral gain 6
4293 Velocity factor of current loop proportional gain
4294 Current conversion constant
4295 Secondary current factor for excitation current
7
4297 Slip constant
4298 Compensation constant for high–speed rotation
slip 8
motor in the dead zone
4300 Electromotive force compensation constant
4301 Phase compensation constant for 9
electromotive force
4302 Compensation velocity factor for electromotive
force
4303 Time constant for changing the torque 10
4304 Maximum output zero point
4305 Secondary current factor in rigid tapping
4306 Constant for compensating for the phase of the
electromotive force at deceleration
4307 Limit of regenerative power
voltage compensation
268
8. PARAMETERS
4309 Motor model code

4310 Reserved
4311 Reserved
4312 Position coder method orientation end signal
width 2 (MAIN)
4313 Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal
width 1 (MAIN)
width 2 (MAIN)
4315 Magnetic sensor method orientation stop
position shift amount (MAIN)
4316 Position coder method orientation end signal
width 2 (SUB)
width 1 (SUB)
width 2 (SUB)
4319 Magnetic sensor method orientation stop
position shift amount (SUB)
4320 Spindle orientation deceleration constant
(MAIN/HIGH)
deceleration (MAIN/MEDIUM HIGH)
deceleration (MAIN/MEDIUM LOW)
deceleration (MAIN/LOW)
deceleration (SUB/HIGH)
deceleration (SUB/LOW)
4326 Width of pulses when switching to the spindle
orientation control mode (MAIN)
4327 Width of pulses when switching to the spindle
orientation control mode (SUB)
4328 Position coder–based spindle orientation
command multiplication (MAIN)
4329 Position coder–based spindle orientation
command multiplication (SUB)
4330 Motor excitation delay time at spindle
orientation (MAIN)
4331 Motor excitation delay time at spindle
orientation (SUB)
4332 Reserved
269
4333 Reserved 1
4334 No. of arbitrary pulses of speed detector
(MAIN)
4335 No. of arbitrary pulses of speed detector (SUB)
4336 Magnetic flux change point for spindle
2
synchronus acc./dec. time calculation.
4337 Velocity compensation factor of velocity loop
gain (MAIN)
4338 Velocity compensation factor of velocity loop 3
gain (SUB)
4339 Torque clamp level
4341 Abnormal load detection level
4
4342 Reserved
4343 Reserved
4346 Incomplete integral coefficient
4348 Overload current alarm detection level 5
(for low speed characteristic)
4349 Overload current alarm detection time constant
(for high speed characteristic) 6
4351 Compensation for current detection offset
18) Parameters for tool offset

7
5001 Parameter for tool offset
#0 TLC : Tool length compensation A·B (0)/Tool length PRM 8

compensation C (1) 5001#1
#1 TLB : Tool length compensation axis is always Z axis
(0)/axis perpendicular to plane specification (1)
(G17, G18, G19 )
#3 TAL : In the tool length compensation C, generates
9
an alarm when two or more axes are offset (0)/
not generate (1)
#6 EVO : Tool offset is effective from next H code (0)/
next block (1)
5003 Parameter for tool offset 10
#6 LVC : Tool compensation vector is not cleared by
reset (0)/cleared by reset (1)
270
8. PARAMETERS
19) Parameters for canned cycles
5101 Parameter for canned cycles PMi–D
#0 FXY : The drilling axis in drilling canned cycle is

always 1st axis (0)/an axis selected using
program (1)
#4 RD1 : Set the axis and direction in which the tool in
G76 and G87 is got free
#5 RD2 : Set the axis and direction in which the tool in
G76 and G87 is got free
RD2 RD1 G17 G18 G19
0 0 +X +Z +Y
0 1 –X –Z –Y
1 0 +Y +X +Z
1 1 –Y –X –Z
#6 M5T : In tapping cycles G74 and G84, output M05
(0)/not output M05 (1) before the spindle
rotation direction is turned to reverse
#7 M5B : In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87, output
M05 before an oriented spindle stop (0)/not
output (1)
5103 Canned cycle PMi–D
#1 QZA : When the specification of the depth of cut (Q) ALM 045
for each time is omitted, or if Q0 is specified in
a high–speed peck drilling canned cycle (G73)
or peck drilling canned cycle (G83) no alarm is
issued (0)/an alarm (No.045) is issued (1)
5114 Return of high-speed, peck drilling cycle G73 PMi–D
5115 Clearance of canned cycle G83 PMi–D
20) Parameters for rigid tapping
5200 Parameter for rigid tapping PMi–D
#0 G84 : G74 and G84 are not used as a rigid tapping G PRM5210
code (0)/used (1)
#1 VGR : Any gear ration between spindle and position PRM3706,
coder in rigid tapping is not used (0)/used (1) 5221 to
5234
#2 CRG : When a rigid mode cancel command is
specified, the rigid mode is not canceled before
RGTAP signal is set low (0)/canceled (1)
#4 DOV : Override during extraction in rigid tapping is PRM5211
invalidated (0)/validated (1)
#5 PCP : In rigid tapping, a high-speed peck tapping PRM5213
cycle is used (0)/not used (1)
#6 FHD : Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping are
validated (0)/invalidated (1)
271
5201 Parameter for rigid tapping PMi–D 1

#2 TDR : Cutting time constant in rigid tapping uses a PRM5261
same parameter during cutting and extraction to 5264,
(0)/not use a same parameter (1) 5271 to
5274
#3 OVU : The increment unit of the override PRM5211 is
2
1% (0)/ 10% (1)
#4 OV3 : Overriding by program is disabled (0)/enabled
(1)
5210 Rigid tapping mode specification M code PMi–D 3

0=M29
5211 Override value during rigid tapping extraction PMi–D

PRM
5200#4
4
5212 M code that specifies a rigid tapping mode PMi–D
(0 – 65535) PRM5210
5213 Escape or cutting start point in peck tapping PMi–D

cycle PRM
5200#5
5
5221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in PMi–D
rigid tapping (1st gear) PRM
5200#1
5222 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in 6
rigid tapping (2nd gear)
5223 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in

rigid tapping (3rd gear)
5231 Number of gear teeth on the position coder 7

side in rigid tapping (1st gear)
5232 Number of gear teeth on the position coder

side in rigid tapping (2nd gear)
5233 Number of gear teeth on the position coder 8

side in rigid tapping (3rd gear)
5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping PMi–D

(1st gear)
5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping 9

(2nd gear)
5243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping

(3rd gear)
5261 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant PMi–D 10

for the spindle and tapping axis PRM
(first–stage gear) [ms] 5201#2
5262 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant

for the spindle and tapping axis
(second–stage gear) [ms]
5263 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant

for the spindle and tapping axis
(third–stage gear) [ms]
272
8. PARAMETERS
5271 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in PMi–D
extraction operation (first–stage gear) [ms] PRM
5201#2
5272 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis
in extraction operation (second–stage gear)
[ms]
5273 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in

extraction operation (third–stage gear) [ms]
5280 Position control loop gain of spindle and PMi–D

tapping axis in rigid tapping PRM5281
(Common in each gear) to 5284
5281 Position control loop gain of spindle and PMi–D

tapping axis in rigid tapping (1st gear) PRM
5280=0
5282 Position control loop gain of spindle and
tapping axis in rigid tapping (2nd gear)
5283 Position control loop gain of spindle and

tapping axis in rigid tapping (3rd gear)
5291 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping PMi–D

mode (for gear 1)
5292 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping

mode (for gear 2)
5293 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping

mode (for gear 3)
5300 Imposition width of tapping axis in rigid tapping PMi–D

[Detection unit]
5301 Imposition width of spindle in rigid tapping PMi–D

[Detection unit]
5310 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation PMi–D

during movement in rigid tapping PRM5314
5311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation PMi–D

during movement in rigid tapping
5312 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation PMi–D

during stop in rigid tapping
5313 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation PMi–D

during stop in rigid tapping
5321 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping PMi–D
5381 Amount of return by rigid tapping return PMi–D
5382 Amount of return for rigid tapping return PMi–D
273
21) Parameters for polar coordinate interpolation

5460 Axis (linear axis) specification for polar
coordinate interpolation
5461 Axis (rotary axis) specification for polar 2

coordinate interpolation
5462 Maximum cutting feedrate during polar

coordinate interpolation [mm/min]
3
22) Parameters for straightness compensation

4
5711 Axis number of moving axis
5721 Axis number of compensation axis 1 for moving

axis
5731 Compensation point number a of moving axis 5

5732 Compensation point number b of moving axis
5733 Compensation point number c of moving axis
5734 Compensation point number d of moving axis 6

5761 Compensation amount at compensation point
number a for a movement axis
5762 Compensation corresponding compensation

point number b of moving axis 7
point number c of moving axis

point number d of moving axis 8
23) Parameters for custom macro
9
6000 Single block
#0 G67 : A G67 specified in modal call cancel mode

issues an alarm (0)/is ignored (1). 10
#1 MGO: When a GOTO statement is executed, a
high–speed branch to 20 sequence numbers
executed from the start of the program is, a
high–speed branch is not caused (0)/a
high–speed branch is caused (1)
#4 HGO : When a GOTO statement is executed a
high–speed branch is not caused (0)/a
high–speed branch is caused (1)
#5 SBM : In the custom macro statement, the single
block stop is not valid (0)/valid (1)
274
8. PARAMETERS
6001 Initialization of the variables, T code call,

PRINT command
#1 PRT : When data is output using a DPRINT

command, outputs a space for reading zero
(0)/outputs no data (1)
#2 VFP : Specifies which to use, a custom macro
statement format (0) / the same format as for
Power Mate–A, B, or C (1), as the common
variable table output format.
#3 PV5 : The output macro variables are #500 and up
(0)/#100 and up and #500 and up (1).
#4 CRO : When ISO code is used in the B/D PRINT O9000
mode, output only “LF” (0)/output “LF” and
“CR” (1)
#5 TCS : Custom macro is not called using a T code (0)/
called (1)
#6 CCV : Common variables #100 through #199 are
cleared to “vacant” by reset (0)/not cleared by
reset (1)
#7 CLV : Local variables #1 through #33 are cleared to
“vacant” by reset (0)/not cleared by reset (1)
6003 Interruption custom macro
#1 MSK : Absolute coordinate during custom macro

interrupt is not set to the skip coordinate (0)/set
(1)
#2 MIN : Custom macro interrupt is Type I (0)/Type II (1)
#3 TSE : Interrupt signal UNIT uses edge trigger method
(0)/status trigger method (1)
#4 MPR : M code for custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M96:
is standard (M96/M97) (0)/using parameter PRM6033
setting (1) to 6034
#5 MSB : The local variable of interrupt program is
macrotype (0)/subprogram type (1)
#6 MCY : Custom macro interrupt during cycle operation
is not performed (0)/performed (1)
#7 MUS : Interrupt-type custom macro is not used (0)/
used (1)
6004 Result of ATAN, ASIN
#0 NAT : Specification of the results of custom macro

functions ATAN and ASIN ATAN = 0 to 360.0
ASIN = 270.0 to 0 to 90.0 (0)/ATAN = –180 to 0
to 180.0 ASIN = –90.0 to 0 to 90.0 (1)
6010 Setting of hole pattern “*” of EIA code (*0 to *7)
6011 Setting of hole pattern “=” of EIA code

(=0 to =7)
6012 Setting of hole pattern “#” of EIA code

(#0 to #7)
6013 Setting of hole pattern “ [ ” of EIA code ([0 to [7)
6014 Setting of hole pattern “ ] ” of EIA code (]0 to ]7)
275
6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt PRM 1

6003#4=1
6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro
interrupt
6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9010 2
number 9011

number 9012 3
number 9013

number 9014 4
number 9015

number 9016
5
number 9017
6058 G code that calls the custom macro of program 6

number 9018

number 9019
6071 M code that calls the subprogram of program 7

number 9001
6072 M code that calls the subprogram of program

number 9002
6073 M code that calls the subprogram of program 8

number 9003
6074 M code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9004
6075 M code that calls the custom macro of program 9

number 9005

number 9006
6077 M code that calls the custom macro of program 10

number 9007

number 9008

number 9009

number 9020
276
8. PARAMETERS

number 9021

number 9022

number 9023

number 9024

number 9025

number 9026

number 9027

number 9028

number 9029
6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of

program number 9004
6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of

program number 9005
24) Parameters for pattern data input
6101 First variable number displayed on pattern data

screen 1

screen 2

screen 3

screen 4

screen 5

screen 6

screen 7

screen 8
277
6109 First variable number displayed on pattern data 1

screen 9

screen 10
2
25) Positioning by optimul acceleration

3
6131 Positioning by optimul acceleration <Axis>
#0 OAD : The function for positioning by optimul

acceleration is disabled (0)/enabled (1)
#1 EOA : Positioning by optimum acceleration is disabled
(0)/enabled (1) for movement by PMC axis 4
control.
6132 Positioning by optimul acceleration
#0 ILG : In the function for positioning by optimum

acceleration, loop gain switching is performed 5
(0)/not performed (1).
6136 Distance D1 to the first stage
6137 Distance D2 to the second stage

6
6138 Distance D3 to the third stage
6141 Distance D1 for level 1 (metric input)

7

8
6151 Distance D1 to the first stage (for inch input)
6152 Distance D2 to the second stage

(for inch input) 9
6153 Distance D3 to the third stage (for inch input)
6154 Distance D4 to the fourth stage (for inch input)
6155 Distance D5 to the fifth stage (for inch input) 10

6156 Distance D6 to the sixth stage (for inch input)
6161 First–stage rapid traverse rate <Axis>
6162 Second–stage rapid traverse rate <Axis>
6163 Third–stage rapid traverse rate <Axis>
6164 Fourth–stage rapid traverse rate <Axis>
6165 Fifth–stage rapid traverse rate <Axis>
278
8. PARAMETERS
6166 Sixth–stage rapid traverse rate <Axis>
6167 Seventh–stage rapid traverse rate <Axis>
6171 First–stage rapid traverse time constant [ms] <Axis>
6172 Second–stage rapid traverse time constant[ms] <Axis>
6173 Third–stage rapid traverse time constant [ms] <Axis>
6174 Fourth–stage rapid traverse time constant [ms] <Axis>
6175 Fifth–stage rapid traverse time constant [ms] <Axis>
6176 Sixth–stage rapid traverse time constant [ms] <Axis>
6177 Seventh–stage rapid traverse time constant <Axis>

[ms]
6181 First–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain <Axis>

[0.01sec–1]
6182 Second–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain <Axis>

[0.01sec–1]
6183 Third–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain <Axis>

[0.01sec–1]
6184 Fourth–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain <Axis>

[0.01sec–1]
6185 Fifth–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain <Axis>

[0.01sec–1]
6186 Sixth–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain <Axis>

[0.01sec–1]
6187 Seventh–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain <Axis>

[0.01sec–1]
6191 Time constant T2 for the first–stage rapid

traverse rapid traverse bell–shaped
acceleration
6192 Time constant T2 for the second–stage rapid

acceleration
6193 Time constant T2 for the third–stage rapid

acceleration
6194 Time constant T2 for the fourth–stage rapid

acceleration
6195 Time constant T2 for the fifth–stage rapid

acceleration
279
6196 Time constant T2 for the sixth–stage rapid 1

acceleration
6197 Time constant T2 for the seventh–stage rapid

acceleration
2
26) Parameters for skip function
3
6200 Parameter for skip function
#0 GSK : For skip, SKIPP (G06.6) is disabled (0)/

enabled (1). 4
#1 SK0 : SKIP and the multi-step skip signal are valid
when set to 1 (0)/0 (1).
#7 SKF : Dry run, override and automatic
acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip
command are disabled (0)/enabled (1) 5
6201 High–speed response function PMi–H
#2 TSE : If a skip is performed by the torque limit skip

(G31P98) command, the tool is retracted
(0)/not retracted (1) by the servo error amount. 6
6202 Multi-step skip signal selection
#0 1S1 : For G31 P1/ G04 Q1, the SKIP signal is not
used (0)/used (1).
#1 1S2 : For G31 P1/ G04 Q1, the SKIP2 signal is not 7
used (0)/used (1).
#2 1S3 : For G31 P1/ G04 Q1, the SKIP3 signal is not
used (0)/used (1).
#3 1S4 : For G31 P1/ G04 Q1, the SKIP4 signal is not
used (0)/used (1). 8
#0 2S1 : For G31 P2/G04 Q2, the SKIP signal is not

used (0)/used (1).
#1 2S2 : For G31 P2/G04 Q2, the SKIP2 signal is not 9
used (0)/used (1).
#2 2S3 : For G31 P2/G04 Q2, the SKIP3 signal is not
used (0)/used (1).
used (0)/used (1). 10

used (0)/used (1).
used (0)/used (1).
used (0)/used (1).
used (0)/used (1).
280
8. PARAMETERS

used (0)/used (1).
used (0)/used (1).
used (0)/used (1).
used (0)/used (1).
#0 DS1 : For G04, the SKIP signal is not used (0)/used

(1).
#1 DS2 : For G04, the SKIP2 signal is not used (0)/used
(1).
(1).
(1).
6209 Dwell skip
#0 DSK : The skip signal SKIPP from the PMC is not

effective (0)/effective (1) for the dwell skip
function.
6210 Size of buffer 1 (system variables 9000 to PMi–H
9099)

9199)

9299)

9399)

9499)

9599)

9699)

9799)
6218 Buffer n (system variable 9n00 to 9n99) PMi–H
#n DIn : Specifies which to store, the absolute

coordinates (0) of the point specified with a
high–speed skip signal that is newly input / the
distance (1) from the point specified with the
previously input high–speed skip signal to the
point specified with the new high–speed skip
signal, to buffer n (system variable 9n00 to
9n99).
281
6220 High–speed skip signal DI3n valid for buffer 1 PMi–H 1

6221 High–speed skip signal DI3n valid for buffer 2 PMi–H


6230 Axis number to be assigned to buffer 1 PMi–H

4

5

6
6240 Compensation amount related to signal 1 PMi–H

7

8
27) Parameters for external data input/output

9
6300 Parameter for external program number search
#4 ESR : External program number search is disabled O4–digit 10

(0)/ enabled (1) only
28) Parameters related to picture displays
6550 Picture display function
#7 DSG : Specifies whether to display (1) the picture

display function soft keys or not (0).
282
8. PARAMETERS
29) Parameters for displaying operation time and number of parts
6700 Parameter for number of parts
#0 PCM : M code that counts the number of machined PRM6710

parts are specified by M02, M30 and PRM
6710 (0)/only M code specified by PRM 6710
(1)
#7 NCT : The operation time and the number of parts are
displayed (0)/not displayed (1).
6710 M code that counts the total number of

machined parts and the number of machined
parts
6711 Number of machined parts
6712 Total number of machined parts
6713 Number of required parts PRTSF

signal
6750 Integrated value of power-on period [Minute]
6751 Operation time [ms]

(Integrated value of time during automatic
operation) I
6752 Operation time [Minute]

(Integrated value of time during automatic
operation) II
6753 Integrated value of cutting time I [ms]
6754 Integrated value of cutting time II [Minute]
6755 Integrated value of general-purpose [ms]

integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON
time I
6756 Integrated value of general-purpose [Minute]

integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON
time II
6757 Operation time [ms]

(Integrated value of one automatic operation
time) I
6758 Operation time [Minute]
(Integrated value of one automatic operation
time) II
283
30) Parameters of position switch functions

6901 Position switch
#0 IGP : During follow–up for the absolute position

detector, position switch signals are output (0)/
not output (1) 2
6910 Axis corresponding to the 1st position switch
6911 Axis corresponding to the 2nd position switch
6912 Axis corresponding to the 3rd position switch 3

6913 Axis corresponding to the 4th position switch
6915 Axis corresponding to the 6th position switch 4


5
6930 Maximum operation range of the 1st position

switch
6931 Maximum operation range of the 2nd position 6

switch
6932 Maximum operation range of the 3rd position

switch
6933 Maximum operation range of the 4th position

7
switch

switch
8
switch

switch
9
switch

switch
10
switch
6950 Minimum operation range of the 1st position

switch
6951 Minimum operation range of the 2nd position

switch
6952 Minimum operation range of the 3rd position

switch
284
8. PARAMETERS
6953 Minimum operation range of the 4th position

switch

switch

switch

switch

switch

switch

switch
31) Parameters for manual handle feed / Interrupts
7100 Parameter for manual pulse generator
#1 THD : Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG

mode is invalid (0)/valid (1)
#2 IHD : The travel increment for manual handle
interrupt is output unit, and acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation is disabled
(0)/input unit, and acceleration/deceleration
after interpolation is enabled (1)
#3 HCL : The clearing of a handle interrupt travel
distance is invalid (0)/valid (1).
#4 HPF : If the specified manual handle feedrate
exceeds the rapid traverse rate, handle pulses
exceeding the rapid traverse rate are ignored
(0)/are not ignored such that the tool is moved
then stopped (1).
7101 Manual pulse generator via I/O Link
#0 IOL : The manual pulse generator used in manual

handle feed is on the main CPU board
(0)/machine operator’s panel for I/O LINK (1).
7102 Rotation direction <Axis>
#0 HNG : Axis movement direction for rotation direction

of manual pulse generator is same in direction
(0) / reverse in direction (1)
7104 Use in the JOG mode or step mode
#6 NJH : The manual pulse generator is enabled in JOG

mode and the step is disabled in step mode
(0)/The manual pulse generator is disabled in
JOG mode and the step is enabled in step
mode (1).
285
7110 Number of manual pulse generator used 1

7113 Manual handle feed magnification m (1–127)
7114 Manual handle feed magnification n (0–1000)
7117 Allowable number of pulses that can be PRM 2

accumulated during manual handle feed 7100#4=0
32) Parameters for butt-type reference position setting

3
7181 First withdrawal distance in butt-type reference

position setting
7182 Second withdrawal distance in butt-type 4

reference position setting
7183 First butting feedrate in butt-type reference

position setting
7184 Second butting feedrate in butt-type reference

5
position setting
7185 Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and

second butting operations) in butt-type
reference position setting 6
7186 Torque limit value in butt-type reference
position setting
33) Parameters for software operator’s panel

7
7200 Parameter for software operator’s panel

8
#0 OP1 : Mode selection is not performed on software
operator’s panel (0) /performed (1)
#1 OP2 : JOG feed axis selection is not performed on
software operator’s panel (0) / performed (1)
#2 OP3 : MPG’s axis selection is not performed on 9
software operator’s panel (0) / performed (1)
#3 OP4 : Override is not performed on software
operator’s panel (0) /performed (1)
#4 OP5 : OBS,SBK,MLK,DRN are not performed on
software operator’s panel (0) / performed (1) 10
#5 OP6 : Protect key is not performed on software
operator’s panel (0) / performed (1)
#6 OP7 : Feed hold is not performed on software
operator’s panel (0) / performed (1)
7201 General–purpose switch
#0 JPC : For the name of a general–purpose switch

function on the software operator’s panel, the
use of full–size characters is not allowed (0)/
allowed (1)
286
8. PARAMETERS
7202
#6 NS2 : The general–purpose switches on the software

operator’s panel are used (0)/not used (1).
#7 NS0 : The software operator’s panel is used (0)/not
used (1).
7210 Numeric key used as the + direction key of the

first axis for jog feed on the software operator’s
panel
7211 Numeric key used as the – direction key of the

first axis for jog feed on the software operator’s
panel
7212 Numeric key used as the + direction key of the

second axis for jog feed on the software
operator’s panel
7213 Numeric key used as the – direction key of the

second axis for jog feed on the software
operator’s panel
7214 Numeric key used as the + direction key of the PMi–H
third axis for jog feed on the software
operator’s panel
7215 Numeric key used as the – direction key of the PMi–H

third axis for jog feed on the software
operator’s panel
7216 Numeric key used as the + direction key of the PMi–H

fourth axis for jog feed on the software
operator’s panel
7217 Numeric key used as the – direction key of the PMi–H

fourth axis for jog feed on the software
operator’s panel
287
7220 Name of general–purpose switch on software 1

operator’s panel
PRM.No.7220 - No.7227 -SIGNAL 1 Sets the

character code
PRM.No.7228 - No.7235 -SIGNAL 2 Sets the 2
character code
character code
character code
3
character code
character code
character code 4
character code
7283 Name of general–purpose switch on software
operator’s panel
5
34) Parameters for the external pulse input
7670 Parameter for the external pulse input 6

#7 EXH : Axis selection by external pulse input. The
magnification is determined with the DI signal
(0)/parameter (1).
7681 Setting 1 for the ratio of an axis shift amount to

7
external pulses (M)
7682 Setting 2 for the ratio of an axis shift amount to

external pulses (N)
8
7701 Number of samplings for input pulse smoothing
#0 SM1 : SM3 SM2 SM1 Number of samplings

#1 SM2 :
0 0 0 4
#2 SM3 :
0 0 1 1 9
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 8
1 0 0 16
1 0 1 4
1 1 0 4 10
1 1 1 4
7710 Setting of the axis number for axial movement

with external pulses
288
8. PARAMETERS
7712 External pulse axis acceleration/deceleration

time constant (0 to 4000)
7713 External pulse axis acceleration/deceleration

FL rate
35) Parameters for axis control by PMC
8001 Parameter for axis control by PMC
#0 MLE : Machine lock for PMC control axis is valid (0)/

invalid (1)
#2 OVE : Dry run and override signals use the same
signal as CNC (0) / PMC particular signal (1)
#3 RDE : Dry run signal for rapid traverse command is
invalid (0) / valid (1)
#5 NCC : If a program command is specified for a ALM139
PMC–controlled axis, an alarm is issued if the
axis is controlled by the PMC, the CNC
command otherwise being valid (0)/an alarm is
always issued (1).
#6 AUX : The number of bytes for the code of an
auxiliary function (12H) command to be output
is 1 (0 to 255) (0)/2 (0 to 65535) (1)
#7 SKE : Skip signal uses same as CNC (0) / PMC SKIP/
particular signal (1) ESKIP
8002 Parametr for axis control by PMC
#0 RPD : Rapid traverse rate of PMC control axis is set

by PRM 1420 (0)/specified by rapid traverse
rate (1)
#1 DWE: With IS-C, dwell is 1 msec (0)/0.1 msec (1).
#2 SUE : In external pulse synchronization,
acceleration/deceleration is enabled
(exponential) (0)/disabled (1).
#3 F10 : Sets the command unit of feedrate per minute
1mm/min (0)/10mm/min (1)
#4 PF1 : Set the the feedrate unit of feed
#5 PF2 :
PF2 PF1 Feedrate unit
0 0 1/1
0 1 1/10
1 0 1/100
1 1 1/1000
#6 FR1 : Set the command unit of feedrate per revolution
#7 FR2 :
FR2 FR1 Metric input Inch input
0 0
0.0001 mm/rev 0.000001 inch/rev
1 1
0 1 0.001 mm/rev 0.00001 inch/rev
1 0 0.01 mm/rev 0.0001 inch/rev
289
8003 Inch input/Metric input 1

#0 PIM : When only the axes controlled by the PMC are
used, the linear axis is influenced (0)/not
influenced (1) by inch/millimeter input.
#7 EA2 : PMC axis control is of the conventional PMi–H
(0)/new type (1).
2
Set it to 1 only if multiple paths are used.
8004 Axis control
#0 CMW : When a move command and auxiliary function ALM130 3

are specified from the CNC, an alarm
(No.130) is issued from the PMC for the same
axis (0)/an axis control command, is executed
(1)
#1 NMT : If the PMC and NC specify commands at the ALM130
same time, an alarm is issued (0)/no alarm is
4
issued if the commands do not include a move
command (1).
#2 JFM : A feedrate for continuous feed is normal (0)/
multiplied by 200 (1).
#5 DSL : If axis switching is specified when axis ALM139 5
switching is disabled, ALM139 is issued (0)/
axis switching is valid for a system not
specified (1).
#6 NCI : In deceleration, an in-position check is made
(0)/not made (1). 6
8005
#2 R10 : When the parameter No.8002#0 is set to 1, the

unit for specifying a rapid traverse rate for the
PMC axis is 1 mm/min (0)/10 mm/min (1) 7
#3 DRR : For cutting feed per rotation in PMC axis
control, the dry run function is disabled (0)/
enabled (1)
8006 PMC/controlled–axis–direction–specific
interlock
8
#3 EDL : In PMC axis control, axis direction interlock is
8010 DI/DO group selection for each axis during PRM 9

PMC axis control 8003#7=0
8022 Upper-limit rate of feed per revolution during

PMC axis control
8028 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant <Axis> 10

for speed commands for PMC axis control or
bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time
constant T1 [ms/1000min–1]
8029 Time constant T2 for the bell–shaped <Axis>

acceleration/deceleration of the speed
command during PMC axis control
290
8. PARAMETERS
36) Parameters for the electronic cam function
8081 Electronic cam function PMi–H
#0 ECM : The electronic cam function is not used

(0)/used (1).
#2 TYB : The electronic cam function conforms to
specification A (0)/B (1).
#3 EXD : Specifies whether to expand (1) the number of
cam figure data items for the electronic cam
function / not (0).
8082 Electronic cam PMi–H
#1 NCP : Specifies whether to use (0) phase matching

for the electronic cam function / not (1).
8086 Axis number of the cam shaft in the electronic PMi–H

cam function
8087 Selection of the follow–up axis in the electronic PMi–H

cam function
8088 Number of cam figure data items PMi–H
8090 Tolerance for follow–up axis speed difference PMi–H

between the beginning and end of
synchronization in the electronic cam function
37) Parameters for two–path control
8100 Two–path control PMi–D
#7 NWR: In two–path control, emergency stop is not PRM

used (0)/used (1) in each path independently. 1803#3
38) Parameters for device
8290 Device number PMi–H
8291 Device type PMi–H
8292 Magnification M of the device axis PMi–H
8294 Limit on the device PMi–H
291
39) Parameters for simple synchronous control

8301 Synchronous control
#7 SOF : The synchronization function is not used (0)/

used (1).
2
8302 Simple synchronous control
#0 ATE : Automatic setting of grid positioning for

simplified synchronous control one pair is
disabled (0)/enabled (1)
#1 ATS : Automatic setting of grid positioning for 3
simplified synchronous control one pair is not
started (0)/started (1)
8303 Spindle synchronous control PMi–H

<Axis> 4
#0 AEx : In simple synchronous control, automatic
setting for grid positioning is disabled (0)/
enabled (1)
#1 ASx : In simple synchronous control, automatic
setting for grid positioning is not started (0)/ 5
started (1)
#7 Sx : In simple synchronous control, the
synchronization function is not used (0)/used
(1)
6
8311 Axis number of the master axis for an axis <Axis>
subject to synchronous control
Set the axis number (1 to 8) of the master axis
for each axis.
8313 Limit of the difference between the amount of 7

positioning deviation of the master and slave
axes (Synchronous control one pair)
[Detection unit]
8314 Allowable error in synchronization error check

8
8315 Maximum compensation value for Alarm 407
synchronization (Synchronous control one pair)
[Detection unit]
8316 Difference between reference counters for 9

master and slave axes [Detection unit]
8317 Torque difference alarm detection time [ms]
8323 Maximum allowable difference between master <Axis>

axis and slave axis positional deviations 10
[Detection unit]
8325 Maximum compensation value for <Axis>

synchronization [Detection unit]
8326 Difference between master axis and slave axis <Axis>

reference counters [Detection unit]
8327 Torque difference alarm detection timer [ms] <Axis>
292
8. PARAMETERS
40) Parameters for multi axis synchronization
8380 Axis number of the parent axis for the multiaxis PMi–H
synchronization function
8381 Axis type of the parent axis for the multiaxis PMi–H
synchronization function
41) Parameters for high–speed position switches
8500, High–speed position switch

8501
E01 to E16 : The corresponding high–speed position

switch is enabled (0)/disabled (1).

8505
D01 to D16 : Specifies which to use, usual type (0) /

direction decision type (1), as an output
scheme for the corresponding high–speed
position switch.

8509
A01 to A16 : Specifies which to use, the negative

direction (0) or positive direction (1), as the
pass direction in which the high–speed
position switch signal is turned on for the
direction decision type.

8513
B01 to B16 : Specifies which to use, the negative

direction (0) or positive direction (1), as the
pass direction in which the high–speed
position switch signal is turned off for the
direction decision type.
8516 Maximum number of high–speed position

switches
8517 First output address for the high–speed

position switch
8520 Axis corresponding to the first high–speed

position switch
8521 Axis corresponding to the second high–speed

position switch
8522 Axis corresponding to the third high–speed

position switch
8523 Axis corresponding to the fourth high–speed

position switch
8524 Axis corresponding to the fifth high–speed

position switch
293
8525 Axis corresponding to the sixth high–speed 1

position switch
8526 Axis corresponding to the seventh high–speed

position switch
8527 Axis corresponding to the eighth high–speed 2

position switch
8528 Axis corresponding to the ninth high–speed

position switch
8529 Axis corresponding to the tenth high–speed 3

position switch
8530 Axis corresponding to the eleventh high–speed

position switch
8531 Axis corresponding to the twelfth high–speed

4
position switch
8532 Axis corresponding to the thirteenth

high–speed position switch
5
8533 Axis corresponding to the fourteenth
high–speed position switch
8534 Axis corresponding to the fifteenth high–speed

position switch
6
8535 Axis corresponding to the sixteenth high–speed
position switch
8550 Maximum value in the operating range of the

first high–speed position switch (for the normal
type) or the point at which the first high–speed 7
position switch turns ON (for the direction
determination type)

second high–speed position switch (for the 8
normal type) or the point at which the second
high–speed position switch turns ON (for the
direction determination type)

third high–speed position switch (for the normal 9
type) or the point at which the third high–speed
determination type)

fourth high–speed position switch (for the
10
normal type) or the point at which the fourth

fifth high–speed position switch (for the normal
type) or the point at which the fifth high–speed
determination type)
294
8. PARAMETERS

sixth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the sixth

seventh high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the seventh

eighth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the eighth

ninth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the ninth

tenth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the tenth

eleventh high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the eleventh

twelfth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the twelfth

thirteenth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the thirteenth

fourteenth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the
fourteenth high–speed position switch turns ON
(for the direction determination type)

fifteenth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the fifteenth
295
8565 Maximum value in the operating range of the 1

sixteenth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the sixteenth
8580 Minimum value in the operating range of the

2
first high–speed position switch (for the normal
type) or the point at which the first high–speed
position switch turns OFF (for the direction
determination type)
3
second high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the second
high–speed position switch turns OFF (for the
direction determination type) 4
third high–speed position switch (for the normal
type) or the point at which the third high–speed
position switch turns OFF (for the direction
determination type) 5
fourth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the fourth
6

fifth high–speed position switch (for the normal
type) or the point at which the fifth high–speed
position switch turns OFF (for the direction 7
determination type)

sixth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the sixth
8

seventh high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the seventh 9

eighth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the eighth 10

ninth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the ninth
296
8. PARAMETERS

tenth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the tenth

eleventh high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the eleventh

twelfth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the twelfth

thirteenth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the thirteenth

fourteenth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the
fourteenth high–speed position switch turns
OFF (for the direction determination type)

fifteenth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the fifteenth

sixteenth high–speed position switch (for the
normal type) or the point at which the sixteenth
42) Others
8650 Key code
#0 RSK : Upon reset, key codes are not passed to the

application (0)/passed to the application (1).
#1 CNA : If an NC alarm is issued while the C executor
user screen is displayed, the screen is
changed according to PRM3111#7 (0)/is not
changed (1).
297
8653 C executor 1
#0 CM1 : When the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key is pressed,
the C executor screen defined by
CRT_USER_AUX is not displayed
(0)/displayed (1).
2
the C executor screen defined by
CRT_USER_MCR is not displayed
(0)/displayed (1).
the C executor screen defined by 3
CRT_USER_MENU is not displayed
(0)/displayed (1).
8661 Size of the variable area
8662 Size of the SRAM Disk 4

8663 Setting of the time zone
8701 Read method
#1 PLD : Read operation is performed after the P-code 5

loader is cleared (0)/without clearing the
P-code loader (1).
#2 WPR: The function that allows parameters that are
rewritten using the PMC window to be enabled
during automatic operation is disabled (0)/ 6
enabled (1)
8705 Analog input function
#1 ADC : The analog input module is not used (0)/used

(1). 7
8706 High–speed response function PMi–H
#4 HMD : Auxiliary functions are not used (0)/used (1)

with the high–speed response function.
#5 CPL : Compile functions using signals are not used 8
(0)/used (1) with the high–speed response
function.
8730 Input voltage offset compensation value for the

analog input module 9
8731 High–speed skip signal PMi–H
#0 to #7 EP1 to EP7 : Specifies whether to use the

high–speed skip signals (bits 0 to
7 of X1003) as a trigger for an 10
interrupt–type PMC (1)/not to use
them for that purpose or use
them in measurement functions
by the high–speed skip signals
(0).
298
8. PARAMETERS
#0 to #7 UP1 to UP7 : Enables (1) / disables (0) the

rising edge (0 → 1) of the
high–speed skip signal (bits 0 to
7 of X1003) as an interrupt for an
interrupt–type PMC or a
high–speed skip signal.
#0 to #7 DN1 to DN7 : Enables (1) / disables (0) the

falling edge (1 → 0) of the
high–speed skip signal (bits 0 to
7 of X1003) as an interrupt for an
interrupt–type PMC or a
high–speed skip signal.
8745 Output address of the M code (high–speed PMi–H

response function)
8746 Start address of the internal PMC relay used PMi–H

with the compile function using a signal
(high–speed response function)
8760 Number of a program transferred to the Power

Mate by using the I/O Link
8781 Amount of DRAM used with the C executor or

FAPT PICTURE [64k Byte]
8790 Timing for executing an auxiliary macro
43) Maintenance
8901 Maintenance
#0 FAN : A fan motor error is detected (0)/not detected

(1). (Use inhibited)
299
9. ERROR CODE LIST
9.1 Alarms Displayed on NC Screen

9.1.1 Program errors (P/S alarm) 1
Number Message Contents
000 PLEASE TURN OFF A parameter which requires the pow-
POWER er off was input, turn off power.
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect

2
parity was input).
Correct the program or tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters

in a block is odd). This alarm will be
generated only when the TV check is 3
effective.
003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the maximum allow-

able number of digits was input. (Re-
fer to the item of max. programmable
dimensions.) 4
004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign “ – ” was input
without an address at the beginning
of a block. Modify the program .
005 NO DATA AFTER The address was not followed by the

ADDRESS appropriate data but was followed by 5
another address or EOB code.
Modify the program.
006 ILLEGAL USE OF Sign “ – ” input error (Sign “ – ” was

NEGATIVE SIGN input after an address with which it
cannot be used. Or two or more “ – ”
signs were input.)
6
Modify the program.
007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL Decimal point “ . ” input error (A deci-

POINT mal point was input after an address
with which it can not be used. Or two
decimal points were input.) 7
Modify the program.
009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT Unusable character was input in sig-

nificant area.
Modify the program.
010 IMPROPER G–CODE An unusable G code or G code corre- 8

sponding to the function not provided
is specified. Modify the program.
011 NO FEEDRATE Feedrate was not commanded to a

COMMANDED cutting feed or the feedrate was inad-
equate. Modify the program. 9
014 CAN NOT COMMAND G95 A synchronous feed is specified
(PM i–D) without the option for synchronous
feed.
Modify the program.
015 TOO MANY AXES An attempt was made to move the 10

COMMANDED machine along axes that exceeded
the maximum allowable number of
simultaneously controlled axes.
Modify the program
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF In circular interpolation (G02 or G03),

RADIUS difference of the distance between
the start point and the center of an
arc and that between the end point
and the center of the arc exceeded
the value specified in parameter No.
3410.
300
9. ERROR CODE LIST

021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS An axis not included in the selected
COMMANDED plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was
commanded in circular interpolation.
Modify the program.
022 NO CIRCLE RADIUS The command for circular interpola-

tion lacks arc radius R or coordinate
I, J, or K of the distance between the
start point to the center of the arc.
027 NO AXES COMMANDED IN No axis is specified in G43 and G44

G43/G44 blocks for the tool length offset type
C.
Offset is not canceled but another
axis is offset for the tool length offset
type C. Modify the program.
028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT In the plane selection command, two

or more axes in the same direction
are commanded.
Modify the program.
029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by H

code is too large.
Modify the program.
030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number specified by H

code for tool length offset is too
large. Modify the program.
031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN In setting an offset amount by G10,

G10 the offset number following address
P was excessive or it was not speci-
fied.
Modify the program.
032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE In setting an offset amount by G10 or

IN G10 in writing an offset amount by system
variables, the offset amount was ex-
cessive.
Modify the program.
044 G27–G30 NOT ALLOWED One of G27 to G30 is commanded in

IN FIXED CYC (PM i–D) canned cycle mode.
Modify the program.
046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE Other than P2 and P3 are comman-

RETURN COMMAND ded for 2nd and 3rd reference posi-
tion return command.
Modify the program.
059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT In an external program number

FOUND search, a specified program number
was not found. Otherwise, a program
specified for searching is being
edited in background processing.
Check the program number and ex-
ternal signal. Or discontinue the
background eiting.
060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT Commanded sequence number was

FOUND not found in the sequence number
search. Check the sequence num-
ber.
070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The memory area is insufficient.

MEMORY Delete any unnecessary programs,
then retry.
301
071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be searched was not
found. Or the program with specified
1
program number was not found in
program number search.
Check the data.
072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored

exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option), 2
200 (option), or 400 (option). Delete
unnecessary programs and execute
program registeration again.
073 PROGRAM NUMBER The commanded program number

ALREADY IN USE has already been used. 3
Change the program number or de-
lete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration
again.
074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM The program number is other than 1

NUMBER to 9999. 4
Modify the program number.
075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a

program whose number was pro-
tected.
076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Address P (program number) was

5
not commanded in the block which
includes an M98, G65, or G66 com-
mand. Modify the program.
077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING The subprogram was called in five

ERROR folds. Modify the program. 6
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence
number which was specified by ad-
dress P in the block which includes
an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not
found. The sequence number speci- 7
fied by a GOTO statement was not
found. Otherwise, a called program
is being edited in background pro-
cessing. Correct the program, or dis-
continue the background editing.
079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR In memory or program collation, a 8

program in memory does not agree
with that read from an external I/O
device. Check both the programs in
memory and those from the external
device.
9
085 COMMUNICATION ERROR When entering data in the memory
by using Reader / Puncher interface,
an overrun, parity or framing error
was generated. The number of bits of
input data or setting of baud rate or
specification No. of I/O unit is incor- 10
rect.
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory
the ready signal (DR) of reader /
puncher was turned off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or
cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is
defective.
302
9. ERROR CODE LIST

087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memory
though the read terminate command
is specified, input is not interrupted
after 10 characters read. I/O unit or
P.C.B. is defective.
090 REFERENCE RETURN The reference position return cannot

INCOMPLETE be performed normally because the
reference position return start point
is too close to the reference position
or the speed is too slow. Separate
the start point far enough from the
reference position, or specify a suffi-
ciently fast speed for reference posi-
tion return. Check the program con-
tents.
091 REFERENCE RETURN Manual reference position return

INCOMPLETE cannot be performed when automat-
ic operation is halted.
092 AXES NOT ON THE The commanded axis by G27 (Refer-

REFERENCE POINT ence position return check) did not
return to the reference position.
093 EXTERNAL SETTING The reference position external set-

INCOMPLETE ting cannot be performed because
the reference position external set-
ting signal is set to 1 in the following
status.
1) When the jog feed mode (JOG) is
not selected.
2) When the jog feed mode (JOG) is
selected, however the signal
ZRN is 0.
3) When the emergency stop signal
ESP is 0.
4) When the parameter APC
No.1815 bit 5 is 0.
(Caution)
With an absolute pulse coder, a ref-
erence point is set up even if the ref-
erence point external setting signal
is set to 1 during movement. In this
case, however, axis movement does
not stop even if the reference point is
set up.
100 PARAMETER WRITE On the PARAMETER (SETTING)

ENABLE screen, PWE (parameter writing en-
abled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, then re-
set the system.
101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power turned off while rewriting
the memory by program edit opera-
tion. If this alarm has occurred,
press <RESET> while pressing
<PROG>, and only the program be-
ing edited will be deleted.
Register the deleted program.
109 FORMAT ERROR IN G08 A value other than 0 or 1 was speci-

fied after P in the G08 code, or no val-
ue was specified.
110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixed decimal

point display data exceeds the allow-
able range. Modify the program.
303
111 CALCULATED DATA The result of calculation turns out to
OVERFLOW be invalid, an alarm No.111 is issued.
1
–1047 to –10–29, 0, 10–29 to 1047
Modify the program.
112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified. (in-

cluding tan 90°)
Modify the program. 2
113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in
custom macro is commanded.
Modify the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR IN There is an error in other formats

MACRO than <Formula>. 3
Modify the program.
115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE A value not defined as a variable

NUMBER number is designated in the custom
macro or in high–speed cycle ma-
chining. 4
Modify the program.
116 WRITE PROTECTED The left side of substitution state-

VARIABLE ment is a variable whose substitution
is inhibited. Modify the program.
118 PARENTHESIS NESTING The nesting of bracket exceeds the

5
ERROR upper limit (quintuple).
Modify the program.
119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative. Or

BCD argument is negative, and other
values than 0 to 9 are present on 6
each line of BIN argument.
Modify the program.
122 FOUR FOLD MACRO The macro modal call is specified

MODAL–CALL four fold.
Modify the program.
7
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command is used dur-
COMMAND IN DNC ing DNC operation.
Modify the program.
124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO – END does not correspond to 1

: 1. Modify the program. 8
125 FORMAT ERROR IN <Formula> format is erroneous.
MACRO Modify the program.
126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1x n x3 is not established.

Modify the program.
9
127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT NC and custom macro commands
IN SAME BLOCK coexist.
Modify the program.
128 ILLEGAL MACRO The sequence number specified in

SEQUENCE NUMBER the branch command was not 0 to
9999. Or, it cannot be searched. 10
Modify the program.
129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT An address which is not allowed in

ADDRESS <Argument Designation > is used.
Modify the program.
130 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION An axis control command was given

by PMC to an axis controlled by
CNC. Or an axis control command
was given by CNC to an axis con-
trolled by PMC. Modify the program.
304
9. ERROR CODE LIST

131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL Five or more alarms have generated
ALARM MESSAGES in external alarm message.
Consult the PMC ladder diagram to
find the cause.
132 ALARM NUMBER NOT No alarm No. concerned exists in ex-

FOUND ternal alarm message clear.
Check the PMC ladder diagram.
133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. Small section data is erroneous in

ALARM MSG external alarm message or external
operator message. Check the PMC
ladder diagram.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC An axis is selected in commanding

CONTROL AXIS by PMC axis control.
Modify the program.
145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN The conditions are incorrect when

POLAR COORDINATE the polar coordinate interpolation
INTERPOLATION starts or it is canceled.
An error is found in the plane selec-
tion. Parameters No. 5460 and No.
5461 are incorrectly specified.
Modify the value of program or pa-
rameter.
146 IMPROPER G CODE G codes which cannot be specified

in the polar coordinate interpolation
mode was specified. See Chapter 4
and modify the program.
190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT In the constant surface speed con-

(PM i–D) trol, the axis specification is wrong.
(See parameter No. 3770.) The spe-
cified axis command (P) contains an
illegal value.
Modify the program.
199 MACRO WORD Undefined macro word was used.

UNDEFINED Modify the custom macro.
200 ILLEGAL S CODE In the rigid tap, an S value is out of

COMMAND the range or is not specified.
(PM i–D) Modify the program.
201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN In the rigid tap, no F value is speci-

RIGID TAP fied.
202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW In the rigid tap, spindle distribution

(PM i–D) value is too large.
203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M
TAPPING code (M29) or an S command is in-
(PM i–D) correct. Modify the program.
204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In the rigid tap, an axis movement is

(PM i–D) specified between the rigid M code
(M29) block and G84 or G74 block.
Modify the program.
205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL Rigid mode DI signal is not ON when

OFF G84 or G74 is executed though the
(PM i–D) rigid M code (M29) is specified.Con-
sult the PMC ladder diagram to find
the reason the DI signal
(DGNG061.1) is not turned on.
206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE Plane changeover was instructed in

(RIGID TAP) the rigid mode.
305
207 RIGID DATA MISMATCH In rigid tapping, the lead is too short
(PM i–D) or long.
1
Review the lead.
213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Movement is commanded for the

SYNCHRO–MODE axis to be synchronously controlled.
Any of the following alarms occurred
in the operation with the simple syn- 2
chronization control.
1) The program issued the move
command to the slave axis.
2) The program issued the manual
continuous feed/manual handle 3
feed/incremental feed command
to the slave axis.
3) The program issued the auto-
matic reference position return
command without specifying the
manual reference position return 4
after the power was turned on.
4) The difference between the posi-
tion error amount of the master
and slave axes exceeded the
value specified in parameter
NO.8313. 5
214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Coordinate system is set in the syn-
SYNCHRO–MODE chronous control. Modify the pro-
gram.
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE Reference position return has not

POINT been performed before the automat- 6
ic operation starts. Perform refer-
ence position return only when bit 0
of parameter 1005 is 0.
231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 Any of the following errors occurred

OR L50 in the specified format at the pro- 7
grammable–parameter input.
1) Address N or R was not entered.
2) A number not specified for a pa-
rameter was entered.
3) The axis number was too large. 8
4) An axis number was not speci-
fied in the axis–type parameter.
5) An axis number was specified in
the parameter which is not an
axis type. Correct the program.
Modify the program.
9
233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a
unit such as that connected via the
RS–232–C interface, other users
were using it.
10
239 BP/S ALARM While punching was being per-
formed with the function for control-
ling external I/O units ,background
editing was performed.
240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed

during MDI operation.
5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified.
I/O is incorrect. modify the program.
306
9. ERROR CODE LIST

5011 PARAMETER ZERO The maximum cutting feedrate (pa-
(CUT MAX) rameter No. 1422)is 0 in the HPCC
mode.
5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER The parameter settings for straight-

(ST.COMP) ness compensation contain an error.
Possible causes are as follows:
1) A parameter for a movement axis
or compensation axis contains
an axis number which is not
used.
2) More than 128 pitch error com-
pensation points exist between
the negative and positive end
points.
3) Compensation point numbers for
straightness compensation are
not assigned in the correct order.
4) No straightness compensation
point exists between the pitch er-
ror compensation points at the
negative and positive ends.
5) The compensation value for
each compensation point is too
large or too small.
5051 M–NET CODE ERROR Abnormal character received (other

than code used for transmission)
5052 M–NET ETX ERROR Abnormal ETX code
5053 M–NET CONNECT ERROR Connection time monitoring error

(parameter No. 175)
5054 M–NET RECEIVE ERROR Polling time monitoring error

(parameter No. 176)
5055 M–NET PRT/FRT ERROR Vertical parity or framing error
5057 M–NET BOARD SYSTEM Transmission timeout error

DOWN (parameter No. 177)
ROM parity error
CPU interrupt other than the above
5120 NON A/D MODULE The analog input module is not con-
nected although the analog input
module enable parameter is set.
5121 A/D MODULE A/D converter error.

Replace the module.
5130 FRAME INSPECTION In the I/O LINK, the frame inspection

SEQUENCE CONTAINS AN sequence contains an error.
ERROR
5131 DATA LINK PROCEDURE In the I/O LINK, the data link proce-
CONTAINS AN ERROR dure contains an error.
5132 COMMUNICATION In the I/O LINK, the communication

MONITORING TIMEOUT monitoring timeout was detected.
WAS DETECTED
5133 OVERRUN ERROR WAS In the I/O LINK, an overrun error was
DETECTED detected.
5134 FSSB : OPEN READY TIME Initialization did not place FSSB in
OUT the open ready state.
5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE FSSB has entered error mode.
307
5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS In comparison with the number of
IS SMALL controlled axes, the number of am-
1
plifiers recognized by FSSB is not
enough.
5137 FSSB : CONFIGURATION FSSB detected a configuration error.

ERROR
2
5138 FSSB : AXIS SETTING NOT In automatic setting mode, axis set-
COMPLETE ting has not been made yet.
Perform axis setting on the FSSB
setting screen.
5139 FSSB : ERROR Servo initialization did not terminate 3

normally. Probable causes include a
defective optical cable and an incor-
rect connection between the amplifi-
er and another module.
Check the optical cable and the con- 4
nections.
5150 PARAM. (No. 1011) The maximum controllable number

SETTING ERROR of axes (parameter No. 1011) is in-
(PM i–H) valid.
Modify the parameter.
5
5160 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN There is a multipath command for-
MULTI PATH mat error. Modify the program.
5161 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT There is an axis duplication between

paths. Modify the program.
5162 FEED RATE IS ZERO IN Whenever performing cutting feed in

6
MULTI PATH multipath mode, specify the F com-
mand.
5163 ILLEGAL WAIT M–CODE There is a command format error in

COMMAND the wait M code. Modify the pro-
gram. 7
5164 ILLEGAL G–CODE IN The specified G code cannot be
MULTI PATH used in multipath mode. Modify the
program.
5165 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN There is an error in parameter Nos.

MULTI PATH 8003 and 8010. Correct the parame- 8
ters.
5166 CHECK THE PMC AXIS PMC axis control is in the alarm
INTERFACE condition. Release the alarm, then
start multipath operation.
5197 FSSB : OPEN TIME OUT The CNC permitted FSSB to open, 9
but FSSB was not opened.
5198 FSSB : ID DATA NOT READ Temporary assignment failed, so

amplifier initial ID information could
not be read.
5222 SRAM CORRECTABLE A correctable error occurred in the

10
ERROR SRAM (ECC).
This does not immediately affect op-
eration. If alarm 935 is issued, re-
place the memory module, and re-
store the SRAM memory data.
308
9. ERROR CODE LIST

5225 ILLEGAL MACRO A macro library for the Power Mate i–
EXECUTOR MODEL H is registered in the Power
Mate i–MODEL D. Alternatively, a
macro library for the Power Mate i–
MODEL D is registered in the Power
Mate i–MODEL H.
5226 ILLEGAL C LANGUAGE A C library for the Power Mate i–

EXECUTOR MODEL H is registered in the Power
Mate i–MODEL D. Alternatively, a C
library for the Power Mate i–MODEL
D is registered in the Power Mate i–
MODEL H.
5240 ALL PROGRAMS HAVE Because the number of digits of a

BEEN DELETED program number was changed, all
the programs were deleted.
5246 ELECTRONIC CAM An error is found in the following

PARAMETER ILLEGAL electronic cam parameters. Correct
the setting.
Parameter No. 8086 (cam shaft axis
number)
Parameter No. 8087 (follow–up axis
selection)
Parameter No. 8088 (number of cam
shape data items)
Bit 0 of parameter No. 1006 (rotation
axis setting)
Bit 0 of parameter No. 1008 (rollover
setting)
Parameter No. 1260 (travel distance
per rotation of the rotation axis)
5247 CAM DATA ILLEGAL D The cam data checksum is ille-

gal.
D The cam shaft phase number of
cam data is illegal.
D Cam data transfer failed.
5248 CAM DATA AREA D Because of the absence of the

INSUFFICIENT option of part program storage
equivalent to the 160 m or more
tape, an enough area for storing
cam data cannot be allocated.
D Because the amount of cam data
is too large, the storage area be-
comes insufficient.
5249 ELECTRONIC CAM CAN Phase matching or electronic cam

NOT EXECUTE operation could not be executed for
one of the following reasons:
D Phase matching was performed
without storing cam data.
D Electronic cam operation was
executed before phase matching
was not completed.
D The electronic cam function was
executed while movement along
an axis was being performed by
another function.
5261 PMC INDIRECT COMMAND An indirect command for PMC axis

IS ILLEGAL control is illegal.
309
5262 NO SYNCHRO MODE Turn the synchronization mode sig-
nal on. Check that the parameters
1
for synchronization are specified
correctly.
5263 ILLEGAL SYNCHRO The specified parent axis travel dis-

COMMAND FORMAT tance is not an valid value.
2
5264 AXIS MOVES TO THE The machine was rotated too much
OPPOSITE in the direction opposite to that of
synchronization command.
This alarm is issued if the machine
goes too much in the opposite direc-
tion, not if the machine starts to move 3
in the opposite direction.
5265 REFERENCE RETURN IN Turn the synchronization mode sig-
SYNCHRO MODE nal off before executing reference
position return.
5266 PARENT AXIS IS NOT Specify the parent axis as the rota- 4
ROTATION ONE tion axis before executing the start
point synchronization command.
5267 ILLEGAL SYNCHRO AXIS Specify the synchronization parent

SETTING axis parameter (PRM 8380) and the
parent axis category parameter
(PRM8381) correctly.
5
5268 NON–SYNCHRO AXIS IS An attempt was made to execute a
COMMANDED synchronization command on an
axis that is not related to synchro-
nization or that does not have a par-
ent (uppermost axis). 6
Check the execution program, as
well as the parent axis parameter
(PRM8380) and the parent axis cate-
gory parameter (PRM8381).
5269 ILLEGAL APC AXIS Another function (such as electronic 7

INFORMATION cam) is using APC information. If
this message is displayed, → Turn
synchronization mode off, check that
these settings are invalid, and then
turn synchronization mode on again.
→ Alternatively, cancel the APC 8
specification using the parent
axis category parameter.
5800 SYSTEM COMBINATION The attempted function is invalid be-

MISMATCH cause the system combination is in-
appropriate.
9
See the diagnostic screen for de-
tails.
The inappropriate software is dis-
played next to No. 50 in the diagnos-
tic display.
10
The unusable software is displayed
next to No. 60 in the diagnostic dis-
play.
310
9. ERROR CODE LIST
N o m- Counter
Message Contents Reference
ber plan
1000 to A message created Alarm gener- Apply appropri- Manual pro-
1999 by the user or ated by the ate counter- vided by
machine tool user or ma- measures as machine
builder, using the chine tool explained in tool builder
PMC alarm builder using the manual pro-
message function, the PMC vided by the
is displayed. machine tool
builder.
3000 to A message created Alarm gener- Apply appropri- Manual pro-
3200 by the user or ated by the ate counter- vided by
machine tool user or ma- measures as machine
builder, using a chine tool explained in tool builder
custom macro, is builder, using the manual pro-
displayed. a custom vided by the
macro machine tool
builder.
3000 to P/S ALARM Alarm gener- Manual pro- Manual pro-
3099 ated by the vided by ma- vided by
user or machine tool machine
chine tool builder tool builder
builder, using
the PMC
alarm display
function
9.1.2 Background edit alarm (BP/S alarm)

??? BP/S alarm BP/S alarm occurs in the same num-
ber as the P/S alarm that occurs in
ordinary program edit. (070, 071,
072, 073, 074 085,086,087 etc.)
140 BP/S alarm It was attempted to select or delete in

the background a program being se-
lected in the foreground. (Note) Use
background editing correctly.
NOTE Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line of the
background edit screen instead of the ordinary alarm screen and
is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.
9.1.3 Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm

300 APC Alarm : nth–axis origin Manual reference position return is
return required for the nth–axis (n=1 to 8).
301 APC alarm: nth–axis nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC communica-

communication tion error. Failure in data transmis-
sion
Possible causes include a faulty
APC, cable, or servo interface mod-
ule.
302 APC alarm: nth–axis over nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC overtime er-
time ror.
Failure in data transmission.
ule.
311
303 APC alarm: nth–axis framing nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC framing er-
ror. Failure in data transmission.
1
ule.
304 APC alarm: nth–axis parity nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC parity error.
Failure in data transmission. 2
ule.
305 APC alarm: nth–axis pulse nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC pulse error
error alarm. 3
APC alarm.APC or cable may be
faulty.
306 APC alarm: nth–axis battery nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC battery volt-
voltage 0 age has decreased to a low level so
that the data cannot be held.
APC alarm. Battery or cable may be 4
faulty.
307 APC alarm: nth–axis battery nth–axis (n=1 to 8) axis APC battery
low 1 voltage reaches a level where the
battery must be renewed.
APC alarm. Replace the battery. 5
308 APC alarm: nth–axis battery nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC battery volt-
low 2 age has reached a level where the
battery must be renewed (including
when power is OFF).
APC alarm .Replace battery.
6
309 APC ALARM: Return to the origin has been at-
n AXIS ZRN IMPOSSIBL tempted without first rotating the mo-
tor one or more times. Before return-
ing to the origin, rotate the motor one
or more times then turn off the power.
7
9.1.4 Serial pulse coder (APC) alarm

When either of the following alarms is issued, a possible cause is a faulty
serial pulse coder or cable.
8

360 n AXIS : ABNORMAL A checksum error occurred in the
CHECKSUM (INT) built–in pulse coder.
9
361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL A phase data error occurred in the
PHASE DATA (INT) built–in pulse coder.
362 n AXIS : ABNORMAL A rotation speed count error oc-

REV.DATA (INT) curred in the built–in pulse coder. 10
363 n AXIS : ABNORMAL A clock error occurred in the built–in
CLOCK (INT) pulse coder.
364 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE The digital servo software detected

ALARM (INT) invalid data in the built–in pulse cod-
er.
365 n AXIS : BROKEN LED An LED error occurred in the built–in

(INT) pulse coder.
366 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (INT) A pulse error occurred in the built–in
pulse coder.
312
9. ERROR CODE LIST

367 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the built–in
pulse coder.
368 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA Communication data from the built–

ERROR (INT) in pulse coder cannot be received.
369 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. A CRC or stop bit error occurred in

ERROR (INT) the communication data being re-
ceived from the built–in pulse coder.
380 n AXIS : BROKEN LED The separate detector is erroneous.

(EXT)
381 n AXIS : ABNORMAL A phase data error occurred in the

PHASE (EXT LIN) separate linear scale.
382 n AXIS : COUNT MISS A pulse error occurred in the sepa-

(EXT) rate detector.
383 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (EXT) A count error occurred in the sepa-
rate detector.
384 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE The digital servo software detected

ALARM (EXT) invalid data in the separate detector.
385 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA Communication data from the sepa-

ERROR (EXT) rate detector cannot be received.
386 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. A CRC or stop bit error occurred in

ERROR (EXT) the communication data being re-
ceived from the separate detector.
D The details of serial pulse coder alarm

The details of serial pulse corder alarm are displayed in the diagnosis
display (No. 202, 203) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
#6 (CSA) : The serial pulse corder is defective. Replace it.

#5 (BLA) : The battery voltage is low. Replace the batteries.
#4 (PHA) : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is
defective. Replace the serial pulse coder or cable.
#3 (RCA) : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
#2 (BZA) : The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first
time.
Make sure that the batteries are connected.
Turn the power off, then turn it on again and perform
a reference position return.
#1 (CKA) : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
#0 (SPH) : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is
defective. Replace the serial pulse coder or cable.
313
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
203 DTE CRC STB PRM
1
#7 (DTE) : The serial pulse coder encountered a
communication error. The pulse coder, feedback
cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective.
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or control
card. 2
#6 (CRC) : The serial pulse coder encountered a
card. 3
#5 (STB) : The serial pulse coder encountered a
card. 4
#4 (PRM) : An invalid parameter was found. Alarm No. 417
(invalid servo parameter) is also issued.
9.1.5 Servo alarms

5
401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS The n–th axis (axis 1–8) servo ampli-
VRDY OFF fier READY signal (DRDY) went off.
Refer to procedure of trouble shoot-
ing.
6
404 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS Even though the n–th axis (axis 1–8)
VRDY ON READY signal (MCON) went off, the
servo amplifier READY signal
(DRDY) is still on. Or, when the pow-
er was turned on, DRDY went on 7
even though MCON was off.
Check that the Power Mate i and ser-
vo amp are connected.
405 SERVO ALARM: Position control system fault. Due to

(ZERO POINT RETURN an NC or servo system fault in the 8
FAULT) reference position return, there is the
possibility that reference position re-
turn could not be executed correctly.
Try again from the manual reference
position return.
407 SERVO ALARM: EXCESS The difference in synchronous axis 9

ERROR position deviation exceeded the set
value.
1) The difference in the positional
deviation between the synchro-
nized axes exceeded the value
set in parameter No. 8314.
10
2) The amount of compensation for
synchronization matching ex-
ceeded the value set in parame-
ter No. 8325.
409 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS Abnormal servo motor load has been
TORQUE ALM detected.
314
9. ERROR CODE LIST

410 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS Either of the following errors oc-
– EXCESS ERROR curred.
1) For the n–th axis, the positional
deviation while the operation
was stopped exceeded the value
set in parameter No. 1829.
2) For simple synchronous control,
the amount of compensation for
synchronization matching ex-
ceeded the value set in parame-
ter No. 8325.
This alarm is issued only for a
slave axis.
411 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS The position deviation value when
– EXCESS ERROR the n–th axis (axis 1–8) moves is
larger than the set value.
Refer to procedure of troubleshoot-
ing.
413 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS The contents of the error register for
– LSI OVERFLOW the n–th axis (axis 1–8) exceeded
"231 power. This error usually oc-
curs as the result of an improperly
set parameters.
415 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS A speed higher than 511875 units/s
– EXCESS SHIFT was attempted to be set in the n–th
axis (axis 1–8). This error occurs as
the result of improperly set CMR.
315
417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS This alarm occurs when the n–th axis
– PARAMETER (axis 1–8) is in one of the conditions
1
INCORRECT listed below. (Digital servo system
alarm)
1) The value set in Parameter No.
2020 (motor form) is out of the
specified limit. 2
2) A proper value (111 or –111) is
not set in parameter No.2022
(motor revolution direction).
3) Illegal data (a value below 0,
etc.) was set in parameter No.
2023 (number of speed feedback 3
pulses per motor revolution).
4) Illegal data (a value below 0,
etc.) was set in parameter No.
2024 (number of position feed-
back pulses per motor revolu-
tion).
4
5) Parameters No. 2084 and No.
2085 (flexible field gear rate)
have not been set.
6) A value outside the limit of {1 to
the number of control axes} or a 5
non–continuous value (Parame-
ter 1023 (servo axis number)
contains a value out of the range
from 1 to the number of axes, or
an isolated value (for example, 4
not prceded by 3).was set in pa- 6
rameter No. 1023 (servo axis-
number).
7) An invalid value was specified
for a parameter while torque con-
trol was applied as part of PMC
axis control (the torque constant 7
parameter was set to 0).
420 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS During simple synchronous control,

SYNC TORQUE the difference between the torque
commands for the master and slave
axes exceeded the value set in pa- 8
rameter No. 2031.
421 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS The difference between the errors in

EXCESS ER (D) the semi–closed loop and closed
loop has become excessive during
dual position feedback. Check the
values of the dual position conver- 9
sion coefficients in parameters No.
2078 and 2079.
422 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS In torque control of PMC axis control,
a specified allowable speed has
been exceeded. 10
423 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS In torque control of PMC axis control,
the parameter–set allowable cumu-
lative travel distance has been ex-
ceeded.
430 n AXIS : SV. MOTOR A servo motor overheat occurred.

OVERHEAT
431 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD 1) PSM: Overheat occurred.

2) β series SVU: Overheat oc-
curred.
316
9. ERROR CODE LIST

432 n AXIS : CNV. LOWVOLT 1) PSM: Phase missing occurred
CON./POWFAULT in the input voltage.
2) PSMR: The control power sup-
ply voltage has dropped.
3) α series SVU: The control power
supply voltage has dropped.
433 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT 1) PSM: The DC link voltage has
DC LINK dropped.
2) PSMR: The DC link voltage has
dropped.
3) α series SVU: The DC link volt-
age has dropped.
4) β series SVU: The DC link volt-
age has dropped.
434 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT SVM: The control power supply volt-
CONTROL age has dropped.
435 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT DC SVM: The DC link voltage has
LINK dropped.
436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL The digital servo software detected

(OVC) the soft thermal state (OVC).
437 n AXIS : CNV. PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the in-

OVERCURRENT POWER put circuit.
438 n AXIS : INV. ABNORMAL 1) SVM: The motor current is too

CURRENT high.
2) α series SVU: The motor current
is too high.
3) β series SVU: The motor current
is too high.
439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT 1) PSM: The DC link voltage is too

POWER high.
2) PSMR: The DC link voltage is
too high.
3) α series SVU: The C link voltage
is too high.
4) β series SVU: The link voltage is
too high.
440 n AXIS : CNV. EX 1) PSMR: The regenerative dis-
DECELERATION POW. charge amount is too large.
2) α series SVU: The regenerative
discharge amount is too large.
Alternatively, the regenerative
discharge circuit is abnormal.
441 n AXIS : ABNORMAL The digital servo software detected

CURRENT OFFSET an abnormality in the motor current
detection circuit.
442 n AXIS : CNV. CHARGE 1) PSM: The spare discharge cir-

FAULT/INV. DB cuit of the DC link is abnormal.
2) PSMR: The spare discharge cir-
cuit of the DC link is abnormal.
3) α series SVU: The dynamic
brake circuit is abnormal.
317
443 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING 1) PSM: The internal stirring fan
FAN FAILURE failed.
1
2) PSMR: The internal stirring fan
failed.
3) β series SVU: The internal stir-
ring fan failed.
2
444 n AXIS : INV. COOLING FAN SVM: The internal stirring fan failed.
FAILURE
445 n AXIS : SOFT The digital servo software detected a

DISCONNECT ALARM broken wire in the pulse coder.
446 n AXIS : HARD A broken wire in the built–in pulse 3

DISCONNECT ALARM coder was detected by hardware.
447 n AXIS : HARD A broken wire in the separate detec-

DISCONNECT (EXT) tor was detected by hardware.
448 n AXIS : UNMATCHED The sign of feedback data from the

FEEDBACK ALARM built–in pulse coder differs from that 4
of feedback data from the separate
detector.
449 n AXIS : INV. IPM ALARM 1) SVM: IPM (intelligent power

module) detected an alarm.
2) α series SVU: IPM (intelligent 5
power module) detected an
alarm.
460 n AXIS : FSSB FSSB communication was discon-

DISCONNECT nected suddenly. The possible
causes are as follows: 6
1) The FSSB communication cable
was disconnected or broken.
2) The power to the amplifier was
turned off suddenly.
3) A low–voltage alarm was issued 7
by the amplifier.
461 n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP The axes of the 2–axis amplifier
INTERFACE were assigned to the fast type inter-
face.
462 n AXIS : SEND CNC DATA Because of an FSSB communica- 8

FAILED tion error, a slave could not receive
correct data.
463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE Because of an FSSB communica-

DATA FAILED tion error, the servo system could not
receive correct data.
9
464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA An attempt was made to write main-
FAILED tenance information on the amplifier
maintenance screen, but it failed.
465 n AXIS : READ ID DATA At power–up, amplifier initial ID in-

FAILED formation could not be read.
10
466 n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP The maximum current rating for the
COMBINATION amplifier does not match that for the
motor.
NOTE If any of servo alarms 400 to 466 occurs, investigate the cause of
the alarm and take appropriate action, as described in the mainte-
nance manual.
318
9. ERROR CODE LIST
D Details of servo alarm

The details of servo alarm are displayed in the diagnosis display (No.
200, 201, 204) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
#7 (OVL) : An overload alarm is being generated.

(See No.201 for details.)
#6 (LV) : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
#5 (OVC) : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of
digital servo.
#4 (HCA) : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in
servo amp.
#3 (HVA) : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo
amp.
#2 (DCA) : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being
generated in servo amp.
#1 (FBA) : A disconnection alarm is being generated.
#0 (OFA) : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital
servo.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
201 ALD EXP
When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 :

#7 (ALD) 0 : Motor overheating
1 : Amplifier overheating
When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 :
ALD EXP Alarm details

1 0 Built–in pulse coder disconnection (hardware)
1 1 Separately installed pulse coder disconnection

(hardware)
0 0 Pulse coder is not connected due to software.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
#6 (OFS) : A current conversion error has occured in the digital

servo.
#5 (MCC) : A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier
has welded.
#4 (LDA) : The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is
defective
#3 (PMS) : A feedback pulse error has occured because the
feedback cable is defective.
319
9.1.6 Overtravel alarms
If this alarm occurs, manually move the machine in the direction
opposite to that in which the machine was moving when the alarm
1
occurred, then reset the alarm.

500 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) + side 2
stored stroke check I.
(Parameter No.1320 or 1326 Note)
501 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) – side

stored stroke check I.
(Parameter No.1321 or 1327 Note)
3
506 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) + side
hardware OT.
507 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1 to 8) – side

hardware OT.
4
9.1.7 Overheat alarms

5
700 OVERHEAT: Control unit overheat
CONTROL UNIT Check that the fan motor operates normal-
ly, and clean the air filter.
701 OVERHEAT: FAN The fan motor on the top of the cabinet for
MOTOR the contorl unit is overheated. Check the 6
operation of the fan motor and replace the
motor if necessary.
9.1.8 Rigid tapping alarms 7

740 RIGID TAP ALARM: The positional deviation of the stopped
EXCESS ERROR spindle has exceeded the set value dur-
ing rigid tapping. 8
741 RIGID TAP ALARM: The positional deviation of the moving
EXCESS ERROR spindle has exceeded the set value dur-
ing rigid tapping.
742 RIGID TAP ALARM: An LSI overflow has occurred for the
LSI OVERFLOW spindle during rigid tapping.
9
10
320
9. ERROR CODE LIST
9.1.9 Serial spindle alarms

749 S–SPINDLE LSI A communication error occurred for the se-
ERROR rial spindle. The cause may be the discon-
nection of an cable or the interruption of the
power to the spindle amplifier.
(Note) Unlike spindle alarm No. 750, this
alarm occurs when a serial com-
munication alarm is detected after
the spindle amplifier is normally
activated.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL This alarm is generated when the spindle

LINK START FAULT control unit is not ready for starting correct-
ly when the power is turned on in the sys-
tem with the serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as fol-
lows:
1) An improperly connected optic cable,
or the spindle control unit’s power is
OFF.
2) When the NC power was turned on un-
der alarm conditions other than SU–01
or AL–24 which are shown on the LED
display of the spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier
power off once and perform startup
again.
3) Other reasons (improper combination
of hardware)
This alarm does not occur after the
system including the spindle control
unit is activated.
4) The second spindle (when SP2, bit 4 of
parameter No. 3701, is 1) is in one of
the above conditions 1) to 3).
See diagnostic display No. 409 for details.
751 FIRST SPINDLE This alarm indicates in the NC that an

ALARM DETECTION alarm is generated in the spindle unit of the
(AL–XX) system with the serial spindle. The alarm
is displayed in form AL–XX (XX is a num-
ber). Refer to Subsection 9.1.13. The
alarm number XX is the number indicated
on the spindle amplifier. The CNC holds
this number and displays on the screen.
752 SPINDLE MODE This alarm is generated if the system does

CHANGE FAULT not properly terminate a mode change.
The modes include the spindle position-
ing, rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the
spindle control unit does not respond cor-
rectly to the mode change command is-
sued by the NC.
754 SPINDLE ABNORMAL Abnormal first spindle motor load has been
TORQUE ALM detected.
321
The details of the spindle alarm No. 750 is displayed in the diagnosis display
(No. 409) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1
409 SPE S1E SHE
#3 (SPE) 0 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle

parameters fulfill the spindle unit startup
conditions.
2
1 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle
parameters do not fulfill the spindle unit startup
conditions.
#1 (S1E) 0 : The spindle is normal during the spindle serial 3
control startup.
1 : The spindle was detected to have a fault during the
spindle axis serial control startup.
#0 (SHE) 0 : The serial spindle communications unit in the CNC
is normal. 4
1 : The serial spindle communications unit in the CNC
was detected to have a fault.
9.1.10 System alarms 5

(These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.)

900 ROM PARITY A parity error occurred in the CNC, or servo 6
ROM. Correct the contents of the flash
ROM having the displayed number.
910 SRAM PARITY : A RAM parity error occurred in the part pro-
(BYTE 0) gram storage RAM. Clear the RAM, or re-
place the SRAM module or base PCB. 7
911 SRAM PARITY : Subsequently, re–set the parameters and
(BYTE 1) all other data.
912 DRAM PARITY : A RAM parity error occurred in the DRAM

(BYTE 0) module. Replace the DRAM module.
913 DRAM PARITY : 8

(BYTE 1)
914 DRAM PARITY :

(BYTE 2)
915 DRAM PARITY :

(BYTE 3)
9
916 DRAM PARITY :
(BYTE 4)
917 DRAM PARITY :

(BYTE 5) 10
918 DRAM PARITY :
(BYTE 6)
919 DRAM PARITY :

(BYTE 7)
920 SERVO ALARM Servo alarm (first to fourth axis). A watch-

(1–4 AXIS) dog alarm condition occurred, or a RAM
parity error occurred in the axis control
card.
Replace the axis control card.
322
9. ERROR CODE LIST

921 SERVO ALARM Servo alarm (fifth to eighth axis). A watch-
(5–8 AXIS) dog alarm condition occurred, or a RAM
parity error occurred in the axis control
card.
926 FSSB ALARM FSSB alarm.

930 CPU INTERRUPT CPU error (abnormal interrupt).

The base PCB or CPU card may be faulty.
935 SRAM ECC ERROR An uncorrectable error occurred in SRAM.

(ECC)
Replace the memory module and restore
the data in SRAM memory.
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM An error occurred in the PMC.

The PMC control circuit on the base PCB
may be faulty.
951 PMC WATCH DOG An error occurred in the PMC.
ALARM (Watchdog alarm)
The base PCB may be faulty.
972 NMI OCCURRED IN An NMI occurred on a board other than the

OTHER MODULE option board.
The option board may be faulty.
973 NON MASK An NMI occurred as a result of an unknown

INTERRUPT cause.
974 F–BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the FANUC bus.

The base PCB or option board may be
faulty.
975 BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the base PCB.

976 L–BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the local bus.

977 NMI FROM SLAVE A communication error occurred in the

SLC FANUC I/O slave function.
978 FAN OVER HEAT There is a risk of overheating in the Power

ALARM Mate main unit.
Replace both two cooling fans.
323
9.1.11 List of alarms (PMC)
(1) Alarm messages (PMC)
1
Message Contents and solution
ALARM NOTHING Normal status
ER01 PROGRAM The sequence program is defective.

DATA ERROR (RAM)
2
Please clear the RAM and input LADDER again.
ER02 PROGRAM The size of sequence program exceeds the maximum

SIZE OVER size of LADDER.
Please change MAX LADDER AREA SIZE at the
SYSPRM screen and restart the system. 3
ER03 PROGRAM The size of sequence program exceeds the option speci-
SIZE ERROR fication size.
(OPTION)
Please increase the option specification size.
Or, reduce the size of sequence program.
ER04 PMC TYPE The PMC model setting of the sequence program is not
4
UNMATCH corresponding to an actual model.
Re–convert the machine model, using an offline program-
mer.
ER05 PMC MODULE The module type of the PMC engine is not correct.
TYPE ERROR
5
Please change the base PC board.
ER07 NO OPTION There is no step number option of LADDER.

(LADDER STEP)
ER10 OPTION AREA The management software for the PMC–SB has not been
NOTHING transferred. 6
(series name)
The software installation is not consistent with the order.
Contact FANUC.
ER12 OPTION AREA The series of the management software for the PMC–SB
ERROR differs between BASIC and OPTION.
(series name)
Contact FANUC.
7
ER14 OPTION AREA The edition of the management software for the PMC–SB
VERSIION ERROR differs between BASIC and OPTION.
(series name)
Contact FANUC.
ER17 PROGRAM The parity error occurred on FROM for sequence program 8
PARITY or the RAM.
ROM: The deterioration of FROM may be deteriorated
Please exchange memory module.
ER18 PROGRAM Transferring the sequence program from offline program-

DATA ERROR BY I/O mer was interrupted by the power off etc. 9
Please clear the sequence program and transfer the se-
quence program again.
ER19 LADDER DATA Editing the LADDER was interrupted by the power off or
ERROR by the switch to the CNC screen by the function key etc.
Please edit LADDER once on PMC.
10
Or, please input LADDER again.
ER20 SYMBOL/ Editing the symbol and comment was interrupted by the
COMMENT DATA power off or by the switch to the CNC screen by the func-
ERROR tion key etc.
Please edit symbol and comment once on PMC.
Or, please input symbol and comment again.
324
9. ERROR CODE LIST

ER21 MESSAGE Editing the message data was interrupted by the power off
DATA ERROR or the switch to the CNC screen by the function key etc.
Please edit message data once on PMC.
Or, please input message data again.
ER22 PROGRAM There is no sequence program

NOTHING
ER23 PLEASE TURN There is a change in setting LADDER MAX AREA SIZE
OFF POWER etc.
Please restart the system to make the change effective.
ER25 SOFTWARE The PMC–SB management software editions are incon-
VERSION ERROR sistent.
(PMCAOPT)
Contact FANUC.
ER26 SOFTWARE The PMC–SB management software cannot be initial-

VERSION ERROR ized.
(PMCAOPT)
Contact FANUC.
ER33 SLC ERROR The LSI for I/O Link is defective.
Please exchange the base PC board.
ER34 SLC ERROR The communication with the DI/DO units of the xx group
(xx) failed.
Please confirm the connection of the cable connected to
the DI/DO units of the xx group.
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turned on earlier
than CNC and
PMC. Or, please exchange the module of PMC engine on
the DI/DO units of the xx group
ER35 TOO MUCH The number of the output data in the xx group exceeded
OUTPUT DATA IN the max. The data, which exceed 32 bytes, become inef-
GROUP (xx) fective.
Please refer to the following for the number of the data for
each group.
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A connecting and mainte-
nance manual” (B–61813E)
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B connecting manu-
al”(B–62163E)
ER36 TOO MUCH The number of the input data in the xx group exceeded the
INPUT DATA IN max. The data, which exceed 32 bytes, become ineffec-
GROUP (xx) tive.
Please refer to the following for the number of the data for
each group.
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A connecting and mainte-
nance manual” (B–61813E)
“FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B connecting manu-
al”(B–62163E)
ER38 MAX SETTING The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
OUTPUT DATA OVER (The assignment data of output side of xx group or later
(xx) become ineffective.)
Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less
for the number of the output data of each group.
ER39 MAX SETTING The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
INPUT DATA OVER (The assignment data of input side of xx group or later be-
(xx) come infective.)
Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less
for the number of the input data of each goup.
*When ER00 to ER26 occur, sequence program is not available.
325
WN03 ABORT LADDER was stopped while CNC and PMC were commu-
NC–WINDOW/EXIN nicating.
1
The functional instruction WINDR, WINDW, EXIN,
DISPB, and etc. may not work normally.
When restarting the system, this alarm will be released.
Execute the sequence program(Press RUN key) after
confirming whether there is a problem in LADDER or not. 2
WN05 PMC TYPE NO A ladder program for the PMC–SA3/SA5 was transferred
CONVERSION to the PMC–SB5.
Correct the ladder type.
WN07 LADDER SP When functional instruction CALL(SUB65) or CAL-
ERROR (STACK) LU(SUB66) was executed, the stack of the LADDER
3
overflowed.
Please reduce the nesting of the subprogram to 8 or less.
(2) System alarm messages (PMC) 4

1 PC004 CPU ERR A CPU error occurred in the PMC.
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy indicate internal error code.
PC006 CPU ERR
5
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy If this error occurs, the base PC board may be faulty.
PC009 CPU ERR
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy Replace the base PC board, then check whether the
PC010 CPU ERR error recurs. If the error still occurs even after the re-
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy placement of the motherboard, report the conditions
under which the error occurred (system configura- 6
tion, operation, time and frequency of error occur-
rences, etc.) to FANUC.
2 PC030 RAM PARITY A RAM parity error occurred in the PMC.

aa:bb aa and bb indicate internal error code.
7
If this error occurs, the base PC board may be faulty.
Replace the base PC board, then check whether the

error recurs. If the error still occurs even after the re-
placement of the motherboard, report the conditions
under which the error occurred (system configura- 8
rences, etc.) and the indicated internal error code to
FANUC.
10
326
9. ERROR CODE LIST

3 PC050 NMI SLC A communication error occurred in the I/O Link.
aa:bb aa and bb indicate internal error code.
or
PC050 I/O Link
If this error occurs, the possible causes are as fol-
aa:bb
lows:
(1) Although the base expansion is assigned when
the I/O Unit A is used, the base is not connected.
(2) A cable is not connected securely.
(3) Cabling is faulty.
(4) I/O equipment (I/O unit, Power Mate, etc.) is
faulty.
(5) The base PC board is faulty.
(1) Check whether the I/O assignment data and the

actual I/O equipment connection match.
(2) Check whether the cables are connected cor-
rectly.
(3) According to ”FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Con-
nection and Maintenance Manual” (B–61813E)
or ”FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B Connection
manual” (B–62163E), check for an error in the
cable specifications.
(4) Replace the I/O unit interface module, cable, or
base PC board. Then, check whether the error
still occurs.
4 PC060 FBUS A bus error occurred in the PMC.

xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy aa, xxxxxxxx, and yyyyyyyy indicate internal error
PC061 FL–R code.
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
PC062 FL–W If this error occurs, the hardware may be faulty.
aa:
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy Report the conditions under which the error occurred
(system configuration, operation, time and frequen-
cy of error occurrences, tc.), the indicated internal er-
ror code, and the LED status on each board to FA-
NUC.
5 PC070 SUB65 CALL A stack error occurred during execution of ladder

(STACK) function instruction CALL/CALLU.
Check the correspondence between the CALL/CAL-

LU instruction and SPE instruction. If the error can-
not be located, report the conditions under which the
error occurred and the ladder program to FANUC.
6 PC080 SYS EMG A system alarm was caused by another software.
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy
PC081 FL EMG Report the conditions under which the error occurred
xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy (system configuration, operation, time and frequen-
cy of error occurrences, etc.), the indicated internal
error code, and the LED status on each board to FA-
NUC.
7 PC097 PARITY ERR A parity error occurred in the PMC system.

(LADDER)
PC098 PARITY ERR If this error occurred, the base PC board may be
(DRAM) faulty.
Replace the base PC board, then check whether the

error recurs. If the error still occurs even after the re-
placement of the motherboard, report the conditions
under which the error occurred (system configura-
rences, etc.) to FANUC.
327
(3) Alarm messages (For EDIT)

1
ADDRESS BIT The address of the relay/coil is not set.
NOTHING
FUNCTION NOT There is no functional instruction of the input number.

FOUND 2
COM FUNCTION The funcitonal instruction COM (SUB29) is not correctly
MISSING dealt with.
Correspondence of COM and COME (SUB29) is incor-
rect.
Or, the number of coil controlled by COM is specified by 3
the model which the number cannot be specified.
EDIT BUFFER OVER There in no empty area of the buffer for the editing.
Please reduce NET under editing.
END FUNCTION Functional instruction END1,END2,END3 and END do

MISSING not exist. Or, there are error net in END1,END2,END3,
4
END.
Or, order of END1,END2,END3, and END is not correct.
ERROR NET FOUND There is an error net.
ILLEGAL FUNCTION The wrong number of the functional instruction is 5

NO. searched.
FUNCTION LINE The functional instruction is not correctly connected.

ILLEGAL
HORIZONTAL LINE The horizontal line of the net is not connected.

ILLEGAL 6
ILLEGAL NET Because the power had been turn off while editing LAD-
CLEARED DER, some net under editing was cleared.
ILLEGAL OPERATION Operation is not correct.

The value is not specified and only INPUT key was
pushed.
7
The address data is not correctly inputted.
Because the space to display the instruction on screen is
not enough, the functional instruction cannot be made.
SYMBOL The symbol which was inputted is not defined.

UNDEFINED 8
INPUT INVALID There is an incorrect input data.
Non–numerical value was inputted with COPY, INSLIN,
C–UP,C–DOWN etc.
The input address was specified for write coil.
An illegal character was specified for the data table. 9
NET TOO LARGE The input net is larger than the editing buffer.
Please reduce the net under editing.
JUMP FUNCTION The functional instruction JMP(SUB10) is not correctly

MISSING dealt with.
Correspondence of JMP and JMPE(SUB30) is incorrect. 10
The number of coil to jump is specified by the model which
the number of coil cannot specified. (It is possible to spec-
ify the coil number only on PMC–SB/SC.)
LADDER BROKEN LADDER is broken.
LADDER ILLEGAL There is an incorrect LADDER.
IMPOSSIBLE WRITE You try to edit sequence program on the FROM.
OBJECT BUFFER The sequence program area was filled.

OVER
Please reduce the LADDER.
328
9. ERROR CODE LIST

PARAMETER There is no parameter of the functional instruction.
NOTHING
PLEASE COMPLETE The error net was found in LADDER.

NET
After correcting the error net, please continue operating.
PLEASE KEY IN SUB Please input the number of the functional instruction.
NO.
If you do not input the functional instruction, please push
soft key “FUNC” again.
PROGRAM MODULE You tried to edit though there was neither RAM for debug-
NOTHING ging nor ROM for sequence program.
RELAY COIL FORBIT There is an unnecessary relay or coil.
RELAY OR COIL The relay or the coil does not suffice.

NOTHING
PLEASE CLEAR ALL It is impossible to recover the sequence program.

Please clear the all data.
SYMBOL DATA The same symbol name is defined in other place.

DUPLICATE
COMMENT DATA The comment data area was filled.

OVERFLOW
Please reduce the number of the commnet.
SYMBOL DATA The symbol data area was filled.

OVERFLOW
Please reduce the number of the symbol.
VERTICAL LINE There is an incorrect vertical line of the net.

ILLEGAL
MESSAGE DATA The message data area was filled.

OVERFLOW
Please reduce the number of the message.
1ST LEVEL The 1st level of LADDER is too large to complete execu-
EXECUTE TIME tion in time.
OVER
Please reduce the 1st level of LADDER.
PARA NO. RANGE The specified machine instruction parameter number is
ERR: MACHINE out of the valid range.
INSTRUCTION NAME
Specify a valid parameter number.
PARA NO. There is a duplicate machine instruction parameter num-

DUPLICATE: ber.
MACHINE
If the duplicate parameter number does any harm,
INSTRUCTION NAME
change it to an unused number.
EXIT?
329
9.1.12 Error messages (for I/O)
(1) Error messages (for I/O (CRT))
1
Messages CONTENTS
PROGRAM ALREADY A program is already stored in the FLASH ROM
EXISTS (during blank check).
PROGRAM ALREADY A program is already stored in the FLASH ROM

2
EXISTS (EXEC ?) (during writing or deleting data).
Press the EXEC key again when the message is
displayed. Data is then written or deleted.
PROGRAM NOTHING No program is in the FLASH ROM.

3
ERASE ERROR The FLASH ROM is faulty and must be replaced.
Consult your FANUC service office.
F WRITE ERROR
L
A READ ERROR
S
H
ANOTHER USED The FLASH ROM is being used by a device other 4
than the PMC.
R MUST BE IN EMG The CNC is not in the emergency stop state.

O STOP NOT EMG
M STOP
NO OPTION There is no ROM cassette option. 5

SIZE ERROR The size of the program exceeds the FLASH ROM
size (during writing of the sequence program).
Use the CONDENSEM function (EDIT/CLEAR
screen). If the error persists, the FLASH ROM size
must be increased. 6
The size of the program exceeds the RAM size
(during reading of the sequence program).
The RAM size must be increased.
10
330
9. ERROR CODE LIST
Messages CONTENTS
I/O OPEN ERROR nn nn = –1: The RS–232C interface is being used by
a device other than the PMC.
Check if another device is using the RS–232C in-
terface.
Check that, on the online setting screen (Section
NO TAG in Part III), NOT USE is set for the
RS–232C item.
nn = 6: There is no RS–232C option.
nn = 20: The RS–232C interface is connected in-
correctly.
H Check that the connection and the setting, such as
O channel and baud rate, are correct.
S
I/O WRITE ERROR nn nn = 20: The RS–232C interface is connected in-
T
correctly.
.
F Check that the connection and the setting, such as
D channel and baud rate, are correct.
C nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed nor-
A mally.
S Check if a cable is disconnected.
.
O I/O READ ERROR nn nn = 20: The RS–232C interface is connected in-
T correctly.
H Check that the connection and the setting, such as
E channel and baud rate, are correct.
R nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed nor-
S mally.
Check if a cable is disconnected.
ADDRESS IS OUT OF Data other than that stored in the PMC debugging
RANGE (xxxxxx) RAM area has been transferred.
xxxxxx: Transfer address
DATA ERROR Invalid data was read.

Check the cable and setting (SPEED).
PROGRAM DATA Data output contains an error

ERROR On the alarm screen, check the details of the alarm.
331
Messages CONTENTS
CREATE ERROR The file name is invalid.
Name the file is the MS–DOS format.
1
NO MORE SPACE The memory card capacity is insufficient.
WRITE ERROR Replace the memory card or delete unnecessary
files and retry.
NOT READY The memory card is not mounted. 2

Confirm if the memory card is mounted correctly.
MOUNT ERROR The memory card is not formatted.

Format the memory card.
WRITE PROTECT The memory card is protected.

3
Remove the protection of the memory card.
BATTERY ALARM The battery of the memory card is not enough.

Exchange the battery of the memory card.
M FILE NOT FOUND Specified file number or file name is not found.
E Confirm the file number or the file name by LIST. 4
M
DELETE ERROR The file cannot be deleted.
O
R Change the attribute of the file.
Y PROGRAM ALREADY The file name already exists.
C
EXISTS Change to other file name. 5
A I/O WRITE ERROR nn nn=30 : The memory card is not mounted.
R I/O READ ERROR nn Confirm if the memory card is mounted correctly.
D I/O COMPARE nn=31 : The data cannot be written to the memory
ERROR nn card.
I/O DELETE ERROR
nn
Remove the protection of the memory card. 6
Exchange the memory card for the S–RAM card.
I/O LIST ERROR nn
I/O FORMAT ERROR nn=32 : The battery of the memory card is not
nn enough.
Exchange the battery of the memory card.
nn=102: The memory card capacity is insufficient.
Replace the memory card or delete unnecessary
7
files and retry.
nn=135: The memory card is not formatted.
nn=105: ditto
Format the memory card.
nn=114: Specified file is not found. 8
Confirm the file number or the file name by LIST.
nn=115: Specified file is protected.
Confirm the attribute of the file.
COMPARE ERR The data between DEVICE and PMC is different.
XXXXXX = AA:BB XXXXXX : Address 9
CONT?(Y/N) aa : The data in PMC
C bb : The data in DEVICE
o
If you continue it, press Y key.
m
Otherwise, press N key.
m
o DATA ERROR Invalid data was read. 10
n Check the cable and setting (SPEED).
PROGRAM DATA Data output contains an error.

ERROR On the alarm screen, check the details of the alarm.
332
9. ERROR CODE LIST
9.1.13 Alarms displayed on spindle servo unit and CNC
Alarm
No. Message Meaning Description Remedy
No.
“A” Program Detects that Install normal
display ROM ab- control program program
normality (not is not started ROM
installed) (due to pro-
gram ROM not
installed, etc.)
7n01 SPN_n_ : AL–01 Motor over- Detects motor Check load

MOTOR heat speed exceed- status.
OVERHEAT ing specified Cool motor
speed exces- then reset
sively. alarm.
7n02 SPN_n_ : AL–02 Excessive Detects motor Check load

EX SPEED speed devi- speed exceed- status.
ERROR ation ing specified Reset alarm.
speed exces-
sively.
7n03 SPN_n_ : AL–03 DC link sec- Detects that Check power

FUSE ON tion fuse fuse F4 in DC transistors,
DC LINK blown link section is and so forth.
BLOWN blown (models Replace fuse.
30S and 40S).
7n04 SPN_n_ : AL–04 Input fuse Detects blown Replace fuse.

INPUT blown. fuse (F1 to F3), Check open
FUSE/ Input power open phase or phase and
POWER open phase. momentary fail- power supply
FAULT ure of power regenerative
(models 30S circuit opera-
and 40S). tion.
7n05 SPN_n_ : AL–05 Control power Detects that Check for
POWER supply fuse control power control power
SUPPLY blown supply fuse supply short
FUSE AF2 or AF3 is circuit .
BLOWN blown (models Replace fuse.
30S and 40S).
7n07 SPN_n_ : AL–07 Excessive Detects that Reset alarm.

OVER- speed motor rotation
SPEED has exceeded
115% of its
rated speed.
7n08 SPN_n_ : AL–08 High input Detects that Flip switch to

HIGH VOLT voltage switch is 230 VAC.
INPUT flipped to 200
POWER VAC when in-
put voltage is
230 VAC or
higher (models
30S and 40S).
7n09 SPN_n_ : AL–09 Excessive Detects abnor- Cool radiator
OVERHEAT load on main mal tempera- then reset
MAIN circuit section ture rise of alarm.
CIRCUIT power transis-
tor radiator.
7n10 SPN_n_ : AL–10 Low input Detects drop in Remove

LOW VOLT voltage input power cause, then
INPUT supply voltage. reset alarm.
POWER
333
Alarm
No.
7n11 SPN_n_ : AL–11 Overvoltage Detects abnor- Remove
1
OVERVOLT in DC link mally high di- cause, then
POW section rect current reset alarm.
CIRCUIT power supply
voltage in pow-
er circuit sec- 2
tion.
7n12 SPN_n_ : AL–12 Overcurrent in Detects flow of Remove
OVERCUR- DC link sec- abnormally cause, then
RENT POW tion large current in reset alarm.
CIRCUIT direct current
section of pow- 3
er cirtcuit
7n13 SPN_n_ : AL–13 CPU internal Detects ab- Remove

DATA data memory normality in cause, then
MEMORY abnormality CPU internal reset alarm.
FAULT CPU data memory. 4
This check is
made only
when power is
turned on.
7n15 SPN_n_ : AL–15 Spindle Detects incor- Check se-
SP switch/output rect switch sequence. 5
SWITCH switch alarm quence in
CONTROL spindle switch/
ALARM output switch
operation.
7n16 SPN_n_ : AL–16 RAM ab- Detects ab- Remove 6

RAM normality normality in cause, then
FAULT RAM for exter- reset alarm.
nal data. This
check is made
only when pow-
er is turned on. 7
7n18 SPN_n_ : AL–18 Program Detects pro- Remove
SUM- ROM sum gram ROM cause, then
CHECK check error data error.This reset alarm.
ERROR check is made
PGM DATA only when pow-
er is turned on. 8
7n19 SPN_n_ : AL–19 Excessive U Detects exces- Remove
EX phase current sive U phase cause, then
OFFSET detection cir- current detec- reset alarm.
CURRENT cuit offset tion ciucuit off-
U set. 9
This check is
made only
when power is
turned on.
7n20 SPN_n_ : AL–20 Excessive V Detects exces- Remove

EX phase current sive V phase cause, then 10
OFFSET detection cir- current detec- reset alarm.
CURRENT cuit offset tion circuit off-
V set.
This check is
made only
when power is
turned on.
334
9. ERROR CODE LIST
Alarm
No.
7n24 SPN_n_ : AL–24 Serial transfer Detects serial Remove
SERIAL data error transfer data cause, then
TRANSFER error (such as reset alarm.
ERROR NC power sup-
ply turned off,
etc.)
7n25 SPN_n_ : AL–25 Serial data Detects that Remove

SERIAL transfer serial data cause, then
TRANSFER stopped transfer has reset alarm.
STOP stopped.
7n27 SPN_n_ : AL–27 Position cod- Detects ab- Remove

DISCON- er signal dis- normality in cause, then
NECT connection position coder reset alarm.
POS–COD- signal (such as
ER unconnected
cable and ad-
justment error).
7n29 SPN_n_ : AL–29 Short–time Detects that Remove
SHORT- overload overload has cause, then
TIME been continu- reset alarm.
OVER- ously applied
LOAD for some period
of time (such
as restraining
motor shaft in
positioning).
7n30 SPN_n_ : AL–30 Input circuit Detects over- Remove
OVERCUR- overcurrent current flowing cause, then
RENT POW in input circuit. reset alarm.
CIRCUIT
7n31 SPN_n_ : AL–31 Speed detec- Detects that Remove

MOTOR tion signal motor cannot cause, then
LOCK OR disconnection rotate at speci- reset alarm.
V–SIG LOS motor re- fied speed or it
straint alarm is detected that
or motor is the motor is
clamped. clamped. (but
rotates at very
slow speed or
has stopped).
(This includes
checking of
speed detec-
tion signal
cable.)
7n32 SPN_n_ : AL–32 Abnormality Detects ab- Remove

RAM in RAM inside normality in cause, then
FAULT the LSI used RAM inside the reset alarm.
SERIAL LSI for serial data LSI used for
transfer. This serial data
check is transfer. This
made only check is made
when power only when pow-
is turned on. er is turned on.
335
Alarm
No.
7n33 SPN_n_ : AL–33 Insufficient Detects insuffi- Remove
1
SHORT- DC link sec- cient charging cause, then
AGE tion charging of direct current reset alarm.
POWER power supply
CHARGE voltage in pow-
er circuit sec- 2
tion when mag-
netic contactor
in amplifier is
turned on (such
as open phase
and defectifve
charging resis-
3
tor).
7n34 SPN_n_ : AL–34 Parameter Detects param- Set correct
PARAME- data setting eter data set data.
TER beyond allow- beyond allow-
SETTING able range of able range of 4
ERROR values values.
7n35 SPN_n_ : AL–35 Excessive Detects gear Set correct

EX gear ratio ratio data set data.
SETTING data setting beyond allow-
GEAR able range of
RATIO values.
5
7n36 SPN_n_ : AL–36 Error counter Detects error Correct
OVER- overflow counter over- cause, then
FLOW flow. reset alarm.
ERROR
COUNTER 6
7n37 SPN_n_ : AL–37 Speed detec- Detects incor- Set correct
SPEED tor parameter rect setting of data.
DETECT setting error parameter for
PAR. number of
ERROR speed detec- 7
tion pulses.
7n41 SPN_n_ : AL–41 Alarm for indi- Detects failure Make signal
1–ROT cating failure in detecting adjustment
POS–COD- in detecting position coder for signal
ER ERROR position coder 1–rotation sig- conversion
1–rotaion signal. circuit. 8
nal. Check cable
shield status.
7n42 SPN_n_ : AL–42 Alarm for indi- Detects that Make 1–rota-
NO 1–ROT. cating posi- position coder tion signal
POS–COD- tion coder 1–rotation sig- adjustment 9
ER 1–rotation signal has not is- for signal
DETECT nal not de- sued. conversion
tected circuit.
7n43 SPN_n_ : AL–43 Alarm for indi- Detects that Check that
DISCON. cating discon- main spindle main spindle
PC FOR nection of position coder position cod- 10
DIF. SP. position coder signal used for er signal is
MOD. signal for dif- differential connected to
ferential speed mode is connector
speed mode not connected CN12.
yet (or is dis-
connected).
336
9. ERROR CODE LIST
Alarm
No.
7n44 SPN_n_ : AL–44 Control circuit Abnormality Replace the
CONTROL abnormal has occurred in A/D converter
CIRCUIT (A/D convert- the A/D con- printed–
(AD) er) verter. circuit board.
ERROR
7n46 SPN_n_ : AL–46 Alarm for indi- Detects failure Make 1–rota-
SCREW cating failure in detecting tion signal
1–ROT in detecting position coder adjustment
POS–COD. position coder 1–rotation sig- for signal
ALARM 1–rotation sig- nasl in thread conversion
nal in thread cutting opera- circuit.
cutting operation. Check cable
tion. shield status.
7n47 SPN_n_ : AL–47 Position cod- Detects incor- Make signal
POS–COD- er signal ab- rect position adjustment
ER normality coder signal for signal
SIGNAL count opera- conversion
ABNOR- tion. circuit.
MAL Check cable
shield status.
7n49 SPN_n_ : AL–49 The con- Detects that Calculate dif-
HIGH verted differ- speed of other ferential
CONV. DIF. ential speed spindle con- speed by
SPEED is too high. verted to speed multiplying
of local spindle speed of oth-
has exceeded er spindle by
allowable limit gear ratio.
in differential Check if cal-
mode. culated value
is not greater
than maxi-
mum speed
of motor.
7n50 SPN_n_ : AL–50 Excessive Detects that Calculate mo-
SPNDL speed com- speed com- tor speed by
CONTROL mand calcula- mand calcula- multiplying
OVER- tion value in tion value ex- specified
SPEED spindle syn- ceeded allow- spindle
chronization able range in speed by
control spindle syn- gear ratio.
chronization Check if cal-
control. culated value
is not greater
than maxi-
mum speed
of motor.
7n51 SPN_n_ : AL–51 Undervoltage Detects that Remove
LOW VOLT at DC link DC power sup- cause, then
DC LINK section ply voltage of reset alarm.
power circuit
has dropped
(due to mo-
mentary power
failure or loose
contact of mag-
netic contac-
tor).
7n52 SPN_n_ : AL–52 ITP signal ab- Detects ab- Replace ser-
ITP normality I normality in vo amp. PCB.
SIGNAL synchroniza -
ABNOR- tion signal (ITP
MAL I signal ) used in
software.
337
Alarm
No.
7n53 SPN_n_ : AL–53 ITP signal ab- Detects ab- Replace ser-
1
ITP normality II normality in vo amp. PCB.
SIGNAL synchroniza -
ABNOR- tion signal (ITP
MAL II signal) used in
hardware. 2
7n56 SPN_n_ : AL–56 The cooling The cooling fan Check the
INNER fan in the unit in the control turning state
COOLING stopped. circuit section of the cooling
FAN STOP stopped. fan. Replace
the cooling
fan. 3
7n57 SPN_n_ : AL–57 Deceleration Abnormal cur- Check the
EX DECEL- power is too rent flowed selection of
ERATION high. through the re- the regenera-
POWER generative re- tive resistor.
sistor. Alternatively, 4
check wheth-
er the cooling
fan motor is
rotating.
7n58 SPN_n_ : AL–58 Overload on The tempera- Eliminate the
OVERLOA the PSM main ture of the ra- cause, then 5
D IN PSM circuit diator of the reset the
main circuit alarm.
has increased
abnormally.
(Cooling fan
failure, dirt in 6
the cooling fan,
overload opera-
tion, etc.)
7n59 SPN_n_ : AL–59 The PSM The cooling fan Check the
COOLING cooling fan of the control turning state 7
FAN STOP stopped. circuit section of the cooling
IN PSM stopped. fan. Replace
the cooling
fan.
9.1.14 Error codes that may be displayed during high–speed

response function compilation
9
No. Contents
0003 Data exceeding the permissible value was entered.
0004 An address is not entered at the beginning of the block, but a numeric val- 10
ue or symbol is entered.
0005 The address is not followed by data, but by the next address or EOB code.
0006 “–” sign input error. (The “–” sign is entered for an address for which it is
not permitted; or, two or more “–” signs are entered.)
0007 The decimal point input contains an error. (The decimal point cannot be
used.)
0009 An unusable address is entered in the significant information section.
0010 An unusable G code is specified.
338
9. ERROR CODE LIST
No. Contents
0011 The cutting feedrate is not correct.
There are two possible cases:
(1) The feedrate is not specified.
(2) The specified feedrate is 0.
0015 An attempt was made to move the machine along axes that exceeded the
maximum allowable number of simultaneously controlled axes in a single
block.
0053 A comma “,” is entered. (The comma “,” cannot be used.)
0070 The memory size is not sufficient.
0113 A # is entered.
(The # cannot be used in a specification other than travel distance and
speed specifications.)
0114 A macro statement is entered. (Macro statements cannot be used.)
0115 The variable number is invalid.
1000 A “/” is entered. (The “/” cannot be used.)
1001 G codes in groups 00 and 01 are specified in the same block.
1002 The number of words in a single block exceeded the permissible range.
1010 In a G31 block, no axis is specified, or two or more axes are specified.
1011 In a G31 block, an unusable P code is specified.
1020 In an M code block, a G code is specified.
1021 In an M code block an axis is specified.
1022 An unusable M code is specified.
1024 In an M code block, an invalid P is specified.
1025 In an M code block, P is not specified.
1027 In an M code block the feedrate F is specified.
1040 In a continuous feed block, no axis is specified, or two or more axes are
specified.
1091 In a block in which an optional block skip is specified, the feedrate F is

specified.
1094 In a block with an optional block skip, a G code in group 01 is specified.
1096 In a block with an optional block skip, a G code in group 03 is specified.
1100 No axis command is found in the program.
1101 No programs to be compiled (O8000 to O8031) can be found.
1102 In the compile function using a signal, a program number that cannot be
used in a motion program is specified.
1800 A motion program is under execution.
1821 An attempt was made to perform a compile operation in a reset state.
1822 An attempt was made to perform a compile operation when an alarm is

issued.
1823 An attempt was made to perform a compile operation while an NC pro-

gram was under execution.
1824 It is prohibited to edit programs O8000 to O8999.
1825 The program area is protected with a memory protection key.
1826 Background editing is in progress.
339
10. PMC
10.1 Dynamic Display of Sequence Program

(1) Display method
1
1 Press the SYSTEM key, then press the soft key [PMC].
2 Dynamic display of sequence program by pressing [PMCLAD] soft

key.
2
(2) Display contents
Display of current net number
RUN/STOP
status
LADDER NET 0001–0004 MONIT RUN 3
Comment
LOG1 LOG1
ALWAYS1
LOG1
Green
X008.4 *ESP color
EMERGENCY (dark) : 4
STOP Signal is
END1 turned
PORD POR OFF
POWER ON
White
RESET
color
(bright) : 5
Signal is
[ SEARCH ] [ ADRESS ] [ TRIGER ] [WINDOW ] [ ] turned
ON
(3) Searching for the signal (SEARCH) 6

1 Press the [SEARCH] soft key.
2 Using the following keys as described below, search for desired
signal.
D The signals being displayed can be changed by using the
PAGE
7
, PAGE , , and keys.
D [TOP]: Locates the top of the ladder program.

D [BOTTOM] : Locates the end of the ladder program.
D Address.bit [SRCH] or [SRCH] : 8
Single name (symbol)
Search a specified address unconditionally.
D Address.bit [W-SRCH] or or
9
[W-SRCH] :
Searches for a specified address, for the write coils.
D Net number [N-SRCH]:
Displays the ladder program from the specified net address.
D Function instruction number [F-SRCH] or
10
Function instruction name [F-SRCH]: Searches for the
specified function instruction.
D [ADRESS]:
Displays the address and bit number of the specified signal.
D [SYMBOL]:
Displays the symbol of the specified signal. (The address of
the specified signal is displayed if a symbol was not specified
when the program was created.)
340
10. PMC
(4) Turning off the monitor display when the trigger signal changes
(TRIGER)
When the preset trigger signal changes, the system turns off the monitor
display. By using this function, the states of all signals can be accurately
read when the trigger signal changes.
1 Press the [TRIGER] soft key.
2 Press the [INIT] soft key to initialize the trigger parameters.
3 Specify the trigger conditions.
D To turn off the monitor display at the signal’s rising edge (as the
signal changes from 0 to 1), enter the desired data and press
the required keys in the order shown below.
Signal name/address EOB Trigger checkpoint EOB
Count [TRGON]
: Trigger checkpoint:
0: Before the first level of the ladder program is executed
1: After the first level of the ladder program is executed
2: After the second level of the ladder program is executed
3: After the third level of the ladder program is executed
Example) To set the system so that it turns off the monitor display when
the external reset signal (ERS) is input three times, enter the
required data and press the required keys in the order
shown below:
ERS EOB
2 EOB
3 [TRGON]
The specified trigger conditions are displayed at the top of the screen.
TRIGER *MODE : ON G008. 7 : 2 : 003 NET 0001-00005
Specified conditions are displayed.
To turn off the monitor display at the signal’s falling edge (as the signal
changes from 1 to 0), enter the desired data and press the required keys
in the order shown below.
Signal name/address EOB Trigger checkpoint EOB
Count [TRGOFF]
4 Press the [START] soft key to activate the trigger function.
: While the trigger function is operating, TRG is displayed at

the lower right corner of the screen. When the trigger
conditions are satisfied, TRG disappears and the monitor
screen is locked.
5 To interrupt the trigger function, press the [STOP] soft key while the
function is effective.
³ In this case, the specified trigger conditions remain effective.
Pressing the [START] soft key reinstates the trigger function.
6 To search for the instruction where the program was stopped by the
trigger function and blink that instruction, press the [TRGSRC] soft
key.
341
(5) Displaying a divided ladder program (WINDOW)
A ladder program can be divided into up to six sections, and the
individual sections displayed on the screen simultaneously. 1
1 Press the [WINDOW] soft key.
2 Press the [DIVIDE] soft key to divide the dynamic display screen
into the desired number of sections.
: Each time the key is pressed, the screen is divided.
2
LADDER * XXX. . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX * MONIT RUN
NET 0001-0002
LOG1 LOG1 3
LOG1 An unselected divided screen
is indicated by a blue low-in-
tensity bar.
*SP. *SP
4
NET 0020-0021
DOOR. ST. ST
A selected divided screen is

SKIP1. SKIP1 indicated by the purple high- 5
intensity bar.
3 To select the desired divided screen, press the [SELECT] soft key 6
as many times as necessary to move the purple bar to the desired
screen.
: The normal search function can be used within each divided
screen.
4 To change the width of a selected divided screen, press the 7
[WIDTH] soft key.
D Pressing the [EXPAND] soft key increases the number of lines
displayed on a divided screen.
D Pressing the [SHRINK] soft key decreases the number of lines
displayed on a divided screen. 8
5 To terminate the display of a selected divided screen, press the
[DELETE] soft key.
: To terminate screen division, press the [CANCEL] soft key.
9
(6) Dumping (DUMP)
The states of the signals corresponding to a ladder program can be
displayed in hexadecimal, together with the ladder program itself.
1 Press the [DUMP] soft key.
10
342
10. PMC
LADDER * XXX. . . . . . . . . . . . XXX * NET 0001-0004 MONIT RUN
LOG1 LOG1 LOG1 C1
LOG1
*ESP. *ESP EMERGENCY STOP
END1
ADDRESS DUMP
G0000 00 1A 5C 32 22 0D 65 10 01 02 00 10 00 00 10 40. . . . . . .
G0016 01 00 10 23 40 0F 03 20 1A FF 00 00 3A 9B 16 84 . . . . . . .
: When the screen is divided, the states of the signals are displayed
in the lower divided screen.
D To change the data notation
[BYTE] : Data is displayed in units of bytes.
Example) G0000 00 16 84 00 ...
[WORD] : Data is displayed in units of two bytes.
Example) G0000 1600 0084 ...
[D.WORD] : Data is displayed in units of four words,
or four bytes.
Example) G0000 00841600 ...
: When WORD or D.WORD is specified, data is displayed
with the high-order byte placed first.
D To search for an address
PAGE
Use the , PAGE , and [SRCH] keys, as in the normal
search function.
(7) Displaying the function-instruction parameters (DPARA/NDPARA)

The states of the control parameters used in function instructions are
displayed together with the ladder program.
1 Press the [DPARA] soft key.
LADDER * XXX. . . . . . . . . . . . XXX * NET 0001-0004 MONIT RUN
RST ERR1 JOG FEEDRATE

SUB 27 2
JOG CODEB
6
R002
[ 4] The current value of a

control parameter is
G014 displayed below the pa-
[ 800] rameter.
343
: The data notation (binary or BCD) varies with the function
instructions.
2 To terminate the display of parameters, press the [NDPARA] soft 1
key.
(8) Editing the program being executed (ONLEDT: on-line editing)

A sequence program can be edited while a program is being executed,
without stopping its execution. 2
: This function is available only while the edit function is enabled.
1 Press the [ONLEDT] soft key to start the on-line editing function.
The cursor appears on the screen.
2 Modify the program, following the usual editing procedure.
The following changes can be made by means of on-line editing.
3
D Changing the type of contacts ( , )
D Changing the addresses of contacts and coils
D Changing the addresses of control parameters used in 4
function instructions
: The operations that can be performed in on-line editing
are restricted to those that do not change the memory
size of the program. To perform other operations, such
as addition, insertion, and deletion, use the ordinary
editing function.
5
3 To terminate on-line editing, press the key.
: Changes made in on-line editing are temporary. To save a
changed program, set K18.3 (K901.3 for the SB6) to 1 or
transfer the program to the DRAM by using the COPY function 6
from the I/O screen. To enable the use of the program when
the system is next turned on, write it to the FROM from the I/O
screen.
ÂÂ
PMCPRM
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7
K018
or
K901 ÂÂ
#3 0: The ladder program is not transferred to the RAM after on-line 8
editing.
³ To transfer the program, press the following keys in the
order shown, using the COPY function from the I/O screen:
[COPY], [EXELAD], [EXEC]
1: A ladder program is automatically transferred to the RAM after
9
on-line editing.
10
344
10. PMC
10.2 Display of PMC Diagnosis Screen

(1) Display method
1 Press the SYSTEM

key.
2 Press the [PMC] soft key.

3 Display of PMC diagnosis screen by pressing [PMC/DGN] soft key.
10.2.1 Title screen (TITLE)

Display of the title data which is wrote at the ladder programming time.
PMC TITLE DATA #1 MONIT RUN
PMC PROGRAM NO. :

EDITION NO. :
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : 4078 EDITION : 01
(SERIES : EDITION : )
PMC TYPE CONTROL : SB5 PROGRAM : SB5
MEMORY USED : KB
LADDER : KB
SYMBOL : KB
MESSAGE : KB
SCAN TIME : MS
SCAN MAX : MS MIN : MS
[ TITLE ] [ STATUS] [ ANALYS] [ TRACE ] [ ]
1) 1st page
PMC PROGRAM NO. : Set at
LADDER
EDITION NO. : programming
time.
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : EDITTION :
(SERIES: EDITTION : ) Display of a
serial number
PMC TYPE CONTROL : PROGRAM :
and version
MEMORY USED : KB number of
LADDER : KB PMC control
software, used
SYMBOL : KB memory area
MESSAGE : KB and scan time.
SCAN TIME : MS
SXAN MAX : MS MIN : MS
345
2) 2nd page
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :
MACHINE TOOL NAME :
1
CNC & PMC TYPE NAME : Set at
PROGRAM DRAWING NO. : LADDER
diagram
3) 3rd page programming
time. 2
DATE OF PRGRAMING :
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :
ROM WRITTEN BY :
REMARKS :
3
10.2.2 Status screen (STATUS)

Display of ON/OFF condition for I/O signals, internal relays, etc.
4
PMC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN
ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 Signal
G0000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 name
ED15ED14ED13ED12ED11ED10ED9ED8
G0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Status 5
ESTBEA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 of
G0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 signal
G0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : OFF
FIN 1 : ON
G0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6
[ SEARCH] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
1 It is possible to move through the displayed address using the

7
PAGE
and PAGE keys.
2 Searching the specified address or signal name by pressing

[SEARCH] soft key when inputted of Address and number or 8
10
346
10. PMC
10.2.3 Alarm screen (ALARM)

Display of an alarm when an alarm occured in PMC program.
PMC ALARM MESSAGE MONIT RUN

ALARM NOTHING
[ TITLE ] [ STATUS ] [ ALARM ] [ TRACE ] [ ]
10.2.4 Trace screen (TRACE)

Record the signal status to the trace memory when the specified signal is
changed.
(1) Trace parameter screen (TRCPRM)
PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN
TRACE MODE :
(0:1BYTE/1:2BYTE/2:WORD)
1ST TRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA
2ND TRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :
[ T.DISP ] [ EXEC ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
(a) TRACE MODE: Select the trace mode.

0= 1 byte address signal trace
1= Independent 2 byte address signal trace
2= Continuous 2 byte address signal trace
(b) ADDRESS TYPE: 0= Set the trace address by PMC address
1= Set the trace address by physical
address (Using mainly by C language)
(c) ADDRESS : Set the trace address
(d) MASK DATA : Specify the trace bit by hexadecimal code.
For example, set the “E1” when trace the bit
7, 6, 5 and 0. Not execute the tracing when
the bit 4, 3, 2 and 1 is changed, but, the signal
status should recorded at tracing time.
(e.g) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1:E1
347
Ơ Correspond table between binary and hexadecimal code ơ
00002 : 016 00012 : 116 00102 : 216 00112 : 316
01002 : 416 01012 : 516 01102 : 616 01112 : 716
1
10002 : 816 10012 : 916 10102 : A16 10112 : B16
11002 : C16 11012 : D16 11102 : E16 11112 : F16
(e) [EXEC] soft key :
2
Start of tracing.
Clear the trace memory and trace memory contents are update
when the specified signal are changed from previous ones.
The trace memory are always maintained up to the previous
results for 256 bytes from the latest ones regardless of the time
lapse.
3
(2 byte tracing = 128 times.)
(f) [T.DISP] soft key : Display of trace memory contents.

4
(2) Trace memory screen (T.DISP)
PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN
1ST ADDRESS=X008(E1) 2ND ADDRESS=G000(FF) Trace ad-

NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 dress and 5
0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mask
0001 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 data in ( )
0002 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0003 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Newest
0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . status
0005 . . . . . . . .
0006 . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
6
0007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
[TRCPRM] [ STOP ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[TRCPRM] soft key : Return to trace parameter setting screen

[STOP] soft key : Stop the trace operation.
8
[EXEC] soft key : Re-start of tracing (Clear the memory).
10.2.5 Displaying memory data (M.SRCH)

(1) Displaying memory data on the screen 9
D Enter the physical start address of the memory area storing the
data to be displayed, then press the [SEARCH] soft key. Then, 256
bytes of memory data, starting from the specified address, appear
on the screen.
D The memory storing the data to be displayed can be changed by 10
PAGE
using the PAGE and keys.
D The display format can be changed by using the [BYTE], [WORD],

and [D.WORD] soft keys.
(2) Memory data input function
D Setting K17.4 (K900.4 for the SB6) to 1 enables data to be input,
in hexadecimal, to the address to which the cursor is positioned.
348
10. PMC
10.2.6 Signal waveform display function screen (ANALYS)

(Memory card for ladder diagram editing is necessary)
(1) Parameter setting screen (1st page)
PMC SIGNAL ANALISYS(PARAM) MONIT STOP
SAMPLING TIME : 10(1–10 SEC)
TRIGGER ADDRESS : G0007.2
CONDITON : 0
(0:START 1:TRIGGER–ON 2:TRIGGER–OFF)
TRIGGER MODE : 0
(0:AFTER 1:ABOUT 2:BEFORE 3:ONLY)
[ SCOPE ] [ DELETE ] [ INIT ] [ADDRESS] [ ]
SAMPLE TIME: Set the sampling time.

TRIGGER ADDRESS: Specify the trigger address when execute the
record by trigger.
CONDITION: Set the recording start condition.
0: Execute by [START] soft key.
1: Press [START] soft key than execute a
rising edge of trigger signal.
2: Press [START] soft key than execute a
fall edge of trigger signal.
TRIGGER MODE: Set the trigger mode.
0: Record the PMC signal AFTER trigger
signal.
1: Record the PMC signal AROUND trigger
signal.
2: Record the PMC signal BEFORE trigger
signal.
3: Record the PMC signal ONLY trigger
signal be formed.
(2) Parameter setting screen (2nd page)
PMC SIGNAL ANALISYS (PARAM) MONIT STOP
SIGNAL ADDRESS
1 : X0000.0 9 : Y0000.0
2 : X0000.1 10 : R0000.1
3 : X0002.0 11 :
4 : X0005.0 12 : Specify
5: 13 : 16 kinds
6: 14 : recording
7: 15 : signals
8: 16 :
[ SCOPE ] [ DELETE ] [ INIT ] [ ADRESS ] [ ]
349
(a) [SCOPE] soft key : Select the signal wave display screen.
(b) [DELETE] soft key : Delete of the data on the cursor.
(c) [INIT] soft key : Initializes the signal waveform display 1
parameters.
(d) [ADRESS] or [SYMBOL] soft key : Toggles between address
display and symbol display.
2
PMC SIGNAL ANALISYS(PARAM) MONIT STOP
SAMPLING TIME : 10 CONDITION : 1

TRIGGER ADDRESS : G0007.2 TRIGGER MODE : 0
3
X0000.0
X0000.1
X0002.0
X0005.0
0 256(MSEC)
4
[SGNPRM ] [ START ] [ T.SRCH ] [ADDRESS ] [ ]
5
NOTE The above figure is a screen for the attachment to a graphic func-
tion.
If a graphic function is not attached, it is displayed “ J ”.
(a) [SGNPRM] soft key : Return to PMC parameter screen

6
(b) [START] soft key : Start register
(c) [T. SRCH] soft key :
(d) [ADRESS] or [SYMBOL] soft key : Change to address or sym-
bol of signal. 7
(e) [EXCHG] soft key : Change the signal displaying procedure
D Press [EXCHG] soft key.
D Move the cursor to an exchanging signal.
D Press [SELECT] soft key. 8
D Move the cursor to one’ s new address.
D Exchange the signal when press [TO] soft key then press
[EXEC] soft key.
(f) [SCALE] soft key : Change the holizontal scaling time for 9
graphics.
Scaling time is changed 256, 512 and
1024msec when press this key.
(g) CURSOR : Move the holizontal time of displaying

10
on CRT to BEFORE/REVERSE.
350
10. PMC
10.3 PMC Parameter

10.3.1 Input of PMC parameter from MDI
1 Select MDI mode or depress EMERGENCY STOP button.
2 [PWE] set to “1” on SETTING screen or PROGRAM PROTECT
signal (KEY4) turn to “1”.
PWE KEY4
Timer f
Counter f f either one
Keep relay f
Data table f f either one
3 Select the display screen by soft key.

[TIMER] : Timer screen
[COUNTER] : Counter screen
[KEEPRL] : Keep relay screen
[DATA] : Data table screen
4 Move the cursor to desired number.
5 Input the Numeral and press INPUT

key then the data
inputted.
6 [PWE] on SETTING screen or [KEY4] return to “0” after data set.
10.3.2 Timer screen (TIMER)

The variable timer (SUB 3) time is set.
Page number (change by page cursor key)
Specified timer number by program
Refer the address by ladder
program
PMC PARAMETER (TIMER) #001 MONIT RUN

NO. ADDRESS DATA NO. ADDRESS DATA
01 T00 480 11 T20 0 Setting
02 T02 960 12 T22 0 time by
03 T04 0 13 T24 0 msec unit
04 T06 0 14 T26 0
05 T08 0 15 T28 0
06 T10 0 16 T30 0
07 T12 0 17 T32 0
08 T14 0 18 T34 0
09 T16 0 19 T36 0
10 T18 0 20 T38 0
[ TIMER ] [COUNTR ] [ KEEPRL] [ DATA ] [ SETING ]
Setting time : Timer No. 1 – 8 =Max.=1572.8 sec, each 48msec.

Up to 262.1 seconds in units of 8 ms for timer Nos.
9 to 40 subsequent timers (timer Nos. 9 to 150 in
the SB6)
351
10.3.3 Counter screen (COUNTER)
Set and display the preset values and integrated values of the counter
instruction (SUB 5).
1
Page number (change by page cursor key)
Preset value (MAX. value)
(The min. value specified in
the program)
Integrated value 2
PMC PARAMETER (COUNTER) #001 MONIT RUN
NO. ADDRESS PRESET CURRENT
01 C00 100 1 Up to 9999
02 C04 50 2
03 C08 0 0
can be set
for PRE-
3
04 C12 0 0 SET and
05 C16 0 0 CURRENT
06 C20 0 0 for counter
07 C24 0 0 Nos. 1 to
08 C28 0 0 20 (1 to 50
09 C32 0 0
10 C36 0 0
for the 4
RB6/RC4)
[ TIMER ] [ COUNTR ] [ KEEPRL] [ DATA ] [ SETING ]
Refer the address by ladder program

5
Specified counter number by program
10.3.4 Keep relay screen (KEEPRL)

Refer the address by ladder program 6
PMC PARAMETER (KEEP RELAY) MONIT STOP
NO. ADDRESS DATA NO. ADDRESS DATA

01 K00 00000000 11 K10 00000000 7
02 K01 00000000 12 K11 00000000
03 K02 00000000 13 K12 00000000 :
04 K03 00000000 14 K13 00000000
05 K04 00000000 15 K14 00000000 Reserved
06 K05 00000000 16 K15 00000000 by PMC
07 K06 00000000 17 K16 00000000 control 8
08 K07 00000000 18 K17 00000000 software.
09 K08 00000000 19 K18 00000000 Can’ t used
10 K09 00000000 20 K19 00000000 other pur-
pose.
[TIMER] [COUNTR] [KEEPRL] [DATA] [SETING]
9
i) Control of battery-powered memory
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K16 MWRTF2 MWRTF1
10
#7 MWRTF2
#6 MWRTF1 : Write status for battery-powered memory
352
10. PMC
ii) PMC system parameter

Since the system uses keep relays K17 to K19 (K900 to K902 for the
SB6), they cannot be used by a sequence program.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K17 DTBLDSP ANASTAT TRCSTART MEMINP AUTORUN PRGRAM LADMASK
or
K900
#7 (DTBLDSP) 0 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is

displayed.
1 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is
not displayed.
#6 (ANASTAT) 0 : Pressing the soft key to execution starts sampling
by the signal waveform display function.
1 : The signal waveform display function
automatically starts sampling at power on.
: This bit is only effective for those models for which the signal
waveform display function is applicable.
#5 (TRCSTAT) 0 : Pressing the [EXEC] soft key starts tracing by the
signal trace function.
1 : The signal trace function automatically starts
tracing at power on.
#4 (MEMINP) 0 : Data cannot be input by using the memory
contents display function.
1 : Data can be input by using the memory contents
display function.
#2 (AUTORUN) 0 : The sequence program automatically starts at
power on.
1 : Pressing the soft key to sequence program
execution starts the sequence program.
#1 (PRGRAM) 0 : The built-in programmer function does not
operate. (Also, the programmer menu is not
displayed.)
1 : The built-in programmer function operates. (The
programmer menu is displayed.)
#0 (LADMASK) 0 : The ladder programs are displayed dynamically
(PMCLAD).
1 : The ladder programs are not displayed
dynamically (PMCLAD).
353
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K018 CHKPRTY CALCPRTY TRNSRAM TRGSTAT
1
or
K901
#5 (CHKPRTY) 0 : The system performs parity check for the system

ROM, program ROM and program RAM. 2
1 : The system does not perform parity check for the
system ROM, program ROM, or program RAM.
#4 (CALCPRTY) 0 : The built-in programmer function calculates the
RAM parity.
1 : The built-in programmer function does not 3
calculate the RAM parity.
#3 (TRNSRAM) 0 : After on-line editing, the ladder program is not
automatically transferred to the backup RAM.
1 : After on-line editing, the ladder program is
automatically transferred to the backup RAM.
4
#2 (TRGSTAT) 0 : The trigger stop function does not automatically
start at power on.
1 : The trigger stop function starts automatically at
power on.
5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K019 FROM–WRT
or
K902 6
#0 (FROM_WRT) 0 : After editing a ladder, does not automatically
write it to F–ROM.
1 : After editing a ladder, automatically writes it to
F–ROM. 7
NOTE Set all unused bits to 0.
10.3.5 Data table screen (DATA)

1) DATA TABLE SETTING screen (C. DATA) 8
PMC DATA TBL CONTROL #001 MONIT RUN Number
GROUP TABLE COUNT = 2 of data
table
NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE NO.OF DATA
group
001 D0000 00000000 0 10 9
Number
002 D0020 00000011 1 20 of data of
each data
003
table
004
Data
005 length 10
006 Table
007 parameter
008 Head
address of
[ G.DATA ] [ G.CONT] [ NO.SRH] [ ] [ INIT ] data table
(a) [G.DATA] soft key : Select the data display screen of data table.
(b) No. of group [G.CONT] : Set the number of group for data table.
(c) No. of group [NO.SRH] : Move the cursor to specified group.
354
10. PMC
(d) [INIT] soft key : Initialize of data table setting.

No. of group is 1, ADDRESS is D0000,
PARAMETER is 00000000, TYPE is 0, NO. OF
DATA is 3000 (8000 for the SB6).
ƠTable parameterơ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0 : Binary format 1 : BCD format

Protection of input data,
0 : not provided.
1 : provided.
0 : Displayed in binary or BCD
(bit 0 is enabled)
1 : Displayed in hexadecimal
(bit 0 is disabled)
ƠTYPEơ
0 : 1byte 1 : 2bytes 2 : 4bytes
2) Data setting screen (G. DATA)

Group number
Number of page
PMC PRM (DATA) 001/001 MONIT RUN
NO. ADDRESS DATA

000 D0000 0
001 D0001 0
002 D0002 0
003 D0003 0
004 D0004 0
005 D0005 0
006 D0006 0
007 D0007 0
008 D0008 0
009 D0009 0
[ C.DATA ] [G–SRCH ] [ SEARCH] [ ] [ ]
(a) [C.DATA] soft key : Return to data table setting screen.

(b) Group No. [G-SRCH] : Move the cursor to head of specified
group.
(c) Address [SEARCH] : Searching the specified address in
currentup group.
355
10.3.6 Setting screen
Part of the keep relay parameters can be set on this screen.
1
PMC PRM (SETTING) MONIT RUN
For SB5 For SB6
PROGRMMER ENABEL = 0(0:NO 1:YES) (K17.1) (K900.1)
LADDER START = 0(0:AUTO 1:MANUAL) (K17.2) (K900.2)
RAM WRITE ENABLE = 0(0:NO 1:YES) (K17.4) (K900.4) 2
SIGNAL TRACE START = 0(0:MANUAL 1:AUTO) (K17.5) (K900.5)
SIGNAL ANALYS START = 0(0:MANUAL 1:AUTO) (K17.6) (K900.6)
DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN = 0(0:YES 1:NO) (K17.7) (K900.7)
SIGNAL TRIGGER START = 0(0:MANUAL 1:AUTO) (K18.2) (K901.2)
TRANS LADDER (ONLEDT) = 0(0:MANUAL 1:AUTO) (K-18.7): (K901.3)
3
[ NO ] [ YES ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
4
: Values in parentheses indicate the addresses of the corresponding
keep relays.
10
356
10. PMC
10.4 Input/Output of PMC Data

10.4.1 Start of the built-in type PMC programmer
When the PMC data are input/output with I/O device unit via reader/puncher
interface, the built-in type PMC programmer should starts by as following
operation.
: As following operation is not required when the data set from MDI.
1 Select the PMC screen
Press SYSTEM
key and press [PMC] softkey.
2 Confirm to the built-in type PMC programmer is running.
PMC CONTROL SYSTEM MENU MONIT RUN

SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS
PMCLAD : DYNAMIC LADDER DISPLAY

PMCDGN : DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
PMCPRM : PARAMETER (T/C/K/D)
RUN/STOP : RUN/STOP SEQUENCE PROGRAM
EDIT : EDIT SEQUENCE PROGRAM
I/O : I/O SEQUENCE PROGRAM
SYSPRM : SYSTEM PARAMETER
MONIT : PMC MONITOR
[ PMCLAD] [ PMCDGN] [ PMCPRM] [ ] [ ]
parts are displayed, starts of the built-in type PMC programmer.

The card editor is not used but it has PMC-SB system. This case,
[RUN/STOP] and [I/O] function can used but editing of sequence
program is impossible.
3 Keep relay K17.1 (K900.1 for the SB6) should set to “1” if the built-in type
PMC programmer is not start yet.
10.4.2 Input/outputmethod
1 Press key in the initial menu screen, then display to [I/O] softkey.
2 Display next screen
PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT RUN

CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE = HOST
FUNCTION =
DATA KIND =
[ EXEC ] [ CANCEL] [ (NO.) ] [ ] [ ]
357
3 Enter the desired channel number, then press the INPUT
key to set the
number for CHANNEL. 1
1 : JD5A of the main CPU board
2 : JD5B of the main CPU board
4 Specify the I/O unit to be used for DEVICE.
HOST: I/O operation with FAPT LADDER (for personal 2
computer)
FDCAS: I/O operation with a Floppy Cassette Adaptor
F-ROM: I/O operation with a flash EEPROM
M-CARD: I/O operation with a memory card
3
OTHERS: I/O operation with other I/O units
5 Specify the desired function with FUNCTION.
WRITE: Outputting data
READ: Inputting data
4
COMPARE: Comparing data in memory with that in an external device
DELETE: Deleting files on a floppy disk or memory card
LIST: Listing the files on a floppy disk or memory card
FORMAT: Formatting a memory card (all data on the memory card
is deleted.) 5
6 Specify the desired type of data to be output at KIND DATA.
ALL: Ladder programs and executable data
LADDER: Ladder programs
PARAM: PMC parameters 6
7 When FDCAS or M-CARD is specified for the device, a file can be
specified for FILE NO. by either its file number or file name.
8 Specify the RS-232C conditions for each device with SPEED.
9 Check that the settings are correct. Then, press the [EXEC] soft key. 7
10.4.3 Copy function (COPY)
Changes made during on-line editing are transferred to the corresponding
editing ladder program.
8
10
358
10. PMC
10.5 Functional Instruction

10.5.1 Functional instruction list
1) Kind of functional instruction and contents of processing
No. In st ruc- SUB Contents of PMC PMC

tion No. processing -SB5 -SB6
1 END 1 1 1st level
program end
2 END 2 2 2nd level
program end
3 END 3 48 3rd level Not Pro- Not pro-
program end vided vided
4 TMR 3 Timer
5 TMRB 24 Fixed timer
6 TMRC 54 Timer
7 DEC 4 Decording
8 DECB 25 Binary code
decording
9 CTR 5 Counter
10 CTRC 55 Counter
11 ROT 6 Rotation control
12 ROTB 26 Binary rotation
control
13 COD 7 Code conversion
14 CODB 27 Binary code
conversion
15 MOVE 8 Data transfer after
logical product
16 MOVOR 28 Data transfer after
logical sum
17 MOVB 43 One-byte transfer
18 MOVW 44 Two-byte transfer
19 MOVN 45 Specified-byte
transfer
20 COM 9 Common line control
21 COME 29 Common line
control end
22 JMP 10 Jump
23 JMPE 30 Jump end
24 JMPB 68 Label jump 1
25 JMPC 73 Label jump 2
26 LBL 69 Label designation
27 PARI 11 Parity check
28 DCNV 14 Data conversion
29 DCNVB 31 Binary data
conversion
30 COMP 15 Comparison
31 COMPB 32 Binary comparison
32 COIN 16 Coincidence check
33 SFT 33 Shift register
34 DSCH 17 Data search
35 DSCHB 34 Binary data search
359
No. In st ruc- SUB Contents of PMC PMC
tion No. processing -SB5 -SB6
36 XMOV 18 Index data transfer 1
37 XMOVB 35 Binary index data
transfer
38 ADD 19 BCD addition
39 ADDB 36 Binary addition
2
40 SUB 20 BCD subtraction
41 SUBB 37 Binary subtraction
42 MUL 21 BCD multiplication
43 MULB 38 Binary multiplication
44 DIV 22 BCD division
3
45 DIVB 39 Binary division
46 NUME 23 Definition of constant
47 NUMEB 40 Definition of binary
constant 4
48 DISP 49 Message display Note) Note)
49 DISPB 41 Extended message
display
50 EXIN 42 External data input
51 AXCTL 53 PMC axis control
5
52 WINDR 51 Window data read
53 WINDW 52 Window data write
54 PSGNL 50 Position signal
output 6
55 PSGN2 63 Position signal
output 2
56 FNC9X 9X Specified Not pro- Not pro-
function instruction vided vided
57 MMC3R 88 MMC–III window Not pro- Not pro- 7
data read vided vided
58 MMC3W 89 MMC–III window Not pro- Not pro-
data write vided vided
59 MMCWR 98 MMC–II window Not pro- Not pro-
data read vided vided 8
60 MMCWW 99 MMC–II window Not pro- Not pro-
data write vided vided
61 DIFU 57 Rising-edge
detection
62 DIFD 58 Falling-edge 9
detection
63 EOR 59 Logical
exclusive OR
64 AND 60 Logical AND
65 OR 61 Logical OR
10
66 NOT 62 Logical not
67 END 64 Program end
68 CALL 65 Subprogram
conditional call
69 CALLU 66 Subprogram
unconditional call
70 SP 71 Subprogram
71 SPE 72 Subprogram end
360
10. PMC
NOTE DISPB instruction is recommended, as it supports extended func-

tions, such as high-speed display and Kanji character display.
When both DISP and DISPB instructions are used, the Kanji char-
acter display function supported by the DISPB instruction cannot
be used.
10.5.2 Detail of function command

(1) END1
1st level program end SUB 1
(2)
END2
2nd level program end SUB 2
(3)
END3
3rd level program end SUB 48
(Unusable)
(4) ACT W1
Valiable timer TMR
SUB 3
ff Timer no. (1-40)
*1-150 for the SB6
(5) ACT W1
Fixed timer TMRB
SUB 24 ff Timer no. (1-100)

ffff Preset time (unit : msec)
(6) ACT W1
Valiable timer TMRC
ff Timer type
SUB 54 (0:8ms unit,1:48ms unit)
ffff Timer address (2-byte)
ffff Timer register address (4-byte)
(7) ACT W1
Decode DEC
SUB 4 ffff Address of BCD output

ffff Decode instruction
[Decode instruction]
ff ff ← Pos. of digit
01 : Decodes lower 1-digit only.
10 : Decodes upper 1-digit only.
11 : Decodes 2-digit.
Number : Number to be decoded.
(8) ACT W1
Binary DECB
decode
SUB 25 f Length of byte
(1:1-byte, 2:2-byte, 4:4-byte)
ffff Address of code data
ffff Decode instruction
ffff Output address
361
(9) CNO W1 (Count up)
Counter CTR
UPDOWN
SUB 5 ff Counter no. (1-20) 1
RST *1-50 for the SB6
ACT
2
(10) CNO W1 (Count up)
Counter CTRC
UPDOWN
SUB 55 ffff Address of preset value
RST (2-byte)
ffff Counter register address 3
ACT (4-byte)
(11) RNO W1 (Direction output ;

0: Forward,
Rotation control
ROT
1 : Reverse) 4
BYT
SUB 6 fff No. of indexing
DIR
ffff Current position address
POS
ffff Goal position address
INC 5
ffff Output address
ACT
(12) W1 (Direction output ;

6
RNO
Binary rotation ROTB 0: Forward,
control 1 : Reverse)
SUB 26 f No. of byte (1 : 1-byte,
DIR 2 : 2-byte, 4 : 4-byte)
ffff No. of indexing
POS 7
ffff Current position address
INC
ffff Goal position address
ACT
ffff Output address
8
(13) BYT W1 (1 : Error)
COD
Code conversion
RST
SUB 7 ffff Size of data table
ACT ffff Convert data address 9
ffff Output address
(14) RST W1 (1 : Error)

CODB
Binary code ACT 10
conversion SUB 27 f No. of byte
ffff Size of data table
ffff Convert data address
ffff Output address
(15) ACT
MOVE ffff
Logical ffff High-order 4-bit comparison
product SUB 8 ffff Low-order 4-bit comparison
transfer ffff Process data address
Output address
362
10. PMC
(16) ACT
MOVOR ffff
Data
Transfer ffff High–order 4–bit comparison
SUB 28 ffff Low–order 4bit comparison
after logical
ffff Process data address
sum
Output address
(17) ACT
One–byte transfer MOVB
SUB 43 ffff Transfer source address

ffff Transfer destination ad-
dress
(18) ACT
Two–byte transfer MOVW
SUB 44 ffff Transfer source address

ffff Transfer destination address
(19) ACT
Specified–byte MOVN
transfer Number of bytes to be
SUB 45 f transferred
ffff Transfer source address
ffff Transfer destination ad-
dress
(20, 21) ACT

Common COM COME
line control ffff Specify 0.
SUB 9 SUB 29
(22, 23) ACT

Jump JMP JMPE
ffff Specify 0.
SUB 10 SUB 30
(24) ACT
Label JMPB
jump 1 SUB 68 ffff Label number of jump destination
(L1–L9999)
(25) ACT
Label JMPC
jump 2 SUB 73 ffff Label number of jump destination
(L1–L9999)
(26) LBL
Label SUB 69 ff Label number (L1–L9999)
designation
(27) OE W1 (1 : Error)
Parity PARI
check RST
SUB11 ffff Check data address
ACT
OE 0 : Even-parity check, 1 : Odd-parity check
363
(28) BYT W1 (1 : Error)
DCNV
Data
conversion CNV
SUB14 ffff Input data address 1
RST
ffff Output data address
ACT
CNV 0 : Binary to BCD-code, 1 : BCD to Binary-code 2

W1 (1 : Error)
(29) SIN
DCNVB
Extended
CNV
data
SUB 31 f No. of byte
conversion
RST (1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 : 4-byte) 3
ffff Input data address
ACT
ffff Output address
SIN When converts BCD to binary ; 0 : Positive, 1 : Negative

4
[Operation output register]
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9000 V N Z
V : Overflow, Z : Zero, N : Negative 5

(30) BYT W1 (0 : Ref. data > Comp. data),
COMP (1 : Ref. data v Comp. data)
Comparison
ACT
SUB 15 f Format of reference data 6
(0 : Constant data, 1 : Address)
ffff Reference value
(Constant data or address)
ffff Comparison value
(31) ACT 7
Comparison COMPB
for binary SUB 32
data ffff Format of reference data
8
[Format of ref. data]
0 0 1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 : 4-byte
0 : Constant data, 1 : Address

9
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9000 V N Z
V : Overflow, Z : Ref. data=Comp. data, 10

N : Ref. data<Comp. data
364
10. PMC
(32) (0 : Ref. data0Cop. data,

Coincidence BYT W1 1 : Ref. data=Cop. data)
check COIN
ACT
SUB 16 f Format of reference data
(33) DIR W1 (Shufted out)

SFT
Shift CONT
register SUB 33 ffff Data address
RST
ACT
DIR 0 : Left-shift, 1 : Right-shift

CONT 0 : Shift in with 0, 1 : Shift in with 0/1 depend last bit
(34) BYT W1 (0 : Searched data exist,

Data DSCH 1 : Searched data not exist)
serch RST
SUB 17 ffff Size of data table
ACT ffff Starting address of data table
ffff Search data address
ffff Output address
(35) RST W1 (0 : Searched data exist,

DSCHB 1 : Searched data not exist)
Binary
ACT
data
SUB 34 f No. of byte (1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 :
search
4-byte)
ffff Address for size of data table
ffff Starting address of data table

ffff Search data address
ffff Output address
(36) BYT W1 (1 : Error)

Indexed XMOV
data RW
transfer SUB 18 ffff Size of data table
RST ffff Starting address of data table
ffff Input/output data storage address
ACT ffff Table no. storage address
RW 0 : Read mode, 1 : Write mode
(37) RW W1 (1 : Error)
Binary XMOVB
index RST
modifier SUB 35 f No. of byte (1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 :
data 4-byte)
transfer ffff Storage address of no. of data
ACT ffff Starting address of data table
ffff Input/output data storage address
ffff Table no. storage address
RW 0 : Read mode, 1 : Write mode
365
(38) BYT W1 (1 : Error)
Addition ADD
RST
SUB 19 f Data format 1
ACT ffff Summand address
ffff Addend value
(Address or constant data)
ffff Output address
2
(39) RST W1 (1 : Error)
ADDB
Binary ACT
addition SUB 36 ffff Data format
ffff Summand address
ffff Addend value 3
ffff Output address
[Data format]
0 0 1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 : 4-byte
0 : Addend value or address, 1 : Address 4

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9000 V N Z 5
V : Overflow, Z : Zero, N : Negative
(40) BYT W1 (1 : Error, in case of the

Subtraction SUB result is negative.)
RST
SUB20 f Data format
6
ACT ffff Subtrahend address
ffff Subtrahend value
ffff Output address
7
(41) RST W1 (1 : Error)
SUBB
Binary
ACT
Subtraction SUB37 ffff Data format
(The conditions are same as ADDB.)
ffff Subtrahend address 8
ffff Subtrahend value
ffff Output address
(42) BYT W1 (1 : Error) 9

Multiplication MUL
RST
SUB21 f Data format
ACT ffff Multiplicand address
ffff Multiplier value
(Address or constant data) 10
ffff Output address
(43) RST W1 (1 : Error)

Binary MULB
Multiplication ACT
SUB38 ffff Data format
ffff Multiplicand address
ffff Multiplier value
ffff Output address
366
10. PMC
(44) BYT W1 (1 : Error)

Division DIV
RST
SUB22 f Data format
ACT ffff Dividend address
ffff Devier value
ffff Output address
(45) RST W1 (1 : Error)
Binary DIVB
division ACT
SUB39 ffff Data format
ffff Dividend address
ffff Devier value
ffff Output address
(The remainder-data is putput to
operation register R9002-R9005.)
(46) BYT
Definition of NUME
constant ACT
SUB23 ffff Constant data
ffff Output address
(47) ACT
NUMEB
Binary
definition of
constant
SUB40 f No. of byte
(1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 : 4-byte)
ffff Constant data
ffff Output address
(48) ACT W1 (Processing end)

Message DISP
display
SUB49 ffff Sum of step for message data
ffff No. of step for 1-message data
ffff Message control address

Extended DISPB
message
display SUB41 ffff Number of message data

External EXIN
data
input SUB42 ffff Control data address
(51) RST W1 (processing completed)

PMC axis AXCTL
control ACT
SUB 53 f DI/DO signal group number
ffff Data address for axis control
instruction
(52) ACT W1 (Transfer end)

Window WINDR
data
reading SUB51 ffff Control data address
367
(53)
ACT W1 (Transfer end)
Window WINDW
data 1
writing SUB52 ffff Control data address
(54)
ACT
Position PSGNL
signal 2
output SUB 50 ffff Area division specification
Data address
ffff Current position area
Output data address
(55) ACT W1 (Current position area output) 3

Position PSGN2
signal
output 2 SUB 63 ffff Control data address
(56) ACT W1 (Processing end) 4

Arbitrary FNC9X
function SUB
command 90–97 ffff Control data address
(unusable)
(57) ACT W1 (processing completed) 5

MMC3R
MMC–III
window
data read
SUB88 ffff Buffer designation address
(unusable)
ffff Offset address
ffff Data length address
ffff Input data address 6
(58) ACT W1 (processing completed)

MMC3W
MMC–III
window
data write
SUB89 ffff Buffer designation address
7
(unusable)
ffff Offset address
ffff Data length address
ffff Input data address
(59)
8
Window MMCWR
data
reading SUB 98 ffff Input data storage address
for MMC–II ffff Input data length storage address
(unusable)
(60)
9
Window MMCWW
data
writing SUB 99 ffff Output data storage address
for MMC–II ffff Output data length storage address
(unusable)
10
(61) W1 (rising–edge detection)
ACT
Rising edge DIFU
detection
SUB 57 ffff Rising edge number (1 – 256)
*1 to 500 for the SB6
(62) ACT W1 (falling–edge detection)

Falling edge DIFD
detection
SUB 58 ffff Falling edge number (1 – 256)
*1 to 50 for the SB6
368
10. PMC
(63) ACT
EOR
Logical SUB 59 j 0 0 j Format designation
exclusive ffff Address of data to be manipu-
OR
lated
ffff Operating data (address or
constant)
ffff Operation result output address
(64) ACT
AND
Logical
AND SUB 60 j 0 0 j Format designation
ffff Address of data to be manipu-
lated
constant)
(65) ACT
OR
Logical j 0 0 j Format designation
SUB 61
OR ffff Address of data to be manipu-
lated
constant)
(66) ACT
Logical NOT
NOT SUB 62 j00j Format specification
ffff Address of data to be manipu-
lated
(67)
END
Program end SUB 64
(68) ACT
CALL
Subprogram
SUB 65 ffff Subprogram number
conditional
call (P1 to P512 for the PMC–SB5)
(P1 to P2000 for the PMC–SB6)
(69)
CALLU
Subprogram SUB 66 ffff Subprogram number
uniconditional (P1 to P512 for the PMC–SB5)
call (P1 to P2000 for the PMC–SB6)
(70)
SP
Subprogram SUB71 ffff Subprogram number
(71)
SPE
Subprogram SUB72
end
369
AND SYMBOLIC KEY
Table : Correspondence between English key and Symbolic key
Name English key Symbolic key 1
CANCEL key CAN
POSITION key POS

2
PROGRAM key PROG
OFFSET/SETTING key OFFSET

SETTING 3
CUSTOM key CUSTOM
SYSTEM key SYSTEM

4
MESSAGE key MESSAGE
GRAPH key GRAPH

5
SHIFT key SHIFT
INPUT key INPUT

6
ALTER key ALTER
INSERT key INSERT

7
DELETE key DELETE
PAGE UP key PAGE 8

PAGE
PAGE DOWN key
HELP key HELP

9
RESET key RESET
10
CUSTOM/GRAPH key CUSTOM
GRAPH
11
370
MEMO
TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) NO.TMN 05 /078E
Date: 3 Aug., 2005

General Manager of
CNC Laboratory
Correction of FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D

FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK (B-63177EN/01)
1. Communicate this report to:

Your information
GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E
FANUC Robotics
CINCINNATI MILACRON
Machine tool builder
Sales agency
End user
2. Summary for Sales Documents
3. Notice
4. Attached Document : Export Control ( Yes No )
Drawing No. B-63177EN/01-01
No.CLB4-05/7309
3 Aug. 2005
Original section of issue

Department Section Person in
ADE
Manager Manager Charge
1. Type of applied technical documents
Name FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK
Spec. No./Version B-63177EN/01
2. Summary of change
New, Add, Applicable

Group Name / Outline Correct, Date
Delete
Basic
Function
Optional
Function
Unit
Maintenance
parts
Notice
Correction There is one correction.

Correction of "Details of servo alarm " at 9.1.5.
Another
TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D

Correction of digital servo alarm
CUST.
01 05/08/03 Kuwahata New issue DRAW. NO. B-63177EN/01-01
Edit. DATE Design Description SHEET 1/2

9.1.5 Servo alarms
Detaills of servo alarm
Correct item "201" as follow.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
201 ALD EXP
When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200:

Amplifier
#7 (ALD) 0 : Motor overheating
Motor
1 : Amplifier overheating
When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200:
TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D

Correction of digital servo alarm
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63177EN/01-01
Edit. DATE Design Description SHEET 2/2

B-63177en 01 100922

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

B-63177en 01 100922

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Power Mate i - Model D/H

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . s–2

2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–3

3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED 7

4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED

6. RENAMING OF PMC MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–12

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or 3

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being

1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first

2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the

4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly 7

8. Some functions may have been implemented at the 3

Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in

If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the

2. Positioning by nonlinear interpolation

When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation 5

3. Function involving a rotation axis

When programming polar coordinate interpolation, pay

Switching between inch and metric inputs does not

When an axis subject to constant surface speed control

After switching on the power, perform a manual reference

If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation

Note that programmed operations vary considerably

If a command based on the machine coordinate system

When operating the machine manually, determine the

2. Manual reference position return

3. Manual handle feed

If override is disabled (according to the specification in a

Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when 10

Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may

7. Software operator’s panel and menu switches

Using the software operator’s panel and menu switches,

The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block

10. Dry run

Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the

If the machine is stopped, after which the machining

1. Memory backup battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the

The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its

Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary

6. RENAMING OF PMC MODELS

This manual presents programming descriptions for the PMC models

FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E

The Operation and Maintenance Handbook provides information about the

Product Name Abbreviations

1. SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

5. CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC

9. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

10. PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

11. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY

1.1 Display Unit and Key Layout

Fig.1.1 (a) CRT/MDI (9” monochrome)

Cancel (CAN) key

Page change keys

Fig.1.1 (b) MDI keyboard

No. Name Functions 1

key is pressed, Z is canceled and

No. Name Functions

: This key is used to move the cursor to

PAGE PAGE : This key is used to changeover the

[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ (OPRT) ]